1 files changed, 10426 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/33619.txt b/33619.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be51c84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/33619.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10426 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Maori and Settler, by G. A. Henty
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Maori and Settler
+       A Story of The New Zealand War
+
+Author: G. A. Henty
+
+Illustrator: Alfred Pearse
+
+Release Date: September 3, 2010 [EBook #33619]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MAORI AND SETTLER ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by David Edwards, Graeme Mackreth and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration]
+
+MAORI and
+SETTLER
+
+A STORY OF THE NEW ZEALAND WAR
+
+BY G. A. HENTY
+
+
+Maori and Settler
+
+
+
+
+G.A. HENTY'S BOOKS
+
+Illustrated by Eminent Artists
+
+_Uniform with this Edition_
+
+
+Beric the Briton: A Story of the Roman Invasion of Britain.
+
+Bonnie Prince Charlie: A Tale of Fontenoy and Culloden.
+
+Both Sides the Border: A Tale of Hotspur and Glendower.
+
+By Conduct and Courage: A Story of the Days of Nelson.
+
+By England's Aid: The Freeing of the Netherlands.
+
+By Pike and Dyke: A Tale of the Rise of the Dutch Republic.
+
+Facing Death: A Tale of the Coal-mines.
+
+In the Heart of the Rockies: A Story of Adventure in Colorado.
+
+Maori and Settler: A Story of the New Zealand War.
+
+St. Bartholomew's Eve: A Tale of the Huguenot Wars.
+
+St. George for England: A Tale of Cressy and Poitiers.
+
+The Cat of Bubastes: A Story of Ancient Egypt.
+
+The Dragon and the Raven: The Days of King Alfred.
+
+The Treasure of the Incas: A Tale of Adventure in Peru.
+
+Under Wellington's Command: A Tale of the Peninsular War.
+
+With Lee in Virginia: A Story of the American Civil War.
+
+With Wolfe in Canada; or, The Winning of a Continent.
+
+Wulf the Saxon: A Story of the Norman Conquest.
+
+LONDON: BLACKIE AND SON, LTD., 50 OLD BAILY, E.C.
+
+[Illustration: "DROP THAT OR I FIRE!"
+
+_Page 227_]
+
+
+
+
+ Maori and Settler
+
+ A STORY OF
+
+ THE NEW ZEALAND WAR
+
+ BY
+
+ G.A. HENTY
+
+ Author of "Redskin and Cowboy" "In Freedom's Cause"
+ "Bonnie Prince Charlie" &c.
+
+ _ILLUSTRATED_
+
+ BLACKIE AND SON LIMITED
+ LONDON GLASGOW AND BOMBAY
+ _Printed in Great Britain_
+
+
+PREFACE TO THE ORIGINAL EDITION
+
+
+In the following story I have made no attempt to give anything like a
+general history of the long struggle between the brave tribes of New
+Zealand and the forces of England and the colony. That struggle lasted
+over a period of some years, and to do justice to its numerous incidents
+in the course of a single volume would have left no space whatever
+available for the telling of a story. It was divided into two distinct
+epochs. In the first the natives of the north of the islands fought for
+their independence and their right to have a king, and be governed by
+their own laws. Nothing could exceed the courage with which they
+struggled for these ends, and it needed a very strong force of British
+troops to storm their pahs or fortified camps, and overcome their
+resistance. The second epoch embraces the struggle brought about by the
+conversion of a portion of the tribes to the fanatical belief called the
+Pai Marire (literally "good and peaceful"), whose votaries were
+generally known as the Hau-Haus. During the earlier war the natives
+behaved with great moderation, and there were but few cases of the
+murder of outlying settlers. The slaying of all whites was, however, the
+leading feature of the Hau-Hau religion, and many cold-blooded
+massacres occurred during the struggle. The British troops had been for
+the most part withdrawn before the commencement of the Hau-Hau troubles,
+and the war was carried on by bodies of constabulary raised by the
+colonists, and with the aid of tribes that remained friendly to us. The
+massacre of Poverty Bay, which forms the leading feature of my story,
+and the events that followed it, are all strictly in accordance with
+facts.
+
+G.A. HENTY
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS.
+
+
+ CHAP.                                                    Page
+
+ I. A HOME BROKEN UP,                                       11
+
+ II. THE EMBARKATION,                                       30
+
+ III. THE VOYAGE,                                           49
+
+ IV. A ROW ON SHORE,                                        64
+
+ V. A BOAT EXPEDITION,                                      81
+
+ VI. PUTTING IN THE REFIT,                                 104
+
+ VII. A SAVAGE SURPRISE,                                   126
+
+ VIII. THE END OF THE VOYAGE,                              144
+
+ IX. THE NEW ZEALAND WAR,                                  165
+
+ X. THE GLADE,                                             184
+
+ XI. THE HAU-HAUS,                                         205
+
+ XII. THE FIRST ALARM,                                     224
+
+ XIII. THE ATTACK ON THE GLADE,                            244
+
+ XIV. FRESH TROUBLES,                                      263
+
+ XV. THE MASSACRE AT POVERTY BAY,                          282
+
+ XVI. THE PURSUIT OF TE KOOTI,                             302
+
+ XVII. BACK AT THE FARM,                                   321
+
+ XVIII. IN ENGLAND,                                        340
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+                                                          Facing
+                                                          Page
+
+ "DROP THAT OR I FIRE!"                             _Frontispiece_
+
+ A DOZEN SPEARS STRUCK THE WATER ROUND HER                 104
+
+ WILFRID AND THE GRIMSTONES FIND IT HARD WORK              192
+
+ MR. ATHERTON KEEPS THE MOUTH OF THE DEFILE                296
+
+ "I AM AFRAID I AM HEAVY ON A HORSE STILL, WILFRID"        328
+
+        *       *       *       *       *
+
+ Map of Hawke Bay, Poverty Bay, and surrounding Country     16
+
+
+
+
+MAORI AND SETTLER.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I.
+
+A HOME BROKEN UP.
+
+
+"Well, mother, one thing is certain--something has got to be done. It is
+no use crying over spilt milk, that I can see. It is a horribly bad
+business, but grieving over it won't make it any better. What one has
+got to do is to decide on some plan or other, and then set to work to
+carry it out."
+
+The speaker, Wilfrid Renshaw, was a boy between fifteen and sixteen
+years old. He was standing with his back to an empty fireplace, his feet
+well apart, his hands deep in his pockets. He was rather short for his
+age, but very squarely built. His hair was dark, cut rather short, and
+so ruffled over his head that there were no signs of a parting; his
+eyebrows were heavy, his eyes bright but rather deeply set; his chin was
+square and his jaw heavy; his nose was a little upturned, and this
+together with his eyes gave a merry expression to a face that would
+otherwise have been heavy and stern.
+
+At school Wilfrid Renshaw had been regarded as rather a queer fellow.
+He was full of quiet fun, and saw a humorous side in everything. He did
+not take a very leading part in the various school sports, though there
+was a general idea that if Renshaw only chose to exert himself he could
+excel in any of them. In point of actual strength, although there were
+several boys in the school older than himself, it was generally admitted
+that he was by far the strongest there. But he always went his own way
+and always knew his own mind, and when he had once given his decision
+every one knew that it was of no use attempting to alter it; indeed, his
+reputation for obstinacy was so great that when he had once said "I
+won't" or "I will," no one ever attempted to argue with him.
+
+He was given to long walks and to collecting insects or flowers. He
+could never be persuaded to make one of the cricket eleven; but in
+winter, when there was little scope for his favourite pursuit, he threw
+himself into football; and although he absolutely refused to accept the
+captaincy when unanimously elected to that honour, he was considered by
+far the most valuable member of the team. He was scarcely popular among
+the boys of his own age; for although his fun and general good temper
+were appreciated by them, his determination to go his own way, and his
+entire disregard for the opinion of others, caused him to be considered
+an unsociable sort of fellow, an impression increased by the fact that
+he had no particular chums.
+
+Among the smaller boys he was greatly liked. He would never allow any
+bullying when he was present; and although his interference was often
+resented by some of the elders, his reputation for strength and
+obstinacy was so great that he had never been called upon to take active
+measures to support his decisively expressed opinions. His father lived
+in a pretty house a quarter of a mile outside Reading; and as Wilfrid
+attended the grammar-school there, he was much more free to indulge his
+own tastes and go his own way than if he had been in a boarding-school.
+His chief companion in his rambles was his only sister Marion, who was a
+year his senior, although strangers would not have taken her to be so,
+either from her appearance or manner. She had an active lithe figure,
+and was able to keep up with him even during his longest excursions.
+They were in fact great chums and allies, and Marion would have
+indignantly scouted the idea had anyone suggested to her that her
+brother was either obstinate or unsociable.
+
+Mr. Renshaw had been intended for the bar, and had indeed been called to
+that profession; but shortly afterwards he came into a fortune at the
+death of his father, and at once abandoned all idea of practising. After
+travelling for a few years on the Continent and in the East, he married
+and settled down near Reading. His time was for the most part devoted to
+archaeology. He had a rare collection of ancient British, Saxon, and
+Norman arms, ornaments, and remains of all sorts; had written several
+books on the antiquities of Berkshire and Oxfordshire; was an authority
+upon tumuli and stone weapons; and was regarded by his acquaintances as
+a man of much learning.
+
+The management of the house and children, and indeed of all affairs
+unconnected with his favourite hobby, he left to his wife, who was,
+fortunately for him, a clear-headed and sensible woman. Mr. Renshaw was,
+in fact, an eminently impractical man, weak and easy in disposition,
+averse to exertion of any kind, and without a shadow of the decision of
+character that distinguished his son. Except when away upon antiquarian
+excursions he passed his time entirely in his own study, engaged upon a
+work which, he anticipated, would gain for him a very high position
+among the antiquarians of the country, the subject being the exact spot
+at which Julius Caesar landed in Britain.
+
+He made his appearance only at meal-times, and then paid but little
+attention to what was going on around him, although he was kind to his
+children in a gentle indifferent sort of way. For many years he had been
+engaged in making up his mind as to the school to which Wilfrid should
+be sent; and the boy had at first only been sent to the grammar-school
+at the suggestion of his mother as a temporary measure until the
+important decision should be arrived at. This had been six years before,
+and Mr. Renshaw had postponed his decision until it was too late for
+Wilfrid to enter at any of the great public schools.
+
+Knowing from long experience what would be the result were he consulted
+as to Marion's education, Mrs. Renshaw had, when the girl was nine years
+old, engaged a governess for her without any previous consultation with
+her husband, simply telling him of the arrangement after it was
+concluded, saying: "I know, Alfred, that you have not yet decided
+whether an education at home or at school is best for a girl, and I have
+consequently arranged with a young lady to come as governess until you
+can come to a conclusion upon the point."
+
+Wilfrid Renshaw was extremely fond of his mother. His father he regarded
+with a somewhat contemptuous kind of affection. He did not doubt that he
+was a very learned man, but he had small patience with his inability to
+make up his mind, his total want of energy, and his habit of leaving
+everything for his wife to decide upon and carry out.
+
+"It would do father an immense deal of good if something were to happen
+that would wake him up a bit and get him to take an interest in things,"
+he had said over and over again to Marion. "I cannot understand a man
+having no opinion of his own about anything."
+
+"I do not think you ought to speak in that sort of way, Wil, about
+father."
+
+"Oh, that is all nonsense, Marion. One cannot be blind about a person
+even if he is one's own father. Of course he is very kind and very
+indulgent, but it would be very much pleasanter if he were so because he
+wished to give us pleasure, instead of because it is the easiest thing
+to do. I should be downright pleased if sometimes when I ask him for
+anything he would say positively I could not have it."
+
+Now the something that Wilfrid had hoped might occur to rouse his father
+had taken place, and had come in a form very unpleasantly violent and
+unexpected. The papers a week before had brought the news of the failure
+of the bank in which the greater portion of Mr. Renshaw's property was
+invested, and a letter had the following morning been received from a
+brother of Mrs. Renshaw, who was also a shareholder in the bank, saying
+that the liabilities were very large, and that the shareholders would
+undoubtedly be called upon to pay even their last penny to make up the
+deficiency. This news had been confirmed, and there could be no doubt
+absolute ruin had fallen upon them.
+
+Mr. Renshaw had been completely overwhelmed by the tidings, and had
+taken to his bed. Wilfrid's holidays had begun a few days before, and
+his mother at once acquainted him with the misfortune that had befallen
+them, and she now told him that the calls that would be made upon the
+shares would more than swallow up the rest of their fortune.
+
+"There will be absolutely nothing remaining, Wilfrid, except a thousand
+pounds that I had at my marriage, and which were fortunately settled
+upon me. This cannot be touched. Everything else will have to go."
+
+"Well, it's a bad business, mother. I will go for a walk and think it
+over. Marion, put on your hat and come out with me."
+
+They had been for their walk--a long one, and he was now expressing the
+result at which they had arrived.
+
+"One thing is certain--something has got to be done."
+
+"Yes," Mrs. Renshaw replied with a faint smile. "The question is, What
+is it?"
+
+"Well, mother, it is quite certain that we four cannot live on the
+interest of a thousand pounds unless we go into a hovel and live on
+bread and water."
+
+"I quite see that, Wilfrid; but I am sure I do not see how we are to
+earn money. It is far too late for your father to go back to the bar
+now, and it might be years before he got a brief. At any rate, we could
+not afford to live in London till he does so. I have been thinking I
+might open a little school somewhere."
+
+[Illustration: Sketch Map of WAIROA AND POVERTY BAY DISTRICTS NORTH
+ISLAND, NEW ZEALAND]
+
+The boy waved his hand.
+
+"No, mother, you are not going to take us all on to your shoulders. You
+have got to look after father; that will be a full share of the work, I
+am sure. Marion and I have been talking it over, and the only possible
+thing we can see is for us to emigrate."
+
+"To emigrate!" Mrs. Renshaw repeated in astonishment. "Why, my dear boy,
+what should we be fit for in the colonies more than here?"
+
+"A good deal, mother. A thousand pounds is nothing here, and it would be
+a good deal out there. It would be horrible to come down to live in a
+little cottage like working people here, after living like this; but it
+would be nothing out there. We could buy land for next to nothing in New
+Zealand, and could employ a couple of men to work with me to clear it
+and cultivate it; and get a few cows and sheep to start with, and still
+have a little money in hand. You and Marion could look after things
+indoors; I should look after things out of doors."
+
+"You don't seem to count your father at all," Mrs. Renshaw said a little
+reproachfully.
+
+"No, mother, I don't," Wilfrid said bluntly. "You know as well as I do
+that father would be of no use to speak of in a life like that. Still, I
+think he could make himself happy out there as well as here. He could
+take all his books with him, and could inquire into the manners and
+customs of the natives, who are every bit as good as the ancient
+Britons; better, I should say. But whatever we do, mother, whether it is
+here or anywhere else, we must settle upon it and do it. Of course we
+must consult him; but we must quite make up our minds before we do so.
+If you wait a few weeks for father to make up his mind what we had
+better do, we shall wait till this thousand pounds is spent and there is
+nothing to do but to go into the workhouse.
+
+"I am sure that my plan is the best for us. I am as strong as a great
+many men; and anyhow, out there, there ought to be no fear about our
+keeping ourselves. I have no doubt that when we get out there father
+will be able to help in many ways, though I do not know at present what
+they are. Anyhow, we shall have a house to live in, even if it is only a
+log hut, and I have no doubt have plenty to eat and drink; and that is
+more than we shall do if we stay here. I could not earn anything to
+speak of here: the most I could expect to get would be ten shillings a
+week as an office-boy. And as to your idea of a school, you might be
+years before you got pupils; and, besides, when there are two men in a
+family it would be shameful to depend upon a woman to keep them."
+
+"Why do you think of New Zealand more than Canada, Wil?"
+
+"Because, in the first place, the climate is a great deal pleasanter,
+and, in the second place, I believe that as the passage-money is higher
+the emigrants are of a better class, and we are likely to have more
+pleasant neighbours--people that you and father can associate with--than
+we should have if we went to a backwood clearing in Canada. Tom Fairfax
+has an uncle in New Zealand, and I have heard him say there are lots of
+officers in the army and people of that sort who have settled there. Of
+course I know it is going to be hard work, and that it will be very
+rough for you and father when we land at first, but I expect it will be
+better after a time; and anyhow, mother, I do not think we can starve
+there, and I feel sure that it will come to that if we stop here. At any
+rate, you had better think it over.
+
+"Of course if you hit on anything better I shall be ready to agree at
+once; but whatever it is we must quite make up our minds together and
+then tell father. But when we do tell him we shall have to say that we
+are quite convinced that the plan we have fixed on is the only one that
+offers a hope of success. Of course I do not expect that he will see it
+as we do, but if we put it that if he can suggest anything better to be
+done we will set about it at once, I think he's pretty certain to let
+things go on as we arrange. I do not mean to speak disrespectfully of
+father," he went on seeing that his mother's face was a little clouded
+"but you know, mother, that people who are learned, scientific, and all
+that sort of thing are very often bad hands at everyday matters. Sir
+Isaac Newton, and lots of other fellows I have read about, were like
+that; and though father is a splendid hand at anything to do with the
+Britons or Danes, and can tell you the story of every old ruin in the
+kingdom, he is no good about practical matters. So that we take all the
+trouble off his hands, I think he will be quite ready to agree to do
+whatever you think is the best. At any rate, mother, I think my plan is
+well worth thinking over, and the sooner we make up our minds the
+better; after all it is a great thing having something to look forward
+to and plan about."
+
+Three or four days later Mrs. Renshaw told Wilfrid that think as she
+would she could see no better plan for utilizing her little capital than
+for them to emigrate.
+
+"It is putting great responsibility on your shoulders, my boy," she
+said; "for I do not disguise from myself that it is upon you that we
+must principally depend. Still you will be sixteen by the time we can
+arrive there, and I think we should be able to manage. Besides, as you
+say, we can hire a man or two to help, and shall have some money to fall
+back upon until things begin to pay. There are plenty of women who
+manage even without the assistance of a son, and I do not know why I
+should not be able to get on with you and Marion to help me, especially
+as farming is a comparatively simple business, in a new country. At any
+rate, as you say, with two or three cows and plenty of ducks and hens,
+and what we can grow on the ground, there will be no fear of our
+starving."
+
+The next day Mr. Renshaw came downstairs for the first time since he had
+heard of the misfortune. He had received a letter that morning saying
+that a call was at once to be made on each shareholder for the amount
+still standing on each share, and this sum was in itself more than he
+could meet even after the sale of his house and its contents. He was in
+a state of profound depression. He had, while upstairs, been
+endeavouring to think of some means of supporting his family, but had
+been wholly unable to think of any plan whatever. He knew that at his
+age he should find it next to impossible to obtain employment, even as
+a clerk at the lowest salary; his knowledge of archaeology would be
+absolutely useless to him, for the books he had already published had
+not even paid the expenses of printing.
+
+Few words were spoken at breakfast, but when the meal was finished Mrs.
+Renshaw began: "My dear Alfred, Wilfrid and I have been talking over
+what we had better do under the circumstances. I have told him that the
+failure of the bank involves the loss of all our property, that the
+house will have to be sold, and that, in fact, there remains nothing but
+the thousand pounds of my settlement. We have talked it over in every
+light, and have quite arrived at the conclusion as to what we think the
+best thing to be done if you see matters in the same light and will
+consent to our plan. I had at first thought of starting a little
+school."
+
+"I would never agree to that," Mr. Renshaw said; "never. I must do
+something, my dear, though I have not made up my mind in what direction.
+But whatever it is, it is for me to work, and not for you."
+
+"Well, we have already given up the idea," Mrs. Renshaw went on.
+"Wilfrid was sure that you would not like it, and, as he pointed out,
+the money might be spent before I could obtain sufficient pupils to pay.
+Besides, he is anxious to be of use; but the difficulty struck us of
+obtaining any kind of remunerative work here."
+
+"That is what I have been thinking," Mr. Renshaw said. "I shall be
+willing to work at anything in my power, but I don't see what possible
+work I can get."
+
+"Quite so, my dear. In this country it is of course terribly difficult
+for anyone to get employment unless he has been trained in some
+particular line, therefore Wil and I are agreed that the very best plan,
+indeed the only plan we can think of, is for us to go out to a new
+country. My little money will take us to New Zealand, buy a good-sized
+piece of land there, and suffice to enable us to clear it and stock it
+to some extent. The life will no doubt be rough for us all for a time;
+but none of us will care for that, and at any rate we are sure to be
+able to keep the wolf from the door."
+
+"To New Zealand!" Mr. Renshaw repeated aghast. "That is a terrible
+undertaking. Besides, I know nothing whatever about farming, and I fear
+that I am quite unfit for hard work."
+
+"I do not think it will be at all necessary for you to work yourself,
+Alfred. Of course we can hire men there just as we can in England. I
+believe the natives are willing to work at very low rates of pay, so we
+need have no difficulty on that score. Wilfrid is growing up now, and
+will soon be able to relieve you of all responsibility, and then you
+will be able to devote yourself to your favourite studies; and I should
+think that a book from your hand upon native manners and customs would
+be sure to be a great success. Accustomed as you are to tracing things
+up from small remains, and with your knowledge of primitive peoples,
+your work would be very different from those written by men without any
+previous acquaintance with such matters."
+
+"The idea certainly pleases me," Mr. Renshaw said; "but, of course, I
+shall want time to think over your startling proposal, Helen."
+
+"Of course, my dear. In the meantime we will go on packing up and
+preparing to move at once from here, as you say that there must be a
+sale of everything; then you can think the matter over, and if you
+decide upon any better scheme than ours we can carry that out. If not,
+we shall be ready to put ours into execution."
+
+The next month was a busy one. There was great sympathy evinced by all
+the Renshaw's neighbours and acquaintances when it was heard that their
+whole fortune was swept away by the failure of the bank. There were
+farewell visits to be paid, not only to these, but to their poorer
+neighbours. In answer to inquiries as to their plans, Mr. Renshaw always
+replied that at present nothing whatever was settled. Mrs. Renshaw
+hinted that, although their plans were not definitely fixed, she thought
+it probable that they would go abroad; while Wilfrid and Marion both
+informed their friends confidently that they were going to New Zealand.
+
+The work of packing went on. A few articles of furniture that were
+special favourites with them all were packed up and sent to be
+warehoused in London, in order that they might some day be forwarded to
+them when they had made themselves a home; but nothing else was taken
+beyond their clothes, a good selection of books for their general
+reading, a large box of those which Mr. Renshaw declared absolutely
+indispensable to himself, and a few nick-nacks specially prized.
+Everything else was handed over for sale for the benefit of the
+creditors of the bank. During these weeks Mr. Renshaw continued to speak
+as if he regarded the New Zealand project as wholly impracticable, and
+on each occasion when he did so his wife replied cheerfully: "Well, my
+dear, we are in no way wedded to it, and are quite ready to give it up
+and adopt any plan you may decide upon. The matter is entirely in your
+hands."
+
+But Mr. Renshaw could hit upon no other scheme; and, indeed, his wife's
+suggestion as to a book on the natives of New Zealand had much taken his
+fancy. Certainly he, a trained antiquarian, should be able to produce a
+book upon such a subject that would be of vastly greater value than
+those written by settlers and others having no training whatever that
+would qualify them for such work. It was probable that he should be able
+to throw some entirely new light upon the origin and history of the
+Maoris or natives of New Zealand, and that his book would greatly add to
+his reputation, and would sell well. Really the idea was not such a very
+bad one, and, for himself, he should certainly prefer a life in a new
+country to shabby lodgings in some out-of-the-way place, after having
+for so many years been a personage of importance in his own
+neighbourhood.
+
+"I see one great objection to your scheme, Helen, and that is that there
+is a war going on with the Maoris."
+
+"I know there is," Mrs. Renshaw, who had talked the matter over with
+Wilfrid, replied; "but it is confined to two or three of the tribes, and
+the settlers in other parts have been in no way disturbed. The troops
+have taken most of their strongholds, and the troubles are considered to
+be approaching an end; therefore I do not think there is any occasion
+to be uneasy on that score. Besides, in some respects the trouble will
+be advantageous, as we should probably be able to buy land cheaper than
+we otherwise should have done, and the land will rapidly rise in value
+again when the disturbances are over. But, of course, we should not go
+to the disturbed districts. These are round Auckland and New Plymouth,
+and the troubles are confined to the tribes there. Everything is
+perfectly peaceable along the other parts of the coast."
+
+It was not until two or three days before the move was to be made from
+the house that Mrs. Renshaw recurred to the subject.
+
+"You have not said yet, Alfred, what plans you have decided upon. As we
+shall leave here in three days it is quite time that we made up our
+minds about it, as, of course, our movements must depend on your
+decision. If you have fixed upon any place for us to settle down in, it
+would be cheaper for us to move there at once instead of wasting money
+by going up to London first. Another reason I have for asking is, that
+Robert and William Grimstone, the gardener's sons, who have got an idea
+from something Wilfrid said to them that we might be going abroad, have
+asked him to ask you if you would take them with you. They have been
+working in the garden under their father for the last two or three
+years, and are strong active young fellows of nineteen and twenty. As
+their father has worked here ever since we came, and we have known the
+young fellows since they were children, such an arrangement would have
+been a very pleasant one had you liked my plan of emigrating, as it
+would have been much more agreeable having two young fellows we knew
+with us instead of strangers. Of course I told Wilfrid to tell them that
+nothing whatever was settled, and that our plans were not in any way
+formed, and that they had better, therefore, look out for situations
+about here, and that I was sure you would give them good letters of
+recommendation."
+
+Mr. Renshaw was silent. "I really do not see that there is any occasion
+to come to a decision in a hurry," he said irritably.
+
+"Not in a hurry, Alfred," his wife said quietly. "You see, we have had a
+month to think it over, and I do not see that we shall be more likely to
+settle upon an advantageous scheme at the end of six months than we are
+now. From the day we leave here and hand over everything to the receiver
+of the bank we shall be drawing on our little capital, and every pound
+is of importance. I think, therefore, Alfred, that you and I should make
+up our minds before we leave here as to what course we are going to
+adopt. As I have said, I myself see no scheme by which we are likely to
+be able to maintain ourselves in England, even in a very humble way. A
+life in the colonies would, to me, be very much more pleasant than the
+struggle to make ends meet here.
+
+"It would afford an opening for Wilfrid, and be vastly more advantageous
+for him than anything we should hope to get for him here; and I think it
+will be far better for Marion too. Of course, if we decided to emigrate,
+we could, should you prefer it, go to Canada, Australia, or the United
+States in preference to New Zealand. I only incline to New Zealand
+because I have heard that there is a larger proportion of officers and
+gentlemen there than in other colonies, and because I believe that the
+climate is a particularly pleasant one. But, of course, this is merely a
+suggestion at present, and it is for you to decide."
+
+"If we are to emigrate at all," Mr. Renshaw replied, "I should certainly
+prefer New Zealand myself. The Maoris are a most interesting people.
+Their origin is a matter of doubt, their customs and religion are
+peculiar, and I have no doubt that I should, after studying them, be
+able to throw much new and valuable light upon the subject. Personally,
+I am sure that I am in no way fitted for the life of a settler. I know
+nothing of farming, and could neither drive a plough nor wield an axe;
+but if I could make the native subject my own, I might probably be able
+to do my share towards our expenses by my books, while Wilfrid could
+look after the men. The offer of these two young fellows to go with us
+has removed several of my objections to the plan, and I agree with you
+that it would be more advantageous for Wilfrid and Marion than to be
+living in wretched lodgings. Therefore, my dear, I have decided to fall
+in with your plan, and only hope that it will turn out as well as you
+seem to expect. It will be a great change and a great trial; but since
+you seem to have set your heart upon it, I am willing to adopt your
+plans instead of my own, and we will therefore consider it settled that
+we will go to New Zealand."
+
+Mrs. Renshaw was too wise a woman to point out that her husband had not,
+so far as she was aware, any plans whatever of his own, and she
+contented herself by saying quietly: "I am glad you have decided so, my
+dear. I do think it is the best thing for us all, and I am quite sure it
+is the best for Wilfrid and Marion. If it had not been for them I should
+have said let us take a tiny cottage near some town where I might add to
+our income by giving lessons in music or other things, and you might
+have the companionship of people of your own tastes; but, being as it
+is, I think it far better to give them a start in a new country,
+although I know that such a life as we shall lead there must entail, at
+any rate at first, some hardships, and the loss of much to which we have
+been accustomed."
+
+Wilfrid and Marion were delighted when they heard from their mother that
+the matter was settled. Both had had great hopes that Wilfrid's scheme
+would be finally accepted, as there did not seem any other plan that was
+possible. Still Wilfrid knew the difficulty that his father would have
+in making up his mind, and feared there might be a long delay before he
+could bring himself to accept the plan proposed to him. Mrs. Renshaw,
+who was a good business woman, lost no time in arranging with Robert and
+William Grimstone as to their accompanying them. Their passage-money was
+to be paid, and they were to bind themselves to remain for three years
+in Mr. Renshaw's service on wages similar to those they would have
+obtained at home; after that, they were to be paid whatever might be the
+colonial rate of wages.
+
+The excitement that the prospect of emigration caused to the young
+people lessened their pain at leaving the house where they had been born
+and brought up, with all its pleasant associations and material
+comforts. It was, however, very trying to them when they bade good-bye
+for the last time to their surroundings and shook hands with their old
+servants.
+
+"If ever we get rich in New Zealand, father," Wilfrid said, "we will
+come back and buy the house again."
+
+Mr. Renshaw shook his head. Just at present he was disposed to regard
+himself as a martyr, and considered that he had made an unprecedented
+sacrifice of his own wishes and comforts for the sake of his children,
+and that no good could be expected to arise from the plan to which he
+had consented. A good many friends had gathered at the station to say
+good-bye, and it was some time after the train had started on its way to
+London before any of the party felt themselves inclined to speak.
+
+On arriving in town they went at once to lodgings they had engaged in
+Eastbourne Terrace, facing the station. Once settled there, no time was
+lost in making preparations for their voyage. The files of the
+advertisements had already been searched and the names of the vessels
+sailing for New Zealand and the addresses of their owners noted, and
+after paying a visit to several shipping offices the choice of vessels
+remained at last between the _Flying Scud_ and the _Mayflower_. They
+were vessels of about the same size, both bore a good reputation as
+sailers, and they heard excellent accounts of the captains who commanded
+them.
+
+The _Mayflower_ was to sail direct to Wellington round the Cape. The
+_Flying Scud_ was taking in cargo for Rio and Buenos-Ayres, and would
+proceed thence via Cape Horn. Her rates of passage were somewhat lower
+than those of the _Mayflower_, as the route via the Cape of Good Hope
+was that more generally used, and the number of passengers who had
+secured berths by her were very much smaller than those who intended to
+travel by the _Mayflower_. It was this that principally decided them in
+choosing the western route; Mr. Renshaw was in a depressed and nervous
+state, and his wife considered that he would be far more comfortable
+with a comparatively small number of fellow-passengers than in a crowded
+ship.
+
+Marion quite agreed with her mother; and Wilfrid was also in favour of
+the _Flying Scud_, as he thought it would be pleasant to break the
+passage by putting into the great South American ports and getting a
+glimpse of their inhabitants. Mr. Renshaw himself was quite satisfied to
+accept his wife's decision, whatever it might be. The _Flying Scud_ was
+therefore selected, and passages for the party secured in her.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II.
+
+THE EMBARKATION.
+
+
+The _Flying Scud_ was to sail in ten days; and this was ample time for
+their preparations, for Mrs. Renshaw wisely decided that it was better
+to buy all that was requisite for starting their new life, in New
+Zealand.
+
+"We have none of us the least idea what will be required," she said. "It
+will be far better to pay somewhat higher prices for what we really do
+want out there than to cumber ourselves with all sorts of things that
+may be useless to us. We have already a considerable amount of baggage.
+There are our clothes, linen, and books, your father's two
+double-barrelled guns, which, by the way, I do not think he has ever
+used since we have been married. The only thing we had better get, as
+far as I see, will be four rifles, which no doubt we can buy cheap
+second-hand, and four revolvers.
+
+"I do not for a moment suppose we shall ever want to use them, but as we
+may be often left in the house alone I think it would be pleasant to
+know that we are not altogether defenceless. We had better lay in a good
+stock of ammunition for all these weapons. Besides the clothes we have
+we had better get serge dresses and suits for the voyage, and a few
+strong servicable gowns and suits for rough work out there. Beyond this
+I do not think that we need spend a penny. We can certainly get
+everything we shall want for our new life at Wellington, which is a
+large place."
+
+On the morning of the day on which they were to embark the Grimstones
+came up from Reading. All the heavy luggage had been sent on board ship
+on the previous day, and at twelve o'clock two cabs drove up to the side
+of the _Flying Scud_ in St. Catherine's Docks. The one contained Mr. and
+Mrs. Renshaw, Marion, and a vast quantity of small packets inside.
+Wilfrid was on the box with the driver, and the roof was piled high with
+luggage. The other cab contained the two Grimstones and the rest of the
+luggage. The Renshaws were already acquainted with the ship in which
+they were to sail, having paid her a visit four days previously to see
+their cabins. The parents had a comfortable cabin to themselves. Marion
+was berthed in a cabin with two other ladies, who, she learned, were
+sisters, the elder about her own age, and Wilfrid found he would have
+but one fellow-passenger. The Grimstones were in the steerage forward.
+
+The vessel was in a state of bustle, and what to the travellers seemed
+confusion. Numbers of other passengers were arriving, and the deck was
+littered with, their luggage until it could be sorted and sent down to
+their cabins; late cargo was being swung on board and lowered into the
+hold. On the deck aft were gathered the cabin passengers, with relatives
+and friends who had come to see them off. An hour later the bell rang as
+a signal for all visitors to go ashore. There were sad partings both
+fore and aft as the bell clanged out its impatient signal.
+
+"I am very glad, mother, that we have no friends to say good-bye to us
+here, and that we got that all over at Reading."
+
+"So am I, Wil. I think it much better myself that these partings should
+be got through before people leave home. It is natural of course that
+relatives and friends should like to see the last of each other, but I
+think it is a cruel kindness, and am glad, as you say, that we had no
+dear friends in London. Those at home have already shown their
+thoughtfulness and friendship." For indeed during the last few days
+hampers of presents of all kinds had arrived in a steady flow at
+Eastbourne Terrace. There had been great feeling of commiseration among
+all their acquaintances at the misfortune that had befallen the
+Renshaws; and the manner in which they had at once surrendered
+everything for the benefit of the shareholders of the bank, and the
+calmness with which they had borne their reverses, had excited
+admiration, and scarce a friend or acquaintance but sent substantial
+tokens of their good-will or sympathy.
+
+As soon as it was publicly known that the Renshaws were about to sail
+for New Zealand, the boys and masters of the grammar-school between them
+subscribed and sent a handsome double-barrelled gun, a fishing-rod, and
+all appurtenances, to Wilfrid. Mr. Renshaw received two guns, several
+fishing-rods, two crates of crockery, and several cases of portable
+furniture of various kinds, besides many small articles. Mrs. Renshaw
+was presented with a stove of the best construction and a crate full of
+utensils of every kind, while Marion had work-boxes and desks sufficient
+to stock a school, two sets of garden tools, and innumerable nick-nacks
+likely to be more or less useful to her in her new life. Besides these
+there were several boxes of books of standard literature.
+
+"Every one is very kind," Mrs. Renshaw said as the crates and hampers
+arrived; "but if it goes on like this we shall have to charter a ship to
+ourselves, and how we are to move about there when we get out with all
+these things I have not the least idea."
+
+At last the good-byes were all finished, the visitors had left the ship,
+the hawsers were thrown off, and the vessel began to move slowly towards
+the dock gates. As soon as she had issued through these she was seized
+by a tug, and proceeded in tow down the crowded river. There was a last
+waving of handkerchiefs and hats to the group of people standing at the
+entrance to the docks, and then the passengers began to look round and
+examine each other and the ship. Sailors were hard at work--the last
+bales and boxes were being lowered into the hold, ropes were being
+coiled up, and tidiness restored to the deck. Parties of seamen were
+aloft loosening some of the sails, for the wind was favourable, and the
+captain had ordered some of the canvas to be set to assist the tug.
+
+"Now, Marion," Mrs. Renshaw said, "we had better go below and tidy up
+things a bit. Wil, you may as well come down and help me get the trunks
+stowed away under the berths, and put some hooks in for the brush-bags
+and other things we have brought; the hooks and gimlet are in my
+hand-bag."
+
+Wilfrid assisted to set his mother's cabin in order, and then went to
+his own. It was a good-sized cabin, and when the ship was full
+accommodated four passengers; but the two upper bunks had now been taken
+down, and there was, Wilfrid thought, ample room for two. On his own
+bunk were piled his two portmanteaus, a gun-case, a bundle of
+fishing-rods, and other odds and ends, and a somewhat similar collection
+of luggage was on that opposite. Wilfred read the name on the labels.
+"Atherton," he said; "I wonder what he is like. I do hope he will be a
+nice fellow."
+
+Scarcely had the thought passed through his mind when a figure appeared
+at the cabin door. It was that of a tall stout man, with immensely broad
+shoulders. His age Wilfrid guessed to be about thirty-five. He had a
+pleasant face, and there was a humorous twinkle in his eye as the lad
+looked round in astonishment at the figure completely blocking up the
+doorway.
+
+"So you are Renshaw?" the big man said. "I congratulate myself and you
+that your dimensions are not of the largest. My name is Atherton, as I
+daresay you have seen on my luggage. Suppose we shake hands, Renshaw? It
+is just as well to make friends at once, as we have got to put up with
+each other for the next five or six months. Of course you are a little
+appalled at my size," he went on, as he shook hands with the lad. "Most
+people are at first, but nobody is so much appalled as I am myself.
+Still it has its amusing side, you know. I don't often get into an
+omnibus, because I do not think it is fair; but if I am driven to do so,
+and there happen to be five people on each side, the expression of alarm
+on those ten faces when I appear at the door is a picture, because it is
+manifestly impossible that they can make room for me on either side."
+
+"What do you do, sir?" Wilfrid asked laughing.
+
+"I ask one of them to change sides. That leaves two places vacant, and
+as I make a point of paying for two, we get on comfortably enough. It is
+fortunate there are only two of us in this cabin. If I have the bad luck
+to travel in a full ship I always wait until the others are in bed
+before I turn in, and get up in the morning before they are astir; but I
+think you and I can manage pretty comfortably."
+
+"Then you have travelled a good deal, sir?" Wilfrid said.
+
+"I am always travelling," the other replied. "I am like the fidgetty
+Phil of the story-book, who could never keep still. Most men of my size
+are content to take life quietly, but that is not so with me. For the
+last twelve or thirteen years I have been always on the move, and I
+ought to be worn down to a thread paper; but unfortunately, as you see,
+that is not the effect of travel in my case. I suppose you are going out
+to settle?"
+
+"Yes, sir. I have my father, mother, and sister on board."
+
+"Lucky fellow!" Mr. Atherton said; "I have no relations worth speaking
+of."
+
+"Are you going to settle at last, sir?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"No, I am going out to botanize. I have a mania for botany, and New
+Zealand, you know, is in that respect one of the most remarkable regions
+in the world, and it has not yet been explored with anything approaching
+accuracy. It is a grand field for discovery, and there are special
+points of interest connected with it, as it forms a sort of connecting
+link between the floras of Australia, Asia, and South America, and has a
+flora of its own entirely distinct from any of these. Now let me advise
+you as to the stowing away of your traps. There is a good deal of knack
+in these things. Have you got your portmanteaus packed so that one
+contains all the things you are likely to require for say the first
+month of your voyage, and the other as a reserve to be drawn on
+occasionally? because, if not, I should advise you to take all the
+things out and to arrange them in that way. It will take you a little
+time, perhaps, but will save an immense amount of trouble throughout the
+voyage."
+
+Wilfrid had packed his trunks with things as they came to hand, but he
+saw the advantage of following his fellow-passenger's advice, and
+accordingly opened his portmanteaus and piled the whole of their
+contents upon his berth. He then repacked them, Mr. Atherton sitting
+down on his berth and giving his advice as to the trunk in which each
+article should be placed.
+
+The work of rearrangement occupied half-an-hour, and Wilfrid often
+congratulated himself during the voyage upon the time so spent. When all
+was complete and the cabin arranged tidily, Wilfrid looked in at the
+next cabin. This was occupied by two young men of the name of Allen.
+They were friends of an acquaintance of Mr. Renshaw, who, hearing that
+they were journeying by the same ship to New Zealand, had brought them
+down to Eastbourne Terrace and introduced them to Mr. Renshaw and his
+family. The two were occupied in arranging their things in the cabin.
+
+"Well, Renshaw," James, the elder of them, said when he entered, "I am
+afraid I cannot congratulate you on your fellow-passenger. We saw him go
+into your cabin. He is a tremendous man. He would be magnificent if he
+were not so stout. Why, you will scarce find room to move!"
+
+"He is a capital fellow," Wilfrid said. "I think we shall get on
+splendidly together. He is full of fun, and makes all sorts of jokes
+about his own size. He has travelled a tremendous lot, and is up to
+everything. He is nothing like so old as you would think, if you have
+not seen his face. I do not think he is above thirty-five or so. Well,
+as I see you have just finished, I will go up and see how we are getting
+on."
+
+When Wilfrid reached the deck he found the vessel was off Erith, and was
+greeted by his sister.
+
+"You silly boy, you have been missing the sight of all the shipping, and
+of Greenwich Hospital. The idea of stopping below all this time. I
+should have come to call you up if I had known which was your room."
+
+"Cabin, you goose!" Wilfrid said; "the idea of talking of rooms on board
+a ship. I would have come up if I had thought of it; but I was so busy
+putting things to right and making the acquaintance of the gentleman in
+the cabin with me that I forgot altogether we were moving down the
+river."
+
+"Which is he, Wilfrid?"
+
+Wilfrid laughed and nodded in the direction of Mr. Atherton, who was
+standing with his back towards them a short distance away.
+
+Marion's eyes opened wide.
+
+"Oh, Wil, what a big man! He must quite fill up the cabin."
+
+"He seems an awfully good fellow, Marion."
+
+"I daresay he may be, Wil; but he will certainly take up more than his
+share of the cabin."
+
+"It is awkward, isn't it, young lady?" Mr. Atherton said, suddenly
+turning round on his heel, to Marion's horror, while Wilfrid flushed
+scarlet, for he had not the least idea that his words could be heard. "I
+have capital hearing, you see," Mr. Atherton went on with a laugh, "and
+a very useful sense it is sometimes, and has stood me in good service
+upon many occasions, though I own that it effectually prevents my
+cherishing any illusion as to my personal appearance. This is your
+sister, of course, Renshaw; in fact, anyone could see that at a glance.
+There is nothing like making acquaintances early on the voyage; the
+first day is in that respect the most important of all."
+
+"Why is that?" Marion asked.
+
+"Because as a rule the order in which people sit down to table on the
+first day of the voyage is that in which they sit the whole time. Now,
+if one happens to sit one's self down by people who turn out
+disagreeable it is a very great nuisance, and therefore it is very
+important to find out a little about one's fellow-passengers the first
+day, so as to take a seat next to someone whom you are not likely to
+quarrel with before you have been a week at sea."
+
+"Then they do not arrange places for you, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"Oh no; the captain perhaps settles as to who are to sit up by him. If
+there is anyone of special importance, a governor or vice-governor or
+any other big-wig, he and his wife, if he has got one, will probably sit
+next to the captain on one side, if not, he will choose someone who has
+been specially introduced to him or who has sailed with him before, and
+the steward, before the party sit down, puts their names on their
+plates; everyone else shifts for themselves. Renshaw, I shall be glad if
+you will introduce me to your father and mother, and if we get on well I
+will go down below and arrange that we get places together. I have been
+chatting with the first officer, who is a very pleasant fellow; I have
+sailed with him before. The rule is he sits at the end of the table
+facing the captain, and my experience is that when the first officer
+happens to be a good fellow, which is not always the case, his end of
+the table is the most pleasant place. There is generally more fun and
+laughing at that end than there is at the other; for all the people who
+fancy that they are of importance make a point of getting seats as near
+as they can to the captain, and important people are not, as a rule,
+anything like as pleasant as the rest of us."
+
+Wilfrid walked across the deck with Mr. Atherton to the point where his
+father and mother were sitting. "Mother, this is Mr. Atherton, who is in
+my cabin." Mr. Atherton shook hands with Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw.
+
+"I asked your son to introduce me at once, Mrs. Renshaw, because, as I
+have been telling him, a good deal of the comfort of the voyage depends
+upon making a snug little party to sit together at meals. There is
+nothing I dread more than being put down between two acidulated women,
+who make a point of showing by their manner every time one sits down
+that they consider one is taking up a great deal more than one's share
+of the seat."
+
+Mrs. Renshaw smiled. "I should think people were not often as rude as
+that."
+
+"I can assure you that it is the rule rather than the exception, Mrs.
+Renshaw. I am not a particularly sensitive man, I think; but I make a
+point of avoiding crowded railway-carriages, being unable to withstand
+the expression of blank dismay that comes over the faces of people when
+I present myself at the door. I have thought sometimes of hiring a
+little boy of about four years old to go about with me, as the two of us
+would then only take up a fair share of space. I have been looking to
+the cabin arrangements, and find that each seat holds three. Your son
+and daughter are neither of them bulky, so if they won't mind sitting a
+little close they will be conferring a genuine kindness upon me."
+
+"We shall not mind at all," Wilfrid and Marion exclaimed together, for
+there was something so pleasant about Mr. Atherton's manner they felt
+that he would be a delightful companion.
+
+"Very well, then; we will regard that as settled. Then we five will
+occupy the seats on one side of the chief officer."
+
+"We will get the two Allens opposite," Wilfrid put in.
+
+"I will look about for three others to make up what I may call our
+party. Who do you fancy, Mrs. Renshaw? Now look round and fix on
+somebody, and I will undertake the duty of engineering the business."
+
+"There are two girls, sisters, in my cabin," Marion said. "I think they
+seem nice. They are going out alone to join their father and mother in
+New Zealand."
+
+"In that case, Mrs. Renshaw, I had better leave the matter in your
+hands."
+
+"That will be very simple, Mr. Atherton, as I have already spoken to
+them," and she at once got up and moved across to two girls of about
+thirteen and seventeen respectively, who were standing together watching
+the passing ships, and entered into conversation with them. When she
+proposed that, as they were in the same cabin with Marion, they should
+sit near each other at table, they gladly agreed, saying, however, that
+they had been placed under the special care of the captain, and as he
+had said that he would keep them under his eye, they were afraid he
+might want them to sit near him.
+
+"I will speak to the captain myself," Mrs. Renshaw said. "I daresay he
+will be rather glad to have the responsibility taken off his hands,
+especially if I propose, which I will if you like, to take you under my
+general charge."
+
+"Oh, we should like that very much," the elder of the two girls said.
+"It seems so very strange to us being here among so many people without
+any lady with us. We should be so much obliged to you if you would take
+us under your wing."
+
+"I can quite understand your feelings, my dears, and will speak to the
+captain directly. I see that he is disengaged. If we were under sail
+there would not be much chance of getting a word with him; but as the
+tug has us in charge, I see that he has time to chat to the passengers."
+
+A few minutes later the captain left the gentleman with whom he was
+speaking and came along the deck. The Renshaws had made his acquaintance
+when they first came down to see their cabins.
+
+"How are you, Mrs. Renshaw?" he said as he came up to her. "We have fine
+weather for our start, have we not? It is a great thing starting fair,
+as it enables people to settle down and make themselves at home."
+
+"I have been chatting with the Miss Mitfords, captain; they are in the
+cabin with my daughter. They tell me that they are under your special
+charge."
+
+"Yes, they are among the number of my responsibilities," the captain
+said smiling.
+
+"They naturally feel rather lonely on board from having no lady with
+them, and have expressed their willingness to put themselves under my
+charge if you will sanction it. It will be pleasant both for them and my
+daughter, and they can sit down with us at meals, and make a party
+together to work or read on deck."
+
+"I shall be extremely glad, Mrs. Renshaw, if you will accept the
+responsibility. A captain's hands are full enough without having to look
+after women. There are four or five single ladies on board, on all of
+whom I have promised to keep a watchful eye, and I shall be delighted to
+be relieved of the responsibility of two of them."
+
+So the matter was arranged, and going down into the cabin a few minutes
+before the bell rang for dinner, the party succeeded in getting the
+places they desired. Mr. Atherton was next to the chief officer. Wilfrid
+sat next to him, Marion between her brother and Mrs. Renshaw, and Mr.
+Renshaw next. The two Allens faced Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid; the Miss
+Mitfords came next, facing Marion and her mother. A Captain Pearson and
+his wife were next to the Mitfords, while a civil engineer, Mr.
+Halbrook, occupied the vacant seat next to Mr. Renshaw. Once seated, the
+Renshaws speedily congratulated themselves on the arrangements that they
+had made as they saw the hesitating way in which the rest of the
+passengers took their places, and the looks of inquiry and doubt they
+cast at those who seated themselves next to them. For a time the meal
+was a silent one, friends talking together in low voices, but nothing
+like a general conversation being attempted. At the first officers' end
+of the table, however, the sound of conversation and laughter began at
+once.
+
+"Have you room, Miss Renshaw? or do you already begin to regret your
+bargain?"
+
+"I have plenty of room, thank you," Marion replied. "I hope that you
+have enough?"
+
+"Plenty," Mr. Atherton answered. "I have just been telling your brother
+that if he finds I am squeezing him he must run his elbow into my ribs.
+Let me see, Mr. Ryan; it must be three years since we sat together."
+
+"Just about that," the mate replied with a strong Irish accent. "You
+went with us from Japan to Singapore, did you not?"
+
+"That was it, and a rough bout we had of it in that cyclone in the China
+Seas. You remember that I saved the ship then?"
+
+"How was that, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+The first officer laughed. "Mr. Atherton always took a deal more credit
+to himself than we gave him. When the cyclone struck the ship and
+knocked her right down on her beam-ends, he happened to be sitting up to
+windward, and he always declared that if it hadn't been for his weight
+the ship would never have righted itself."
+
+There was a general laugh at the mate's explanation.
+
+"I always plant myself to windward in a gale," Mr. Atherton said
+gravely. "Shifting ballast is a most useful thing, although they have
+abolished it in yacht-racing. I was once in a canoe, down by Borneo,
+when a heavy squall struck us. I was sitting in the bottom of the boat
+when we saw it coming, and had just time to get up and sit on the
+weather gunwale when it struck us. If it had not been for me nothing
+could have saved the boat from capsizing. As it was it stood up as stiff
+as a rock, though, I own, I nearly drowned them all when the blow was
+over, for it stopped as suddenly as it began, and the boat as nearly as
+possible capsized with my weight. Indeed it would have done so
+altogether if it hadn't heeled over so sharply that I was chucked
+backwards into the sea. Fortunately the helmsman made a grab at me as I
+went past, and I managed to scramble on board again. Not that I should
+have sunk for I can float like a cork; but there are a good many sharks
+cruising about in those waters, and it is safer inside a boat than it is
+out. You see, Miss Renshaw, there are advantages in being stout. I
+should not wonder if your brother got just my size one day. My figure
+was very much like his once."
+
+"Oh, I hope not!" Marion exclaimed. "That would be dreadful! No; I don't
+mean that," she went on hurriedly as Mr. Atherton's face assumed an
+expression of shocked surprise. "I mean that, although of course there
+may be many advantages in being stout, there are advantages in being
+thin too."
+
+"I admit that," Mr. Atherton agreed; "but look at the disadvantages. A
+stout man escapes being sent trotted about on messages. Nobody would
+think of asking him to climb a ladder. He is not expected to dance. The
+thin man is squeezed into any odd corner; and is not treated with half
+the consideration that is given to a fat man. He worries about trifles,
+and has none of the quiet contentment that characterizes stout people.
+A stout man's food always agrees with him, or else he would not be
+stout; while the thin man suffers indigestion, dyspepsia, and perhaps
+jaundice. You see, my dear young lady, that almost all the advantages
+are on our side. Of course you will say I could not climb a ladder, but
+then I do not want to climb a ladder. I could not make the ascent of
+Matterhorn; but it is much more pleasant to sit at the bottom and see
+fools do it. I could not very well ride a horse unless it were a
+dray-horse; but then I have no partiality for horse exercise. Altogether
+I think I have every reason to be content. I can travel wherever I like,
+see whatever I want to see, and enjoy most of the good things of life."
+
+"And hould your own in a scrimmage," Mr. Ryan put in laughing. "I can
+answer for that."
+
+"If I am pushed to it," Mr. Atherton said modestly, "of course I try to
+do my best."
+
+"Have you seen Mr. Atherton in a scrimmage?" Tom Allen asked the mate.
+
+"I have; and a sharp one it was while it lasted."
+
+"There is no occasion to say anything about it, Ryan," Mr. Atherton said
+hastily.
+
+"But no reason in life why I should not," the mate replied. "What do you
+say, ladies and gentleman?"
+
+There was a chorus of "Go on please, do let us hear about it," and he
+continued:
+
+"I don't give Mr. Atherton the credit of saving our ship in the squall,
+but it would have gone badly with us if he hadn't taken part in the row
+we had. You see, we had a mixed crew on board, for the most part
+Chinamen and a few Lascars; for we were three years in the China Seas,
+and English sailors cannot well stand the heat out there, and besides
+don't like remaining in ships stopping there trading. So when, after we
+arrived at Shanghai, we got orders to stop and trade out there, most of
+them took their discharge, and we filled up with natives. Coming down
+from Japan that voyage there was a row. I forget what their pretext was
+now, but I have no doubt it was an arranged thing, and that they
+intended to take the ship and run her ashore on some of the islands,
+take what they fancied out of her, and make off in boats, or perhaps
+take her into one of those nests of pirates that abound among the
+islands.
+
+"They felt so certain of overpowering us, for there were only the three
+officers, the boatswain, and two cabin passengers, that instead of
+rising by night, when they would no doubt have succeeded, they broke
+into mutiny at dinner-time--came aft in a body, clamouring that their
+food was unfit to eat. Then suddenly drawing weapons from beneath their
+clothes they rushed up the gangways on to the poop; and as none of us
+were armed, and had no idea of what was going to take place, they would
+have cut us down almost without resistance had it not been for our
+friend here. He was standing just at the top of the poop ladder when
+they came up, headed by their seraing. Mr. Atherton knocked the
+scoundrel down with a blow of his fist, and then, catching him by the
+ankles, whirled him round his head like a club and knocked the fellows
+down like ninepins as they swarmed up the gangway, armed with knives and
+creases.
+
+"The captain, who was down below, had slammed and fastened the door
+opening on to the waist on seeing the fellows coming aft, and handed up
+to us through the skylight some loaded muskets, and managed, by standing
+on the table and taking our hands, to get up himself. Then we opened
+fire upon them, and in a very few minutes drove them down. We shot six
+of them. The seraing of course was killed, four of the others had their
+skulls fairly broken in by the blows that they had received, and five
+were knocked senseless. We chucked them down the hatchway to the others,
+had up four or five of the men to work the ship, and kept the rest
+fastened below until we got to Singapore and handed them over to the
+authorities. They all got long terms of penal servitude. Anyhow, Mr.
+Atherton saved our lives and the ship, so I think you will agree with me
+that he can hold his own in a scrimmage."
+
+"It was very hot work," Mr. Atherton said with a laugh, "and I did not
+get cool again for two or three days afterwards. The idea of using a man
+as a club was not my own. Belzoni put down a riot among his Arab
+labourers, when he was excavating ruins somewhere out in Syria, I think
+it was, by knocking the ringleader down and using him as a club. I had
+been reading the book not long before, and it flashed across my mind as
+the seraing went down that he might be utilized. Fists are all very
+well, but when you have got fellows to deal with armed with knives and
+other cutting instruments it is better to keep them at a distance if you
+can."
+
+"That was splendid!" Wilfrid exclaimed. "How I should like to have seen
+it!"
+
+"It was good for the eyes," the mate said; "and bate Donnybrook
+entirely. Such a yelling and shouting as the yellow reptiles made you
+never heard."
+
+By this time the meal was finished, and the passengers repaired on deck
+to find that the ship was just passing Sheerness.
+
+"Who would have thought," Wilfrid said to his sister as he looked at Mr.
+Atherton, who had taken his seat in a great Indian reclining chair he
+had brought for his own use, and was placidly smoking a cigar, "that
+that easy, placid, pleasant-looking man could be capable of such a thing
+as that! Shouldn't I like to have been there!"
+
+"So should I," Marion agreed; "though it must have been terrible to look
+at. He doesn't look as if anything would put him out. I expect Samson was
+something like him, only not so stout. He seems to have been very
+good-tempered except when people wanted to capture him; and was always
+ready to forgive that horrid woman who tried to betray him to his
+enemies. Well, everything is very nice--much nicer than I expected--and
+I feel sure that we shall enjoy the voyage very much."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE VOYAGE.
+
+
+In addition to those already named, the _Flying Scud_ carried some
+twenty other cabin passengers. She took no emigrants forward, as she was
+full of cargo, and was not, moreover, going direct to New Zealand.
+There were therefore only three or four young men in addition to the
+Grimstones forward. The fine weather that had favoured the start
+accompanied them down the channel and across the bay. Life went on
+quietly on board. It was early in May when they started; and the
+evenings were still too chilly to permit of any sojourn on deck after
+sunset. Each day, however, the weather grew warmer, and by the time the
+vessel was off the coast of Portugal the evenings were warm and balmy.
+
+"This is not at all what I expected," Marion Renshaw said, as she sat in
+a deck-chair, to Mr. Atherton, who was leaning against the bulwark
+smoking a cigar. "I thought we were going to have storms, and that every
+one was going to be sea-sick. That is what it is like in all the books I
+have read; and I am sure that I have not felt the least bit ill from the
+time we started."
+
+"You have had everything in your favour. There has been just enough
+breeze to take us along at a fair rate with all our light canvas set,
+and yet not enough to cause more than a ripple on the sea. The ship has
+been as steady as if in port; but you must not flatter yourself this is
+going to last all the time. I think we shall have a change before long.
+The glass has fallen a little, and the wind has shifted its quarter two
+or three times during the day. The sky, too, does not look so settled as
+it has done. I think we shall have a blow before long."
+
+"What! A storm, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"No, I don't say that; but wind enough to get up a bit of sea, and to
+make landsmen feel very uncomfortable."
+
+"But I suppose we should not be ill now even if it were rough, after
+being a week at sea?"
+
+"I do not think you would be likely to be ill so long as you might have
+been had you encountered a gale directly we got out of the river, but I
+think that if it comes on rough all those addicted to sea-sickness are
+likely to suffer more or less. Some people are ill every time rough
+weather comes along, however long the voyage. I suppose you don't know
+yet whether you are a good sailor or not?"
+
+Marion shook her head. "We have been at the seaside almost every year,
+but we have never gone out in boats much there. Papa was always too busy
+to go, and I don't think he likes it. Mother gets a bad headache, even
+if she isn't ill. So I very seldom went out, and never when it was the
+least rough."
+
+Mr. Atherton's predictions turned out well founded. The wind got up
+during the night and was blowing freshly in the morning, and only two or
+three of the lady passengers made their appearance at breakfast; and
+several of the gentlemen were also absent. Wilfrid, to his great
+satisfaction, felt so far no symptoms whatever of impending illness. The
+two Allens were obliged to keep on deck during the meal, being unable to
+stand the motion below; but they were well enough to enjoy the cup of
+tea and plate of cold meat Wilfrid carried up to them. An hour or two
+later they went below. The wind was rising and the sea hourly getting
+up. Marion came up after breakfast, and for some time afterwards walked
+up and down on the deck with Wilfrid enjoying the brisk air, and
+considering it great fun to try to walk straight up and down the swaying
+deck. Presently, however, her laugh became subdued and her cheeks lost
+their colour.
+
+"I am afraid I am going to be ill, Wilfrid; but I shall stay on deck if
+I can. Both the Mitfords are ill, I am sure, for neither of them got up,
+though they declared that they felt nothing the matter with them. I have
+made up my mind to stay on deck as long as I possibly can."
+
+"That is the best way," Mr. Atherton said as he joined them in their
+walk, and caught the last sentence. "There is nothing like keeping up as
+long as possible; because if you do so it will sometimes pass off after
+a short time, whereas if you give up and take to your berth it is sure
+to run its course, which is longer or shorter according to
+circumstances--sometimes two days and sometimes five; but I should say
+that people who are what you may call fair sailors generally get over it
+in two days, unless the weather is very bad. So fight against it as long
+as you can, and when you cannot bear it any longer I will wrap you up in
+rugs, and you shall have my great chair to curl up in close by the lee
+bulwark. But determination goes a long way, and you may get over it yet.
+You take my arm, you won't throw me off my balance; while if the vessel
+gives a sharper roll than usual, you and your brother may both lose your
+feet together."
+
+As soon as they started on their walk Mr. Atherton began an amusing
+story of some adventure of his in the Western States of America, and
+Marion was so interested that she forgot all about her uncomfortable
+sensation, and was astonished when on hearing the lunch-bell ring she
+discovered she was getting perfectly well.
+
+"Where is Wilfrid?" she asked.
+
+"There he is, leaning over the lee bulwark; the fiend of sea-sickness
+has him in its grip."
+
+"Only think of Wilfrid being unwell and me being all right! You have
+quite driven it away, Mr. Atherton, for I was feeling very poorly when I
+began to walk with you."
+
+"I will go down and get you some luncheon and bring it up here to you.
+Curl yourself up in my chair until I return, and do not think more about
+the motion than you can help. You had better not go near your
+brother--people who are ill hate being pitied."
+
+An hour later Wilfrid went below. In the evening, however, the wind
+dropped considerably, and the next morning the sea was sparkling in the
+sunlight, and the _Flying Scud_ was making her way along with a scarcely
+perceptible motion. Thenceforth the weather was delightful throughout
+the voyage to Rio. The passengers found upon closer acquaintance that
+they all got on well together, and the days passed away pleasantly. In
+the evenings the piano was brought up from the cabin on to the deck, and
+for two or three hours there was singing, varied by an occasional dance
+among the young people.
+
+From the day of their leaving England Mr. Atherton had been the leading
+spirit on board the ship. If a misunderstanding arose he acted as
+mediator. He was ever ready to propose pastimes and amusements to
+lighten the monotony of the voyage, took the leading part in the
+concerts held on deck when the evenings were calm and clear, and was
+full of resource and invention. With the four or five children on board
+he was prime favourite, and Mr. Renshaw often wondered at the patience
+and good temper with which he submitted to all their whims, and was
+ready to give up whatever he was doing to submit himself to their
+orders. He had, before they had been ten days at sea, talked over with
+Mr. Renshaw the latter's plans, and advised him upon no account to be in
+a hurry to snap up the first land offered to him.
+
+"Half the people who come out to the colonies," he said, "get heavily
+bit at first by listening to the land-agents, and allowing themselves to
+be persuaded into buying property which, when they come to take
+possession of it, is in a majority of the cases almost worthless. I
+should advise you when you get there to hire a house in Wellington,
+where you can leave your wife and daughter while you examine the various
+districts and see which offer the greatest advantages. If you do not
+feel equal to it yourself, let your son go in your place. He is, I
+think, a sharp young fellow, and not likely to be easily taken in. At
+any rate, when he has made his report as to the places that seem most
+suitable, you can go and see their relative advantages before
+purchasing.
+
+"'There is no greater mistake than buying land in a locality of which
+you know nothing. You may find that the roads are impracticable and that
+you have no means of getting your produce to market, and after a while
+you will be glad to sell your place for a mere song and shift to another
+which you might at first have obtained at a price much lower than you
+gave for your worthless farm. I have knocked about in the States a good
+deal, and have known scores of men ruined by being too hasty in making a
+choice. You want to be in a colony six months at least before investing
+your money in land, so as to know something of the capabilities and
+advantages of each district. To a young man I should say--travel about
+in the colony, working your way, and making a stay of a month here and a
+month there. Of course in your case this is out of the question; but a
+personal examination of the places offered to you, which in nine cases
+out of ten men are ready to sell for less than they have cost them, will
+ensure you against absolute swindling."
+
+"What are you going to do yourself, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"I have come out simply to study the botany of the island. I may stay in
+the colony for a month or for a year. At any rate, if you depute Wilfrid
+to travel about to examine the various districts where land can be
+bought, I shall be glad to accompany him, as I myself shall also be on
+the look-out."
+
+"You are not thinking of farming, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"No. My own idea is to take a bit of land on one of the rivers, to get
+up a hut to serve as my head-quarters, and to spend much of my time in
+travelling about. I am very fortunately placed. I have ample funds to
+enable me to live in comfort, and I am free to indulge my fancy for
+wandering as I please. I consider that I have been spoiled by being my
+own master too young. I think it is bad for a young man to start in life
+with a competence; but when it comes to one in middle age, when one has
+learned to spend it rationally, it is undoubtedly a very great comfort
+and advantage. I suppose, however, that the time will come when I shall
+settle down. I am thirty-five, and I ought to 'range myself,' as the
+French say."
+
+Mr. Atherton had not been long upon the voyage when he discovered that
+the chances of success of the Renshaw party as settlers would be small
+indeed if they depended upon the exertions of the head of the family. He
+had not been more than a day or two on board before Mr. Renshaw began to
+discuss his favourite hobby with him, and confided to him that he
+intended thoroughly to investigate the history, customs, and religion of
+the Maoris, and to produce an exhaustive work on the subject. "An
+excellent idea, very," the stout man said encouragingly, "but one
+demanding great time and investigation; and perhaps," he added
+doubtfully, "one more suited to a single man, who can go and live among
+the natives and speak their language, than for a married man with a
+family to look after."
+
+Mr. Renshaw waved the remark aside lightly. "I shall, of course, set to
+work immediately I arrive to acquire a thorough knowledge of the
+language, and indeed have already begun with a small dictionary and a
+New Testament in the Maori language, brought out by the Missionary
+Society. As to my family, my exertions in the farming way will be of no
+use whatever to them. My wife and daughter will look after the house,
+and Wilfrid will undertake the management of the men out of doors. The
+whole scheme is theirs, and I should be of no assistance to them
+whatever. My bent lies entirely in the direction of archaeology, and
+there can be little doubt that my thorough acquaintance with all
+relating to the habits, and, so far as is known, of the language of the
+ancient Britons, Saxons, Danes, and the natives of the northern part of
+the island, will be of inestimable advantage in enabling me to carry out
+the subject I have resolved to take up. There are analogies and
+similarities between the habits of all primitive peoples, and one
+accustomed to the study of the early races of Europe can form a general
+opinion of the habits and mode of living of a tribe merely from the
+inspection of an ancient weapon or two, a bracelet, and a potsherd."
+
+Mr. Atherton looked down upon his companion with half-closed eyes, and
+seemed to be summing him up mentally; after a short conversation he
+turned away, and as he filled his pipe muttered to himself: "It is well
+for the family that the mother seems a capable and sensible woman, and
+that the lad, unless I am mistaken, has a dogged resolution about him as
+well as spirit and courage. The girl, too, is a bright sensible lass,
+and they may get on in spite of this idiot of a father. However, the man
+shows that he possesses a certain amount of sense by the confidence with
+which he throws the burden of the whole business of providing a living
+for the family on their shoulders.
+
+"Of course they would be much better without him, for I can foresee he
+will give them an awful lot of trouble. He will go mooning away among
+the natives, and will be getting lost and not heard of for a tremendous
+time. Still, I don't know that he will come to much harm. The Maoris
+have fine traits of character, and though they have been fighting about
+what they call the king question, they have seldom been guilty of any
+acts of hostility to isolated settlers, and a single white man going
+among them has always been received hospitably; besides, they will
+probably think him mad, and savages have always a sort of respect for
+madmen. Still, he will be a terrible worry to his family. I have taken a
+fancy to the others, and if I can do them a good turn out there in any
+way I will."
+
+As the voyage went on Mr. Atherton's liking for Mrs. Renshaw, her son
+and daughter, increased greatly, while his contempt for Mr. Renshaw
+became modified as he came to know him better. He found that he was
+really a capable man in his own particular hobby, and that although weak
+and indecisive he was very kind and affectionate with his wife and
+children, and reposed an almost childlike confidence in his wife's good
+sense.
+
+Madeira had been sighted lying like a great cloud on the horizon, and
+indeed the young Renshaws had difficulty when they came up on deck in
+the morning in believing that it was really land they saw. No stay was
+made here, nor did they catch a glimpse of the Canary Islands, being too
+far to the west to see even the lofty peak of Teneriffe. The first time
+the ship dropped anchor was at St. Jago, one of the Cape de Verde
+Islands; here they took in a supply of fresh water, meat, and
+vegetables. The passengers all landed, but were much disappointed with
+the sandy and uninteresting island, and it was no consolation for them
+to learn from the captain that parts of the island were much more
+fertile, although the vegetables and fruit came for the most part from
+the other islands. "Now," he said, "if all goes well you will see no
+land again till you get to Rio. We shall keep to the east of St. Paul,
+and unless we get blown out of our course we shall not go near
+Ascension."
+
+As the wind continued favourable the ship kept her course, and at twelve
+o'clock one day the captain, after taking his observations, told them
+that he expected to be in Rio on the following evening. The next morning
+when they came up on deck land was in sight, and in the evening they
+dropped anchor in the harbour of Rio, one of the finest ports in the
+world.
+
+"Yes, it is a splendid harbour," Mr. Atherton agreed as he listened to
+the exclamations of delight of the Renshaws. "I do not know that it is
+the finest, but it is certainly equal to any I have ever seen. As a
+harbour New York is better, because even more landlocked. San Francisco
+is, both in that respect and in point of scenery, superb. Bombay is a
+grand harbour, but exposed to certain winds. Taken altogether, I think I
+should give the palm to San Francisco."
+
+A few minutes after the anchor had dropped a number of shore-boats came
+alongside filled with luscious fruit, and rowed for the most part by
+negroes, who chatted and shouted and gesticulated, making such a din
+that it was impossible to distinguish a single word amid the uproar.
+Wilfrid, the Allens, and others quickly ran down the ladders, and
+without troubling themselves to bargain returned with quantities of
+fruit. Several negresses soon followed them on to the deck, and going up
+to the ladies produced cards and letters testifying that they were good
+washerwomen and their terms reasonable. The captain had the evening
+before told them it would take him three or four days to discharge his
+cargo for Rio, and that they had better take advantage of the
+opportunity if they wanted any washing done. They had, therefore, got
+everything in readiness, and in a few minutes numerous canvas bags
+filled with linen were deposited in the boats.
+
+In addition to the fruit several great bouquets of gorgeous flowers had
+been purchased, and the cabin that evening presented quite a festive
+appearance. After it became dark and the lights of Rio sparkled out, all
+agreed that the scene was even more beautiful than by daylight. The air
+was deliciously balmy and soft, the sea as smooth as glass. The moon was
+nearly full, and the whole line of the shore could be distinctly seen.
+Boats flitted about between the vessels and the strand; fishing-boats,
+with their sails hanging motionless, slowly made their way in by the aid
+of oars. The sounds of distant music in the city came across the water.
+
+There was no singing or dancing on board the _Flying Scud_ that evening.
+All were content to sit quiet and enjoy the scene, and such conversation
+as there was was carried on in low tones, as if they were under a spell
+which they feared to break. The next morning all went ashore soon after
+breakfast; but upon their assembling at dinner it was found that the
+general impression was one of disappointment. It was a fine city, but
+not so fine as it looked from the water. Except the main thoroughfares
+the streets were narrow, and, as the ladies declared, dirty. The young
+people, however, were not so critical; they had been delighted with the
+stir and movement, the bright costumes, the variety of race and colour,
+and the novelty of everything they saw.
+
+"The negroes amuse me most," Marion said. "They seem to be always
+laughing. I never saw such merry people."
+
+"They are like children," her father said. "The slightest thing causes
+them amusement. It is one of the signs of a low type of intellect when
+people are given to laugh at trifles."
+
+"Then the natives ought to be very intelligent," Marion said, "for as a
+whole they appeared to me to be a serious race. Of course I saw many of
+them laughing and chattering, but most of them are very quiet in manner.
+The old people seem to be wrinkled in a wonderful way. I never saw
+English people so wrinkled."
+
+"All southern races show age in that way," Mr. Atherton said. "You see
+marvellous old men and women in Spain and Italy. People who, as far as
+looks go, might be a hundred and fifty--little dried-up specimens of
+humanity, with faces more like those of monkeys than men."
+
+"Are the negroes slaves, Mr. Atherton? They still have slavery in
+Brazil, do they not? They certainly are not at all according to my idea
+of slaves."
+
+"The estates are mostly worked by negro slaves," Mr. Atherton said, "and
+no doubt many of those you saw to-day are also slaves. Household slavery
+is seldom severe, and I believe the Brazilians are generally kind
+masters. But probably the greater portion of the negroes you saw are
+free. They may have purchased their freedom with their savings, or may
+have been freed by kind masters. It is no very unusual thing for a
+Brazilian at his death to leave a will giving freedom to all his slaves.
+Government is doing its best to bring about the entire extinction of
+slavery. I believe that all children born after a certain date have been
+declared free, and have no doubt that in time slavery will be abolished.
+Great changes like this take some time to carry out, and even for the
+sake of the slaves themselves it is better to proceed quietly and
+gradually. I suppose nobody inclines to go on shore again to-night?"
+
+There was a general negative. The day had been very warm, and having
+been walking about for hours no one felt any inclination to make a fresh
+start. The following morning the vessel began to unload her cargo. Some
+of the older passengers declared that they had had enough of shore, and
+should not land--at any rate until the afternoon. The rest went ashore;
+but the greater part of them returned at lunch-time, and the heat in the
+afternoon was so great that none cared to land again.
+
+In the evening the two Allens and Wilfrid agreed to go ashore to visit a
+theatre. Mr. Atherton said that as he had no inclination to melt away
+all at once he would not join them, but would land with them and stroll
+about for a time, and see the town in its evening aspect. Several other
+parties were made up among the male passengers, and one or two of the
+ladies accompanied their husbands.
+
+Wilfrid and the Allens did not stay out the performance. The heat was
+very great, and as they did not understand a word of the dialogue they
+soon agreed that it would be more pleasant to stroll about, or to sit
+down in the open air before a cafe and sip iced drinks.
+
+Accordingly after walking about for a while they sat down before a cafe
+in the Grand Square, and as they sipped iced lemonade looked on with
+much amusement at the throng walking up and down.
+
+"It is later than I thought," James Allen said, looking at his watch.
+"It is nearly twelve o'clock, and high time for us to be on board."
+
+They started to make what they thought would prove a short cut down to
+the landing-place; but as usual the short cut proved delusive, and they
+soon found themselves wandering in unknown streets. They asked several
+persons they met the way down to the water, but none of them understood
+English, and it was a considerable time before they emerged from the
+streets on to the line of quays.
+
+"We are ever so much too far to the right," James Allen said as they
+looked round. "I fancy that is the ship's light not far from the shore
+half a mile away on the left. I hope we shall find some boatmen to take
+us off; it would be rather awkward finding ourselves here for the night
+in a place where no one understands the language."
+
+"I think we should manage all right," Wilfrid said. "We know the way
+from the place where we landed up into the part where the hotels are,
+and are sure to find people there who understand English. Still I hope
+it will not come to that. They would be in a great fidget on board if we
+were not to turn up to-night."
+
+"I do not think they would be alarmed," James Allen replied. "Every one
+is in bed and asleep long ago, and we should be on board in the morning
+before the steward went to our cabin and found that we were missing. I
+consider we are quite safe in that respect, but Atherton might be doing
+something if he found we did not come back."
+
+"He might do something, perhaps," Wilfrid said; "but I am quite sure he
+would not alarm my father and mother about it. He is the last sort of
+fellow to do that."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV.
+
+A ROW ON SHORE.
+
+
+While Wilfrid and the Allens were talking they were walking briskly in
+the direction of their landing-place. They had arrived within a hundred
+yards of it, when a party of four men who were lying among a pile of
+timber got up and came across towards them. They were rough-looking
+fellows, and James Allen said, "I do not like the look of these chaps. I
+think they mean mischief. Look out!" As he spoke the men rushed at them.
+James Allen gave a loud shout for help and then struck a blow at a man
+who rushed at him. The fellow staggered backwards, and with a fierce
+exclamation in Portuguese drew a knife. A moment later Allen received a
+sharp stab on the shoulder, and was knocked to the ground. The other two
+after a short struggle had also been overpowered and borne down, but in
+their case the robbers had not used their knives.
+
+They were feeling in their pockets when the step of a man approaching at
+full speed was heard. One of the robbers was about to run off, when
+another exclaimed: "You coward! It is but one man, which means more
+booty. Out with your knives and give him a taste of them as he comes
+up!" A moment later the man ran up. The leader stepped forward to meet
+him, knife in hand; but as he struck his wrist was grasped, and a
+tremendous blow was delivered in his face, hurling him stunned and
+bleeding to the ground. With a bound the new-comer threw himself upon
+two of the other men. Grasping them by their throats he shook them as if
+they had been children, and then dashed their heads together with such
+tremendous force that when he loosened his grasp both fell insensible on
+the ground. The other robber took to his heels at the top of his speed.
+All this had passed so quickly that the struggle was over before Wilfrid
+and the Allens could get to their feet.
+
+"Not hurt, I hope?" their rescuer asked anxiously.
+
+"Why, Mr. Atherton, is it you?" Wilfrid exclaimed. "You arrived at a
+lucky moment indeed. No, I am not hurt that I know of, beyond a shake."
+
+"Nor I," Bob Allen said.
+
+"I have got a stab in my shoulder," James Allen answered. "I don't know
+that it is very deep, but I think it is bleeding a good deal, for I feel
+very shaky. That fellow has got my watch," and he pointed to the man who
+had been first knocked down.
+
+"Look in his hand, Wilfrid. He won't have had time to put it in his
+pocket. If you have lost anything else look in the other fellows' hands
+or on the ground close to them."
+
+He lifted James Allen, who was now scarcely able to stand, carried him
+to the wood pile, and seated him on a log with his back against another.
+Then he took off his coat and waistcoat, and tore open his shirt. "It is
+nothing serious," he said. "It is a nasty gash and is bleeding freely,
+but I daresay we can stop that; I have bandaged up plenty of worse
+wounds in my time." He drew the edge of the wound together, and tied his
+handkerchief and that of Wilfrid tightly round it. "That will do for the
+present," he said. "Now I will carry you down to the boat," and lifting
+the young fellow up as though he were a feather he started with him.
+
+"Shall we do anything with these fellows, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"No, leave them as they are; what they deserve is to be thrown into the
+sea. I daresay their friend will come back to look after them
+presently."
+
+In a couple of minutes they arrived at the landing-place, where two men
+were sitting in a boat.
+
+"But how did you come to be here, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid asked when they
+had taken their seats.
+
+"I came to look after you boys, Wilfrid. I got on board about eleven,
+and on going down to the cabin found you had not returned, so I thought
+I would smoke another cigar and wait up for you. At twelve o'clock the
+last party returned, and as I thought you might have some difficulty in
+getting on board after that, I got into the boat and rowed ashore, and
+engaged the men to wait as long as I wanted them. I thought perhaps you
+had missed your way, and did not feel uneasy about you, for there being
+three of you together it was scarcely likely you had got into any bad
+scrape. I was beginning at last to think you had perhaps gone to an
+hotel for the night, and that it was no use waiting any longer, when I
+heard your voices coming along the quays. The night is so quiet that I
+heard your laugh some distance away, and recognized it. I then strolled
+along to meet you, when I saw those four fellows come out into the
+moonlight from a shadow in the wood. I guessed that they were up to
+mischief, and started to run at once, and was within fifty yards of you
+when I saw the scuffle and caught the glint of the moon on the blade of
+a knife. Another five or six seconds I was up, and then there was an end
+of it. Now we are close to the ship. Go up as quietly as you can, and do
+not make a noise as you go into your cabins. It is no use alarming
+people. I will carry Jim down."
+
+"I can walk now, I think, Mr. Atherton."
+
+"You might do, but you won't, my lad; for if you did you would probably
+start your wound bleeding afresh. You two had best take your shoes off
+directly you get on deck."
+
+James Allen was carried down and laid on his berth. Mr. Atherton went
+and roused the ship's doctor, and then lighted the lamp in the cabin.
+
+"What is all this about?" the surgeon asked as he came in.
+
+"There has been a bit of a scrimmage on shore," Mr. Atherton replied;
+"and, as you see, Allen has got a deepish slash from the shoulder down
+to the elbow. It has been bleeding very freely, and he is faint from
+loss of blood; but I do not think it is serious at all."
+
+"No, it is a deep flesh wound," the doctor said, examining him; "but
+there is nothing to be in the slightest degree uneasy about. I will get
+a bandage from my cabin, and some lint, and set it all right in five
+minutes."
+
+When the arm was bandaged, Mr. Atherton said: "Now I must get you to do
+a little plastering for me doctor."
+
+"What! are you wounded, Mr. Atherton?" the others exclaimed in surprise.
+
+"Nothing to speak of, lads; but both those fellows made a slash at me as
+I closed with them. I had but just finished their leader and could do no
+more than strike wildly as I turned upon them." As he spoke he was
+taking off his waistcoat and shirt.
+
+"By Jove, you have had a narrow escape!" the doctor said; "and how you
+take it so coolly I cannot make out. Except as to the bleeding, they are
+both far more serious than Allen's."
+
+One of the wounds was in the left side, about three inches below the
+arm. The man had evidently struck at the heart, but the quickness with
+which Mr. Atherton had closed with him had disconcerted his aim; the
+knife had struck rather far back, and glancing behind the ribs had cut a
+deep gash under the shoulder-blade. The other wound had been given by a
+downright blow at the right side, and had laid open the flesh from below
+the breast down to the hip.
+
+"It is only a case for plaster," Mr. Atherton said. "It is useful to
+have a casing of fat sometimes. It is the same thing with a whale--you
+have got to drive a harpoon in very deep to get at the vitals. You see
+this wound in front has bled very little."
+
+"You have lost a good deal of blood from the other cut," the surgeon
+said. "I will draw the edges of the wounds together with a needle and
+thread, and will then put some bandages on. You will have to keep quiet
+for some days. Your wounds are much too serious to think of putting
+plaster on at present."
+
+"I have had a good deal more serious wounds than these," Mr. Atherton
+said cheerfully, "and have had to ride seventy or eighty miles on the
+following day. However I will promise you not to go ashore to-morrow;
+and as the captain says he expects to be off the next morning, I shall
+be able to submit myself to your orders without any great privation."
+
+"Why did you not say that you were wounded, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid said
+reproachfully as they went to their own cabin and prepared to turn in.
+
+"To tell you the truth, Wilfrid, I hardly thought the wounds were as
+deep as they are. My blood was up, you see, and when that is the case
+you are scarcely conscious of pain. I felt a sharp shooting sensation on
+both sides as I grasped those fellows by the throat, and afterwards I
+knew I was bleeding a bit at the back, for I felt the warmth of the
+blood down in my shoe; but there was nothing to prevent my carrying
+young Allen, and one person can carry a wounded man with much more ease
+to him than two can do, unless of course they have got a stretcher."
+
+The next morning there was quite a stir in the ship when it was known
+that two of the passengers were wounded, and Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw were
+greatly alarmed when they heard of the risk Wilfrid had run. Neither of
+the wounded men appeared at breakfast, as the surgeon insisted that both
+should lie quiet for at least one day. Mr. Renshaw had paid a visit to
+Mr. Atherton directly he had heard from Wilfrid his story of the fray,
+and thanked him most warmly for his intervention on behalf of his son.
+"Wilfrid said he has very little doubt that they all three would have
+been stabbed if you had not come up."
+
+"I do not say they might not," Mr. Atherton said, "because their
+resistance had raised the men's anger; and in this country when a man is
+angry he generally uses his knife. Besides, dead men raise no alarm.
+Still they might have contented themselves with robbing them. However, I
+own that it was lucky I was on the spot."
+
+"But it was not a question of luck at all," Mr. Renshaw insisted. "You
+were there because you had specially gone ashore to look after these
+foolish young fellows, and your being there was the result of your own
+thoughtfulness for them, and not in any way of chance."
+
+"There is quite a crowd on the quay, Mr. Renshaw," the captain said when
+that gentleman went on deck, "I suppose they have found stains of blood
+in the road and conclude that a crime has been committed. Oh, here is
+our boat putting out from the landing-place. The steward has been on
+shore to get fresh fruit for breakfast; he will tell us what is going
+on."
+
+The steward had gone ashore before the news of the encounter had been
+spread by the surgeon.
+
+"What is the excitement about on shore?" the captain asked him as he
+stepped on deck.
+
+"Well, sir, as far as I could learn from a chap who spoke a little
+English, there have been bad doings on shore in the night. Two men were
+found this morning lying dead there. There is nothing uncommon about
+that; but they say there are no wounds on them, except that their skulls
+are stove in, as if they had both been struck by a beam of wood at the
+back of the head. But besides that there were two or three pools of
+blood in the road. It seems one man walked back into the town, for there
+are marks of his feet as if he stepped in the blood before starting in
+that direction. Then there is a line of blood spots down to the
+landing-place and down the steps, as if somebody had got into a boat.
+Nobody seems to make head nor tail of the business."
+
+"Well, we must keep this quiet if we can," the captain said, turning to
+Mr. Renshaw. "If it were known that any of our people were concerned in
+this affair they might keep us here for three weeks or a month while it
+is being investigated, or insist upon Mr. Atherton and your son and the
+Allens remaining behind as witnesses. Mr. Ryan," he called to the
+first-mate, "just come here a moment. This matter is more serious than
+we thought. It seems that Mr. Atherton, who, as we have heard, dashed
+the heads of two of these fellows together, killed them on the spot."
+
+"Sure and I thought as much when young Allen was telling me about it,"
+the mate said. "I have seen Mr. Atherton at work before this, and I
+thought to myself that unless those fellows' skulls were made of iron,
+and thick at that, they must have gone in when he brought them
+together."
+
+"The worst of it is," the captain went on, "they have traced marks of
+blood down to the landing-stage, and of course have suspicion that
+someone concerned in the affair took a boat, and either came off to one
+of the ships or went away in one of the fishing craft. You know what
+these fellows are; if they find out that anyone on board is mixed up in
+the matter, they will keep the ship here for a month."
+
+"That is true enough, sir. It is mighty lucky we would be if we got away
+in a month."
+
+"The first thing is to see about the boatmen," the captain said. "Of
+course if they tell the authorities they brought a wounded man on board
+here late last night there is an end of it; but if they hold their
+tongues, and we all keep our own council, the thing may not leak out
+to-day, and we will have our anchor up and get out this evening if we
+can. You had better tell all the crew that not a word is to be said
+about the matter, and I will impress the same on the passengers. When
+they know that a careless word may lead to a month's detention, you may
+be sure there will be no talking. But before you speak to them I will go
+down and see Mr. Atherton, and hear what he says about the boatmen." He
+returned in two or three minutes. "I hope it will be all right," he
+said. "Atherton gave them a pound apiece, and told them to hold their
+tongues. He thinks it is probable they will do so, for they would know
+well enough that they would, as likely as not, be clapped into prison
+and kept there while the investigation was going on. So there is a
+strong hope that it may not leak out through them. You must stop all
+leave ashore, Mr. Ryan. Tell the men whose turn it is to go, they shall
+have their spree at Buenos Ayres. If they were to get drunk it would be
+as likely as not to slip out."
+
+"I will see to it, sir."
+
+Directly breakfast was over the captain took a boat and went ashore. He
+had duly impressed upon all the passengers the absolute necessity for
+silence, and several of these went ashore with him. He returned half an
+hour later, having been up to the British Consulate.
+
+"The affair is making quite a stir in the town. Not on account of two
+men being found dead, there is nothing uncommon in that, especially as
+they have been recognized as two notorious ruffians; but the whole
+circumstances of the affair puzzle them.
+
+"The doctors who have examined the bodies have arrived pretty well at
+the truth, and say that both men have been gripped by the throat, for
+the marks of the fingers are plainly visible, and their heads dashed
+together. But although this is, as we know, perfectly true, no one
+believes it; for the doctors themselves admit that it does not appear to
+them possible that any man would have had the strength requisite to
+completely batter in the skulls of two others, as has been done in this
+case. The police are searching the town for the man whose footsteps led
+in that direction, and as they know all the haunts of these ruffians and
+their associates it is likely enough that they will find him, especially
+as his face is sure to bear marks of Atherton's handiwork. Still, if
+they do find him, and he tells all he knows of the business, they will
+not be much nearer to tracing the actors in it to this ship. It is not
+probable that he recovered his senses until long after they were on
+board the boat, and can only say that while engaged in attempting to rob
+some passers-by he was suddenly knocked down. But even this they are not
+likely to get out of him first, for he will know that he used a knife,
+and is not likely to put himself in the way of punishment if he can help
+it. I came off at once, because I heard at the Consulate that the police
+are going to search every ship in the harbour to see if they can find
+some wounded man, or get some clue to the mystery, so I must ask the
+doctor if his two patients are fit to be dressed and go up on deck."
+
+The doctor on being consulted said that he should certainly have
+preferred that they should have remained quiet all day, but he did not
+know that it would do them any harm to get on deck for a bit. And
+accordingly in half an hour Mr. Atherton and James Allen came up. The
+doctor, who had assisted them to dress, accompanied them.
+
+"Now, Mr. Atherton, you had better seat yourself in that great
+deck-chair of yours with the leg-rest. If you sit there quietly reading
+when they come on board they are not likely to suspect you of being a
+desperate character, or to appreciate your inches and width of shoulder.
+Allen had better sit quiet till they get alongside, and then slip that
+sling into his pocket and walk up and down talking to one of the ladies,
+with his thumb in his waistcoat so as to support his arm. He looks pale
+and shaky; but they are not accustomed to much colour here, and he will
+pass well enough."
+
+As soon as Mr. Atherton had taken his seat Mrs. Renshaw and Marion came
+up to him. "How can we thank you enough, Mr. Atherton, for the risks you
+have run to succour Wilfrid, and for your kind consideration in going on
+shore to wait for him?"
+
+"It was nothing, Mrs. Renshaw. I own to enjoying a scrimmage when I can
+go into one with the feeling of being in the right. You know that I am a
+very lazy man, but it is just your lazy men who do enjoy exerting
+themselves occasionally."
+
+"It was grand!" Marion broke in; "and you ought not to talk as if it was
+nothing, Mr. Atherton. Wilfrid said that he thought it was all over with
+him till he saw a big man flying down the road."
+
+"A perfect colossus of Rhodes!" Mr. Atherton laughed.
+
+"It is not a thing to joke about," Marion went on earnestly. "It may
+seem very little to you, Mr. Atherton, but it is everything to us."
+
+"Don't you know that one always jokes when one is serious, Miss Renshaw?
+You know that in church any little thing that you would scarcely notice
+at any other time makes you inclined to laugh. Some day in the far
+distance, when you become a woman, you will know the truth of the
+saying, that smiles and tears are very close to each other."
+
+"I am getting to be a woman now," Marion said with some dignity; for Mr.
+Atherton always persisted in treating her as if she were a child, which,
+as she was nearly seventeen, was a standing grievance to her.
+
+"Age does not make a woman, Miss Renshaw. I saw you skipping three days
+ago with little Kate Mitford and your brother and young Allen, and you
+enjoyed it as much as any of them."
+
+"We were trying which could keep up the longest," Marion said; "Wilfrid
+and I against the other two. You were looking on, and I believe you
+would have liked to have skipped too."
+
+"I think I should," Mr. Atherton agreed. "You young people do not skip
+half as well as we used to when I was a boy; and I should have given you
+a lesson if I had not been afraid of shaking the ship's timbers to
+pieces."
+
+"How absurd you are, Mr. Atherton!" Marion said pettishly. "Of course
+you are not thin, but you always talk of yourself as if you were
+something monstrous."
+
+Mr. Atherton laughed. His diversion had had the desired effect, and had
+led them away from the subject of the fight on shore.
+
+"There is a galley putting off from shore with a lot of officials on
+board," the captain said, coming up at this moment. "They are rowing to
+the next ship, and I suppose they will visit us next."
+
+A quarter of an hour later the galley came alongside, and three
+officials mounted the gangway. The captain went forward to meet them.
+"Is there anything I can do for you, gentlemen?"
+
+"There has been a crime committed on shore," the leader of the party
+said, "and it is suspected that some of those concerned in the matter
+are on board one of the ships in the harbour. I have authority to make a
+strict search on board each."
+
+"You are perfectly welcome to do so, sir," the captain said. "One of
+our officers will show you over the ship."
+
+"I must trouble you to show me your list of passengers and crew, and to
+muster the men on deck. But first I must ask you, Did any of your boats
+return on board late?"
+
+"No," the captain replied. "Our last boat was hauled up to the davits at
+half-past nine. There was a heavy day's work before the men to-day, and
+I therefore refused leave on shore."
+
+The men were ordered to be mustered, and while they were collecting the
+second-mate went round the ship with the officials, and they saw that no
+one was below in his berth. The men's names were called over from the
+list, and the officials satisfied that all were present and in good
+health.
+
+"Now for the passengers," he said
+
+"I cannot ask them to muster," the captain observed, "but I will walk
+round with you and point out those on the list. There are some eight or
+ten on shore. They will doubtless be off to lunch; and if you leave an
+officer on board he will see that they are by no means the sort of
+people to take part in such an affair as that which has happened on
+shore."
+
+The officials went round the deck, but saw nothing whatever to excite
+their suspicion. Marion Renshaw was laughing and talking with Mr.
+Atherton, Miss Mitford walking up and down the poop in conversation with
+James Allen. After they had finished their investigations, the officials
+left one of their party to inspect the remaining passengers as they came
+on board, and to check them off the list. They then again took their
+seats in the galley and were rowed to the next ship.
+
+By dint of great exertions the cargo was got out by sunset, the sails
+were at once loosened and the anchor weighed, and before the short
+twilight had faded away the _Flying Scud_ was making her way with a
+gentle breeze towards the mouth of the harbour.
+
+"We are well out of that," Mr. Atherton said as he looked back at the
+lights of the city.
+
+"I think you are very well out of it indeed, in more senses than one,"
+said the surgeon, who was standing next to him; "but you have had a
+wonderfully close shave of it, Mr. Atherton. Another inch and either of
+those blows might have been fatal. Besides, had you been detained for a
+month or six weeks, it is as likely as not that, what with the heat and
+what with the annoyance, your wound would have taken a bad turn. Now,
+you must let me exercise my authority and order you to your berth
+immediately. You ought not to have been out of it. Of the two evils,
+getting up and detention, I chose the least; but I should be glad now if
+you would go off at once. If you do not, I can assure you I may have you
+on my hands all the rest of the voyage."
+
+"I will obey orders, doctor. The more willingly because for the last
+hour or two my back has been smarting unmercifully. I do not feel the
+other wound much."
+
+"That is because you have been sitting still. You will find it hurt you
+when you come to walk. Please go down carefully; a sudden movement might
+start your wounds again."
+
+It was two or three days before Mr. Atherton again appeared on deck. His
+left arm was bandaged tightly to his body so as to prevent any movement
+of the shoulder-blade, and he walked stiffly to the deck-chair, which
+had been piled with cushions in readiness.
+
+"I am glad to be out again, Mrs. Renshaw," Mr. Atherton said as she
+arranged the cushions to suit him. "Your husband, with Wilfrid and the
+two Allens, have kept me company, one or other of them, all the time, so
+I cannot say I have been dull. But it was much hotter below than it is
+here. However, I know the doctor was right in keeping me below, for the
+slightest movement gave me a great deal of pain. However, the wounds are
+going on nicely, and I hope by the time we get to Buenos Ayres I shall
+be fit for a trip on shore again."
+
+"I hardly think so, Mr. Atherton; for if the weather continues as it is
+now--it is a nice steady breeze, and we have been running ever since we
+left Rio--I think we shall be there long before you are fit to go
+ashore."
+
+"I do not particularly care about it," Mr. Atherton said. "Buenos Ayres
+is not like Rio, but is for the most part quite a modern town, and even
+in situation has little to recommend it. Besides, we shall be so far off
+that there will be no running backwards and forwards between the ship
+and the shore as there was at Rio. Of course it depends a good deal on
+the amount of the water coming down the river, but vessels sometimes
+have to anchor twelve miles above the town."
+
+"I am sure I have no desire to go ashore," Mrs. Renshaw said, "and after
+the narrow escape Wilfrid had at Rio I should be glad if he did not set
+foot there again until we arrive at the end of the voyage."
+
+"He is not likely to get into a scrape again," Mr. Atherton said. "Of
+course it would have been wiser not to have stopped so late as they did
+in a town of whose ways they knew nothing; but you may be sure he will
+be careful another time. Besides, I fancy from what I have heard things
+are better managed there, and the population are more peaceable and
+orderly than at Rio. But, indeed, such an adventure as that which befell
+them might very well have happened to any stranger wandering late at
+night in the slums of any of our English seaports."
+
+There was a general feeling of disappointment among the passengers when
+the _Flying Scud_ dropped anchor in the turbid waters of the La Plata.
+The shore was some five or six miles away, and was low and
+uninteresting. The towers and spires of the churches of Buenos Ayres
+were plainly visible, but of the town itself little could be seen. As
+soon as the anchor was dropped the captain's gig was lowered, and he
+started for shore to make arrangements for landing the cargo. The next
+morning a steam tug brought out several flats, and the work of unloading
+commenced. A few passengers went ashore in the tug, but none of the
+Renshaws left the ship. Two days sufficed for getting out the goods for
+Buenos Ayres. The passengers who had been staying at hotels on shore
+came off with the last tug to the ship. Their stay ashore had been a
+pleasant one, and they liked the town, which, in point of cleanliness
+and order, they considered to be in advance of Rio.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+A BOAT EXPEDITION.
+
+
+"Well I am not sorry we are off again," Marion Renshaw said as the men
+ran round with the capstan bars and the anchor came up from the shallow
+water. "What a contrast between this and Rio!"
+
+"It is, indeed," Mr. Atherton, who was standing beside her, replied. "I
+own I should have liked to spend six months in a snug little craft going
+up the La Plata and Parana, especially the latter. The La Plata runs
+through a comparatively flat and--I will not say unfertile country,
+because it is fertile enough, but--a country deficient in trees, and
+offering but small attraction to a botanist; but the Parana flows north.
+Paraguay is a country but little visited by Europeans, and ought to be
+well worth investigation; but, as you say, I am glad enough to be out of
+this shallow water. In a short time we shall be looking out our wraps
+again. We shall want our warmest things for doubling Cape Horn, or
+rather what is called doubling Cape Horn, because in point of fact we do
+not double it at all."
+
+"Do you mean we do not go round it?" Marion asked in surprise.
+
+"We may, and we may not, Miss Renshaw. It will depend upon the weather,
+I suppose; but most vessels now go through the Straits which separate
+Cape Horn itself from Tierra del Fuego."
+
+"Those are the Straits of Magellan, are they not?"
+
+"Oh, no!" Mr. Atherton replied. "The Straits of Magellan lie still
+further to the north, and separate Tierra del Fuego from the mainland. I
+wish that we were going through them, for I believe the scenery is
+magnificent."
+
+"But if they lie further north that must surely be our shortest way, so
+why should we not go through them?"
+
+"If we were in a steamer we might do so, Miss Renshaw; but the channels
+are so narrow and intricate, and the tides and currents run with such
+violence, that sailing-vessels hardly ever attempt the passage. The
+straits we shall go through lie between Tierra del Fuego and the group
+of islands of which the Horn is the most southerly."
+
+"Is the country inhabited?"
+
+"Yes, by races of the most debased savages, with whom, I can assure you,
+I have no desire whatever to make any personal acquaintance."
+
+"Not even to collect botanical specimens, Mr. Atherton?" the girl asked,
+smiling.
+
+"Not even for that purpose, Miss Renshaw. I will do a good deal in
+pursuance of my favourite hobby, but I draw the line at the savages of
+Tierra del Fuego. Very few white men have ever fallen into their hands
+and lived to tell the tale, and certainly I should have no chance
+whatever."
+
+"Why would you have less chance than other people, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"My attractions would be irresistible," Mr. Atherton replied gravely. "I
+should furnish meat for a whole tribe."
+
+"How horrible!" Marion exclaimed. "What! are they cannibals?"
+
+"Very much so indeed; and one can hardly blame them, for it is the only
+chance they have of getting flesh. Their existence is one long struggle
+with famine and cold. They are not hunters, and are but poor fishermen.
+I firmly believe that if I were in their place I should be a cannibal
+myself."
+
+"How can you say such things?" Marion asked indignantly. "I never know
+whether you are in earnest, Mr. Atherton. I am sure you would never be a
+cannibal."
+
+"There is no saying what one might be if one were driven to it," he
+replied placidly. "Anyhow, I trust that I shall never be driven to it.
+In my various journeyings and adventures I am happy to say that I have
+never been forced to experience a prolonged fast, and it is one of the
+things I have no inclination to try. This weather is perfection, is it
+not?" he went on, changing the subject. "The _Flying Scud_ is making
+capital way. I only hope it may last. It is sad to think that we shall
+soon exchange these balmy breezes for a biting wind. We are just saying,
+Wilfrid," he went on as the lad strolled up to them, "that you will soon
+have to lay aside your white flannels and put on a greatcoat and
+muffler."
+
+"I shall not be sorry," Wilfrid replied. "After a month of hot weather
+one wants bracing up a bit, and I always enjoy cold."
+
+"Then you should have gone out and settled in Iceland instead of New
+Zealand."
+
+"I should not have minded that, Mr. Atherton. There is splendid
+fishing, I believe, and sealing, and all that sort of thing. But I do
+not suppose the others would have liked it. I am sure father would not.
+He cannot bear cold, and his study at home used always to be kept up at
+almost the temperature of an oven all the winter. I should think New
+Zealand would exactly suit him."
+
+Before the sun set they had the satisfaction of sailing out of the muddy
+water of the La Plata, and of being once more in the bright blue sea.
+For the next week the _Flying Scud_ sailed merrily southward without
+adventure. The air grew sensibly cooler each day, and the light garments
+of the tropics were already exchanged for warmer covering.
+
+"Do you always get this sort of weather down here, captain?" Mrs.
+Renshaw asked.
+
+"Not always, Mrs. Renshaw. The weather is generally fine, I admit, but
+occasionally short but very violent gales sweep down from off the land.
+They are known as pamperos; because, I suppose, they come from the
+pampas. They are very dangerous from the extreme suddenness with which
+they sweep down. If they are seen coming, and the vessel can be stripped
+of her canvas in time, there is little danger to be apprehended, for
+they are as short as they are violent."
+
+"We have been wonderfully fortunate altogether so far," Mrs. Renshaw
+said. "We have not had a single gale since we left England. I trust that
+our good luck will continue to the end."
+
+"I hope so too," the captain said. "I grant that a spell of such weather
+as we have been favoured with is apt to become a little monotonous, and
+I generally find my passengers have a tendency after a time to become
+snappish and quarrelsome from sheer want of anything to occupy their
+minds. Still I would very much rather put up with that than with the
+chances of a storm."
+
+"People must be very foolish to get out of temper because everything is
+going on well," Mrs. Renshaw said. "I am sure I find it perfectly
+delightful sailing on as we do."
+
+"Then you see, madam, you are an indefatigable worker. I never see your
+hands idle; but to people who do not work, a long voyage of unbroken
+weather must, I can very well understand, be monotonous. Of course with
+us who have duties to perform it is different. I have often heard
+passengers wish for what they call a good gale, but I have never heard a
+sailor who has once experienced one express such a wish. However staunch
+the ship, a great gale is a most anxious time for all concerned in the
+navigation of a vessel. It is, too, a time of unremitting hardship.
+There is but little sleep to be had; all hands are constantly on deck,
+and are continually wet to the skin. Great seas sweep over a ship, and
+each man has literally his life in his hand, for he may at any moment be
+torn from his hold and washed overboard, or have his limbs broken by
+some spar or hen-coop or other object swept along by the sea. It always
+makes me angry when I hear a passenger express a wish for a gale, in
+thoughtless ignorance of what he is desiring. If a storm comes we must
+face it like men; and in a good ship like the _Flying Scud_, well
+trimmed and not overladen, and with plenty of sea-room, we may feel
+pretty confident as to the result; but that is a very different thing
+from wishing to have one."
+
+By the time they were a fortnight out from Buenos Ayres, Mr. Atherton
+and James Allen were both off the sick-list; indeed the latter had been
+but a week in the doctor's hands. The adventure had bound the little
+party more closely together than before. The Allens had quite settled
+that when their friends once established themselves on a holding, they
+would, if possible, take one up in the neighbourhood; and they and the
+young Renshaws often regretted that Mr. Atherton was only a bird of
+passage, and had no intention of fixing himself permanently in the
+colony. The air had grown very much colder of late, and the light
+clothes they had worn in the tropics had already been discarded, and in
+the evening all were glad to put on warm wraps when they came on deck.
+
+"I think," the captain said as Mr. Renshaw came up for his customary
+walk before breakfast, "we are going to have a change. The glass has
+fallen a good deal, and I did not like the look of the sun when it rose
+this morning."
+
+"It looks to me very much as usual," Mr. Renshaw replied, shading his
+eyes and looking at the sun, "except perhaps that it is not quite so
+bright."
+
+"Not so bright by a good deal," the captain said. "There is a change in
+the colour of the sky--it is not so blue. The wind has fallen too, and I
+fancy by twelve o'clock there will be a calm. Of course we cannot be
+surprised if we do have a change. We have had a splendid spell of
+weather, and we are getting into stormy latitudes now."
+
+When the passengers went up after breakfast they found that the _Flying
+Scud_ was scarcely moving through the water. The sails hung idly against
+the masts, and the yards creaked as the vessel rose and fell slightly on
+an almost invisible swell.
+
+"This would be a good opportunity," the captain said cheerfully, "to get
+down our light spars; the snugger we are the better for rounding the
+Horn. Mr. Ryan, send all hands aloft, and send down all spars over the
+topmast."
+
+The crew swarmed up the rigging, and in two hours the _Flying Scud_ was
+stripped of the upper yards and lofty spars.
+
+"She looks very ugly," Marion Renshaw said. "Do you not think so, Mary?"
+
+"Hideous," Mary Mitford agreed.
+
+"She is in fighting trim now," Mr. Atherton said.
+
+"Yes, but who are we going to fight?" Marion asked.
+
+"We are going to have a skirmish with the weather, I fancy, Miss
+Renshaw. I don't say we are going to have a storm," he went on as the
+girls looked anxiously up at the sky, "but you can see for yourselves
+that there is a change since yesterday. The wind has dropped and the sky
+is dull and hazy, the sea looks sullen, the bright little waves we were
+accustomed to are all gone, and as you see by the motion of the vessel
+there is an underground swell, though we can scarcely notice it on the
+water."
+
+"Which way do you think the wind will come from, Mr. Atherton?" Mary
+Mitford asked.
+
+"I fancy it will come from the west, or perhaps north-west. Look at
+those light streaks of cloud high up in the air; they are travelling to
+the southeast."
+
+"Look how fast they are going," Mary Mitford said as she looked up, "and
+we have not a breath of wind here."
+
+"We shall have it soon," Mr. Atherton said. "You see that dark line on
+the water coming up from the west. I am glad to see it. It is very much
+better to have the wind freshen up gradually to a gale than to lie
+becalmed until it strikes you suddenly."
+
+The girls stood at the poop-rail watching the sailors engaged in putting
+lashings on to every movable object on deck. In ten minutes the dark
+line came up to them, and the _Flying Scud_ began to move through the
+water. The courses were brailed up and stowed. The wind rapidly
+increased in strength, and the captain presently requested the
+passengers to go below, or at any rate to give up their seats.
+
+"There is nothing like having the deck cleared," he said. "If it comes
+on to blow a bit and there is any movement, the chairs would be charging
+about from side to side, and will not only break themselves up, but
+perhaps break someone's leg."
+
+Four sailors folded up the chairs, piled them together, and passing
+cords over them lashed them to two ring-bolts.
+
+"Now, Mr. Ryan, we will get the topsails reefed at once. There is a
+heavy bank there to windward, and we had best get everything as snug as
+possible before that comes up to us."
+
+The dark bank of mist rose rapidly, and the sailors had but just
+reached the deck after closely reefing the topsails before it was close
+upon them.
+
+"Now, ladies, please go below," the captain said sharply. "There is rain
+as well as wind in the clouds; it will come down in bucketfuls when it
+does come."
+
+This had the desired effect of sending most of the male passengers down
+as well as the ladies. A few remained near the companion ready to make a
+dive below when the squall struck them. Suddenly the wind ceased and the
+topsails flapped against the masts. There was a confused roaring sound
+astern, and a broad white line came along at race-horse speed towards
+the vessel.
+
+"Get below, lads," Mr. Atherton said as he led the way, "or you will be
+drenched in a moment."
+
+They had but just reached the cabin when there was a deafening roar
+overhead, and almost at the same moment the vessel started as if struck
+by a heavy blow.
+
+"Rain and wind together!" Mr. Atherton shouted in reply to the chorus of
+questions from those below. "Now, all you have got to do is to make
+yourselves comfortable, for there will be no going up again for some
+time."
+
+For five minutes the tremendous downpour continued, and then ceased as
+suddenly as it commenced. The wind had dropped too; and the silence
+after the uproar was startling. It lasted but a few seconds; then the
+wind again struck the ship with even greater force than before,
+although, as she had not lost her way, the blow was less felt by those
+below. In five minutes the captain came below with his oil-skin coat and
+sou'-wester streaming with wet.
+
+"I have just looked down to tell you," he said cheerfully, "that
+everything is going on well. The first burst of these gales is always
+the critical point, and we can congratulate ourselves that we have got
+through it without losing a spar or sail--thanks to our having had
+sufficient warning to get all snug, and to the gale striking us
+gradually. I am afraid you won't have a very comfortable time of it for
+the next day or two; but there is nothing to be at all uneasy about. The
+gale is off the land, and we have sea-room enough for anything. Now we
+have got rid of half our cargo the ship is in her very best trim, and
+though we may get her decks washed a bit by and by, she will be none the
+worse for that."
+
+So saying he again went up on deck. For the next three days the gale
+blew with fury. There were no regular meals taken below, for the vessel
+rolled so tremendously that nothing would have remained on the plates
+and dishes; and the passengers were forced to content themselves with
+biscuit, with an occasional cup of coffee or basin of soup that the cook
+managed to warm up for them. The ladies for the most part kept their
+cabins, as did many of the male passengers, and the absence of regular
+meals was the less felt as the majority were suffering from
+sea-sickness. Wilfrid was occasionally ill, but managed to keep up, and
+from time to time went on deck for a few minutes, while Marion spent
+most of her time on a seat at the top of the companion, looking out on
+the sea.
+
+It was a magnificent sight. Tremendous waves were following the ship,
+each as it approached lifting her stern high in the air and driving her
+along at a speed that seemed terrific, then passing on and leaving her
+to sink down into the valley behind it. The air was thick with flying
+spray torn from the crest of the waves. At first it seemed as if each
+sea that came up behind the vessel would break over her stern and drive
+her head-foremost down; but as wave passed after wave without damage the
+sense of anxiety passed off, and Marion was able to enjoy the grandeur
+of the sea. Wilfrid, Mr. Atherton, and the Allens often came in to sit
+with her, and to take shelter for a time from the fury of the wind. But
+talking was almost impossible; the roar of the wind in the rigging, the
+noise of the waves as they struck the ship, and the confused sound of
+the battle of the elements being too great to allow a voice to be heard,
+except when raised almost to shouting point.
+
+But Marion had no inclination for talking. Snugly as Mr. Atherton had
+wedged her in with pillows and cushions, it was as much as she could do
+to retain her seat, as the vessel rolled till the lower yards almost
+touched the water, and she was too absorbed in the wild grandeur of the
+scene to want companionship.
+
+"The captain says the glass is beginning to rise," Mr. Atherton said as
+he met her the fourth morning of the gale; "and that he thinks the worst
+is over."
+
+"I shall be glad for the sake of the others," Marion replied, "for the
+sea to go down. Father and mother are both quite worn out; for it is
+almost impossible for them to sleep, as they might be thrown out of
+their berths if they did not hold on. For myself, I am in no hurry for
+the gale to be over, it is so magnificently grand. Don't you think so,
+Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"It is grand, lassie, no doubt," Mr. Atherton said; "but I have rather a
+weakness for dry clothes and comfortable meals--to say nothing of being
+able to walk or sit perpendicularly, and not being obliged constantly to
+hold on for bare life. This morning I feel that under happier
+circumstances I could enjoy a steak, an Irish stew, and a couple of
+eggs, but a biscuit and a cup of coffee are all I can hope for."
+
+"I believe you enjoy it as much as I do, Mr. Atherton," the girl said
+indignantly; "else why do you stay upon deck all the time in spite of
+the wind and spray?"
+
+"Well, you see, Miss Renshaw, you ladies have an objection to my smoking
+my pipe below; and besides, what with the groans and moans from the
+cabins, and the clatter of the swinging trays, and the noise of the
+waves, and one thing and another, there is little to tempt me to stay
+below. But really I shall be very glad when it is over. The ship has been
+doing splendidly; and as the wind has blown from the same quarter the
+whole time, the sea though very high is regular, and everything is going
+on well. Still a gale is a gale, and you can never answer for the
+vagaries of the wind. If it were to veer round to another quarter, for
+instance, you would in a few hours get a broken sea here that would
+astonish you, and would try all the qualities of the _Flying Scud_. Then
+again we have been running south with tremendous speed for the last
+three days, and if it were to go on for a few days longer we might find
+ourselves down among the ice. Therefore, I say, the sooner the gale is
+over the better I shall be pleased."
+
+Towards evening there was a sensible abatement in the force of the wind,
+and the following morning the gale had so far abated that the captain
+prepared to haul his course for the west.
+
+"We have been running south at the rate of fully three hundred miles a
+day," he said, "and are now very far down. The moment this warm wind
+drops and we get it from the south you will find that you will need
+every wrap you have to keep you warm. If the gale had lasted I had made
+up my mind to try to get her head to it, and to lie to. We are a great
+deal too close to the region of ice to be pleasant."
+
+The change in the course of the vessel was by no means appreciated by
+the passengers, for the motion was very much rougher and more unpleasant
+than that to which they had now become accustomed. However, by the
+following morning the wind had died away to a moderate breeze, and the
+sea had very sensibly abated. The topsails were shaken out of their
+reefs; and although the motion was still violent most of the passengers
+emerged from their cabins and came on deck to enjoy the sun, which was
+now streaming brightly through the broken clouds. The captain was in
+high glee; the ship had weathered the gale without the slightest damage.
+Not a rope had parted, not a sail been blown away, and the result fully
+justified the confidence he felt in his ship and her gear.
+
+"It is a comfort," he remarked, "to sail under liberal owners. Now, my
+people insist on having their ships as well found as possible, and if I
+condemn spars, sails, ropes, or stays, they are replaced without a
+question. And it is the cheapest policy in the long run. There is
+nothing so costly as stinginess on board a ship. The giving way of a
+stay may mean the loss of the mast and all its gear, and that may mean
+the loss of a ship. The blowing away of a sail at a critical moment may
+mean certain disaster; and yet there are many owners who grudge a fathom
+of new rope or a bolt of canvas, and who will risk the safety of their
+vessels for the petty economy of a few pounds."
+
+The next day the wind had dropped entirely. The topgallant masts were
+sent up with their yards and sails, and by dinner-time the _Flying Scud_
+looked more like herself. As soon as the wind lulled all on board were
+conscious of a sudden fall of temperature. Bundles of wraps were undone
+and greatcoats and cloaks got out, and although the sun was still
+shining brightly the poop of the _Flying Scud_ soon presented a wintry
+appearance. There was no sitting about now. Even the ladies had
+abandoned their usual work, and by the sharp walking up and down on deck
+it was evident that even the warm wraps were insufficient in themselves,
+and that brisk exercise was necessary to keep up the circulation.
+
+"Well, what do you think of this, Mrs. Renshaw?" Mr. Atherton asked.
+
+"I like it," she said decidedly; "but it is certainly a wonderfully
+sudden change from summer to winter. My husband does not like it at all.
+We never agreed on the subject of temperature. He liked what I call a
+close study, while I enjoy a sharp walk well wrapped up on a winter's
+day."
+
+"I agree with you," Mr. Atherton said. "I can bear any amount of cold,
+but heat completely knocks me up. But then, you see, the cold never has
+a chance of penetrating to my bones."
+
+"Which course shall we take now, do you suppose? South of Cape Horn or
+through the Straits?"
+
+"It will depend upon the winds we meet with, I imagine," Mr. Atherton
+replied. "If the wind continues from the south, I should say the captain
+would keep well south of the Horn; but if it heads us from the west at
+all, we may have to go through the Straits, which, personally, I own
+that I should prefer. It has gone round nearly a point since I came on
+deck this morning. If it goes round a bit more we certainly shall not be
+able to lay our course round the Horn, for I do not think we are far to
+the south of it now."
+
+By evening the wind had hauled farther to the west, and the ship's head
+pointed more to the north than it had done in the morning. The
+passengers enjoyed the change, for the temperature had risen rapidly,
+and many of the warm wraps that had been got up were laid aside. At
+twelve o'clock the captain had taken observations, and found that the
+ship's position was nearly due south of the Falkland Isles.
+
+"We had a narrow squeak of it, Mr. Ryan," he said to the first-mate.
+"All the time we were running before that gale I had that group of
+islands on my mind."
+
+"So had I, sir," the mate replied. "I was praying all the time that the
+wind would keep a bit to the west of north, for I knew that when it
+began our position was, as near as may be, due north of them. I guessed
+what you were thinking of when you told the man at the wheel to edge
+away to the east as much as he dared, though that was mighty little."
+
+"By my reckoning," the captain said, "we could not have passed more than
+thirty miles to the east of them. We have made about eighty miles of
+westing since we got on our course, and we are now just on the longitude
+of the westermost point of the islands. They are about a hundred miles
+to the north of us."
+
+The wind continued from the same quarter, and on taking his observation
+on the following day the captain announced that if there were no change
+he reckoned upon just making the mouth of the Straits between Tierra del
+Fuego and the islands. On going on deck two mornings later land was seen
+on the port bow.
+
+"There is Cape Horn," the captain said; "that lofty peak covered with
+snow. The island nearest to us is Herschel Island. The large island not
+far from the Horn is Wollaston Island. As you see, there are several
+others. It is not the sort of place one would like to come down upon in
+a gale, and if I had had my choice I would rather have gone a hundred
+miles south of the Horn. But the wind would not allow us to lie that
+course, and after the gale we had the other day we have a right to
+reckon upon finer weather, and in light winds it might have taken us
+another two or three days beating round."
+
+"The wind is very light now," Mr. Renshaw remarked.
+
+"Yes, and I am afraid it will be lighter still presently," the captain
+said.
+
+The vessel made but slow way, and in the afternoon the wind dropped
+altogether. The _Flying Scud_ was now two or three miles from the coast
+of Tierra del Fuego, and the passengers examined the inhospitable-looking
+coast through their glasses. At one or two points light wreaths of smoke
+were seen curling up, telling of encampments of the natives.
+
+"I think, Mr. Ryan," the captain said, "I will take her in and anchor in
+one of the bays This breath of air might be enough to move her through
+the water if she were going free, but it is nearly dead ahead of us now.
+I do not like the idea of drifting all night along this coast. Besides,
+we may be able to get some fish from the natives, which will be a change
+for the passengers."
+
+The vessel's head was turned towards the shore, and now that the light
+air was well on the beam it sufficed to enable the vessel to steal
+through the water at the rate of about a knot an hour. At about four
+o'clock the anchor was dropped in a bay at a distance of half a mile
+from land, the sails were furled, and the passengers watched the shores
+in hopes that some native craft might make its appearance; but there was
+no sign of life.
+
+"Either the natives have no fish to sell, or rather exchange," the
+captain said, "for, of course, money is of no use to them, or they are
+afraid of us. Maybe they have been massacring some shipwrecked crew, and
+believe we are a ship-of-war come down to punish them. At any rate, they
+seem determined not to show."
+
+The next morning the sea was as smooth as glass, and there was not a
+breath of air.
+
+"Would you let us have a boat, captain?" Mr. Atherton asked. "It will
+make a pleasant change, and perhaps some of the natives might come off
+and sell us fish, as they would not be afraid of us as they might be of
+the ship."
+
+"Yes, if you like to make up a party, Mr. Atherton, you can have a boat;
+but you must not land. The natives are very treacherous, and it would
+not be safe to set foot on shore. Mr. Ryan, will you get the cutter into
+the water after breakfast? You had better take with you two or three
+muskets. I do not think there is any fear of an attack, and besides you
+could out-row the native craft, still it is always as well to be
+prepared."
+
+Mr. Atherton soon made up his party. Wilfrid and the two Allens were
+delighted at the offer, and Marion and the Miss Mitfords also petitioned
+to be allowed to go, although Mr. Atherton had not intended to take
+ladies with him. Two other young men named Hardy and Wilson were also
+invited to join, and this made up the complement that the cutter could
+carry in comfort. The crew consisted of six sailors at the oars, and Mr.
+Ryan himself took the helm.
+
+"You had better wrap up well," Mr. Atherton said to the girls, "for you
+will find it cold sitting in a boat. The thermometer must be down near
+freezing-point."
+
+Mr. Atherton was the last to take his seat, and he brought with him his
+rifle.
+
+"Why, what are you going to shoot, Mr. Atherton?" Marion asked.
+
+"I do not know that I am going to shoot anything," he replied; "but it
+is always well to be prepared. You see I have made preparations in other
+ways," he added as the steward handed him down a large basket, which he
+placed in the stern-sheets.
+
+"But we are only going for an hour or two, Mr. Atherton," Wilfrid
+remarked. "We cannot want anything to eat when we have only just
+finished breakfast."
+
+"I do not think it at all likely we shall want to open the hamper,
+Wilfrid; but you see it is always best to be prepared. The weather looks
+perfectly settled, but, like the natives of these parts, it is
+treacherous. As I proposed this expedition I feel a sort of
+responsibility, and have therefore, you see, taken precautions against
+every contingency."
+
+"I do not think there is any chance of a change," Mr. Ryan said. "It
+looks as if the calm might last for a week. Still, one can never be
+wrong in preparing for the worst. Besides, this cold weather gives one a
+wonderful appetite, and a drop of the cratur never comes amiss."
+
+By this time the boat was fairly away from the ship, and the sailors,
+who like the passengers regarded the expedition as a pleasant change,
+stretched out to their oars. The mate steered for the headland to the
+west, and after passing it kept the boat at a distance of a few hundred
+yards from the shore.
+
+"Is there any current here, Mr. Ryan?" Wilfrid asked as he watched the
+rocks and low stunted trees.
+
+"Very little," the mate replied. "Sometimes it runs very strongly here,
+but at present it is not much to speak of. I do not think it was running
+more than a quarter of a mile an hour past the ship, but no doubt there
+is a good deal more farther out."
+
+To the disappointment of those on board there were no signs of natives.
+
+"It will be very tiresome if they do not come out," Marion said. "I want
+to see a real cannibal."
+
+"I do not so much care about the cannibals, Miss Renshaw, but I want to
+see their fish. I have not tasted a really decent fish since I left
+England; but in these cold waters they ought to be as good as they are
+at home. I believe the natives catch them by spearing them by
+torch-light, and in that case they ought to be good-sized fellows." The
+men after the first start had dropped into a long, steady stroke, and as
+the boat glided along past bay and headland no one paid any attention to
+time, until the mate, looking at his watch, said:
+
+"Faith, we have been gone an hour and a half; I clean forgot all about
+time. I think we had better be turning. It will be dinner-time before we
+reach the ship as it is." The boat's head was turned. "I think," the
+mate went on, "we may as well steer from headland to headland, instead
+of keeping round the bays. It will save a good bit of distance, and the
+natives evidently do not mean to show themselves."
+
+"They are very provoking," Miss Mitford said. "I can see smoke among the
+trees over there, and I have no doubt that they are watching us although
+we cannot see them."
+
+"You ought to have waved your handkerchief as we came along, Miss
+Mitford," James Allen remarked; "or to have stood up and shown
+yourselves. They would no doubt have come off then and offered presents
+in token of admiration."
+
+The girls laughed. "I do not suppose they would appreciate our charms,"
+Miss Mitford said. "They are not in their line, you see."
+
+"That they certainly are not, Miss Mitford," the mate laughed. "I saw
+some of them the last time I came through here, and hideous-looking
+creatures they are, and wear no clothes to speak of."
+
+So laughing and chatting with their eyes fixed on the shore the party
+never looked seaward, until a sudden exclamation from the mate called
+their attention to that direction.
+
+"Be Jabers!" he exclaimed, "here is a sea-fog rolling down on us from
+the south!"
+
+They looked and saw what seemed like a wall of white smoke rolling along
+the water towards them. At this moment the boat was about half-way
+between two headlands, which were a mile and a half apart, and the shore
+abreast of it was three-quarters of a mile distant. The sun was shining
+brightly upon the rolling mist, and the girls uttered an exclamation of
+admiration.
+
+"How fast it comes!" Marion said. "Why, it will be here directly!"
+
+The mate put the tiller a-starboard. "Row, men!" he said in a sharp
+voice; for they had for a moment ceased to pull.
+
+"Have you a compass?" Mr. Atherton asked in low tones.
+
+The mate shook his head. "I am no better than an idiot to have come
+without one," he said. "But who could have dreamt we should want it?"
+
+A minute later a light wreath of mist crossed the boat, and almost
+immediately the great fog-bank rolled over it. An exclamation broke
+from several of those on board. So sudden was the change of temperature
+that it seemed as if an icy hand had been laid upon them.
+
+"It is fortunate that we are not far from shore," Mr. Atherton said to
+the mate. "There is nothing for it but to coast along close in."
+
+"That is the only thing to do," Mr. Ryan replied. "But it will be an
+awkward business; for, as we noticed when we came along, the shore is in
+many places studded with rocks. However, we must risk that, and by going
+on slowly and carefully we may get off with slight damage even if we hit
+one. It is not as if the water was rough."
+
+The fog was so thick that they could scarcely see the ends of the
+oar-blades.
+
+"How are we to find the ship?" Marion asked.
+
+"There will be no difficulty about that, Miss Renshaw. They will be sure
+to be firing guns as signals for us. There!" he broke off as the boom of
+a cannon came across the water. "Besides, with the land on our right
+hand and this icy breeze from the south, we cannot go far out of our
+way."
+
+"Row easy, men," the mate commanded. "We cannot be far from shore now,
+and we must begin to look out sharp for rocks. Row light and aisy, and
+do not make more noise with your oars than you can help. The natives may
+be listening for us; and we do not want a shower of spears in the boat.
+Mr. Allen, will you go forward into the bows, and keep a sharp look-out
+for rocks?"
+
+James Allen went forward, and two or three minutes later cried, "Easy
+all! Hold her up!" Quickly as the order was obeyed the boat's stem
+grated on the shore before her way was lost.
+
+"Back her off, lads!" the mate cried. As the boat glided off into deep
+water again there was a yell from the shore, and a dozen spears struck
+the water round her. Fortunately none of them struck her, for she was
+invisible to the natives, who had been guided to the spot by the sound
+of the oars.
+
+"Not an encouraging reception," Mr. Atherton remarked quietly. "Well,
+ladies, you have not seen the cannibals as yet, but you have heard them.
+I think the best plan, Mr. Ryan, will be to tear up one of these rugs
+and muffle the oars."
+
+"I think we may as well do so," the mate replied "However, their sharp
+ears are sure to hear us if we are close inshore, and we dare not go far
+out or we might lose our bearings altogether."
+
+"I do not think we can do that. In the first place, you see, there is
+the breeze that brought down the fog to guide us, and in the second the
+guns of the ship. We cannot go far wrong with them; and I should say
+that when we once get out as far as we believe the headland to lie, the
+best thing will be to steer direct for the ship. The danger in that way
+would certainly be far less than it is from rocks and savages if we keep
+near the shore."
+
+"I think you are right. We will row straight out against the wind for a
+quarter of an hour, that will take us clear of the headland, and we will
+then shape our course direct for the guns."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+PUTTING IN THE REFIT.
+
+
+The boat rowed steadily in the course that was believed would take them
+straight out to sea, the mate listening attentively for the sound of the
+distant guns. The reports came up every two or three minutes, their
+sound muffled by the fog. "Sure it's mighty difficult to tell where the
+sound comes from, but I think it is well over there on our beam. Do not
+you think so?" the mate asked Mr. Atherton.
+
+"I think so; yes, I feel sure that we are rowing nearly due south. Even
+without the sound of the guns I should feel sure that we cannot at
+present be far out of that course. I noticed that as we came along you
+hardly had to use any helm, and that the strength on both sides was very
+evenly balanced. So that starting out as we did from the shore, we must
+be travelling pretty straight. Of course in the long run we should be
+sure to sweep round one way or the other and lose our bearings
+altogether were it not for the guns. Wilfrid, we will appoint you
+time-keeper."
+
+"What am I to keep time of, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"You are to keep time of the guns. I think they are firing about every
+three minutes, but you had better time the first two or three. If you
+find them three minutes apart, it will be your duty a quarter of a
+minute before the gun is due to say in a loud voice 'Stop,' then all
+conversation is to cease till we hear the report. Unless we are all
+silent and listening, it is very difficult to judge the exact
+direction from which the sound comes, and it is important to keep as
+straight a line as we can. There is the gun now, begin to count."
+
+[Illustration: A DOZEN SPEARS STRUCK THE WATER ROUND HER
+
+_Page 103_]
+
+"I think we can turn our head in that direction now," the mate said. "It
+is just twenty minutes since we left the shore, and we ought to be fully
+a mile out beyond the headland."
+
+"I quite agree with you. We have certainly a clear course now to the
+ship if we do not make any blunder in keeping it."
+
+The mate put the tiller a-starboard.
+
+"I wonder how long I am to keep it over?" he said. "It is a queer
+sensation steering without having an idea which way you are going."
+
+"The next gun will tell us whether we have gone too far round or not far
+enough," Mr. Atherton observed.
+
+"Well, we will try that," the mate said after a short pause. "I should
+think we ought to have made half a turn now."
+
+"Stop!" Wilfrid exclaimed a minute later. "Easy rowing, lads, and listen
+for the gun."
+
+The mate ordered silence in the boat. Half a minute later the report of
+the gun was again heard. There was a general exclamation of surprise,
+for instead of coming, as they expected, from a point somewhere ahead,
+it seemed to them all that the sound was almost astern of them.
+
+"Now, who would have thought that?" the mate said. "I had no idea she
+had gone round so far. Well, we must try again, and go to work more
+gently this time. Row on, men!"
+
+The tiller was put slightly a-port, and the boat continued her way. The
+talk that had gone on among the passengers was now hushed. Mr. Atherton
+had been chatting gaily with the girls from the time the fog came on,
+and except at the moment when they went ashore and were attacked by the
+natives, no uneasiness had been felt, for the sound of the guns had
+seemed to all an assurance that there could be no difficulty in
+rejoining the ship. The discovery that for a moment they had been
+actually going away from the ship had, for the first time since they
+rowed away from the shore, caused a feeling of real uneasiness, and when
+Wilfrid again gave notice that the report would soon be heard, all
+listened intently, and there was a general exclamation of satisfaction
+when the sound was heard nearly ahead.
+
+"We have got it now," the mate said. "Row on, lads; a long steady stroke
+and we shall be in before dinner is cold yet."
+
+The conversation now recommenced.
+
+"Is it any use my stopping here any longer?" Jim Allen cried from the
+bow; "because if not I will come aft to you. It is a good deal warmer
+sitting together than it is out here by myself."
+
+"Yes, you may as well come aft," the mate replied. "As long as we keep
+the guns ahead we know that we are clear of rocks. It certainly has come
+on bitterly cold." There was a general chorus of assent.
+
+"I should think it would be a good thing, Ryan, to get the sail aft and
+unlash it from the gaff and put it over our legs, it will make a lot of
+difference in the warmth."
+
+"I think that that is a very good idea," the mate assented. "Lay in your
+oar for a minute, Johnson, and get that sail aft."
+
+The sail was passed aft, unlashed from the yard, and spread out, adding
+considerably to the comfort of all those sitting astern; and now that
+the ship's guns were booming ahead, and they had become accustomed to
+the thick curtain of cloud hanging round them, the feeling of uneasiness
+that the girls had felt was entirely dissipated, and Mr. Atherton had no
+longer any occasion to use his best efforts to keep up their spirits.
+All laughed and chatted over their adventure, which, as they said, far
+exceeded in interest anything they had been promised when they started
+from the ship. The only drawback, as they all agreed, was the cold,
+which was indeed really severe.
+
+"We do not seem to come up to the guns as we ought to," Mr. Atherton
+said to the mate after the boat had been rowing for some time.
+
+"That is just what I was thinking," Mr. Ryan replied. "I fancy we must
+have got a strong current out here against us."
+
+"I expect we have. Ryan, I tell you what. The men have been rowing for
+some hours now since they left the ship, I think it would be a good
+thing if our youngsters were to relieve some of them for a spell. What
+do you say, lads?"
+
+Wilfrid, the Allens, Hardy, and Wilson all exclaimed that they should be
+delighted to take a turn, as it would warm their blood. "We shall be
+able to give them all a spell," Mr. Atherton said, "for there are just
+six of us."
+
+"I am certainly not going to let you pull, and you scarcely out of the
+doctor's hand," the mate said bluntly. "Why, you must be mad to think of
+such a thing! Here, do you take the tiller and I will row the
+stroke-oar. Easy all, lads; put on your jackets. Four of you come aft,
+and the other two go into the bows."
+
+"I wish we could row," Marion said regretfully, as the new crew bent to
+their oars. "I have done a lot of rowing at home, Mr. Atherton, and they
+say I row very fairly."
+
+"I am afraid you would not be of much assistance here, young lady," Mr.
+Atherton said. "It's one thing to work a light well-balanced oar such as
+you use in a gig up the river, but it is a very different one to tug
+away at one of these heavy oars in a sea-going boat like this with ten
+sitters in her. We shall want all our strength to get back, you may be
+sure. There must be a strong current against us, and there is little
+chance of our being back, as we hoped, by dinner-time."
+
+After the men had had half an hour's rest Mr. Ryan told them to take
+their seats and double bank the oars.
+
+"We shall travel all the faster," he said to Mr. Atherton, "and now that
+they have got their wind again it is far better that they should be
+rowing than sitting still. The guns are a good deal nearer now. I do not
+think that the ship can be more than a mile or a mile and a half away."
+
+"I do not suppose she is," Mr. Atherton replied. "I think I will fire
+off my rifle two or three times. They ought to be able to hear it now,
+and it will relieve their minds."
+
+He discharged his rifle four or five times, and they fancied that they
+heard shots in return.
+
+"Hullo!" Mr. Atherton exclaimed suddenly. "Easy all! Hold her up hard
+all!" Although the order was entirely unexpected it was given so sharply
+that it was instantly obeyed, and the boat was brought to a stand-still
+before she had advanced another length. Then the rowers looked round to
+see what had been the occasion of the sudden order. In front of them,
+scarce ten feet away, towered up a dark mass of rock. They could only
+see it ahead of the boat, and how high it was or how far it extended on
+either side they knew not.
+
+"Why, what is this?" the mate said in astonishment. "We did not notice
+any islands as we came along. It has been a narrow escape, for at the
+rate at which we were going through the water we should have stove in
+our bow had we run on it."
+
+"We have had a narrower escape than we deserve," Mr. Atherton said. "I
+cannot think how we can have been so foolish."
+
+"What do you mean?" the mate asked.
+
+"Why we have been steering straight for the guns, have we not?"
+
+"Of course we have."
+
+"Well, we ought not to have done so. If the ship had been lying well out
+from the land it would have been all right; but she is lying in a deep
+bay, and of course a straight course to her from the point we started
+from would take us just where we are, that is ashore, on the other side
+of the headland."
+
+"Of course it would. We ought to have kept well to seaward of the guns
+till they bore right on our beam, and then headed in to her. Well,
+fortunately no harm has been done, but we have had a mighty narrow
+escape. If the fog had been as thick as it was when it first came down
+upon us we should have gone right into it before we saw it."
+
+The boat was turned and rowed out to sea for some distance, then they
+again headed her in the direction in which they wished to go, but
+keeping the guns well in shore of them until they judged by the sound
+that they were nearly opposite to her, then they rowed straight towards
+her. The sound of their oars was heard, and a loud hail informed them of
+the exact position of the ship, and two or three minutes later a dark
+image loomed up in front of the boat.
+
+"All well, Mr. Ryan?" the captain shouted.
+
+"All well, sir."
+
+"You have given us a great fright," the captain went on. "We expected
+you back at least two hours ago, thinking of course you would have
+returned when the fog set in, even if you had not done so before."
+
+"We had turned, sir, before the fog rolled in; but what with losing our
+way, and the difficulty of keeping our course in the fog, and the fact
+that there is, we think, a strong current that was running against us
+further out, we have been a long time coming back. So, you see, we have
+double banked all the oars."
+
+By this time they were lying by the gangway. It was found that the girls
+in spite of their wraps were so stiff with the cold that they had to be
+assisted up the gangway to the deck. Exercise warmed the blood of the
+rest, and they were soon on deck. Mr. Atherton, who alone of the men
+had not been rowing, had some little difficulty in getting up, although,
+as he said, he had no more right to feel cold than a walrus, protected
+as he was by nature.
+
+There had been much anxiety on board until the shots fired by Mr.
+Atherton were heard. The captain had ordered plenty of hot soup to be
+got ready, and the girls soon felt in a comfortable glow. Mr. Atherton
+gave a comical account of their adventures, but he did not conceal the
+fact that at one time their position had been really a perilous one, and
+that if they had not been pretty vigilant they might have fallen into
+the hands of the natives.
+
+"Well, all is well that ends well," Mr. Renshaw said, "but I think we
+will have no more boat excursions as long as we are in the neighbourhood
+of cannibals. Of course no one could have foreseen the fog coming on so
+suddenly, but you have evidently all had a narrow escape."
+
+Those who had taken part in the adventure, however, were highly pleased
+with their share in it, and agreed that although perhaps at the time it
+was unpleasant it was very exciting, and was an incident that they
+should never forget all their lives.
+
+The fog continued for three days, at the end of which time an easterly
+wind set in and the air cleared, and the _Flying Scud_ weighed her
+anchor and proceeded on her voyage. Ten days later a gale set in from
+the south. The cold was intense, and the spray as it flew from her bows
+cased her fore-rigging and deck with ice. The wind increased hourly in
+fury, and the captain decided to run before it. "We have plenty of
+sea-room," he said, "and shall get out of this bitter cold as we get
+further north. It will not last long, I daresay."
+
+Day after day, however, the gale continued, seeming to increase rather
+than diminish in force. On the morning of the sixth day after it had
+begun the passengers heard a tremendous crash on deck. Wilfrid ran up
+the companion and looked out, and reported that the mainmast and the
+fore-top-mast had gone overboard. Fortunately the gust that had done this
+damage proved to be the climax of the gale; by nightfall its force had
+sensibly abated, and two days later it fell to a calm, and all hands set
+to work to repair damages.
+
+"I have no spar that will be of any use for a mainmast," the captain
+said. "We must content ourselves with getting up a fore-top-mast and
+then under what sail we can set upon that and the mizzen make for one of
+the islands and try to get a good-sized spar for the mainmast. I reckon
+that we are not more than two hundred and fifty miles from the Austral
+Group. We have been blown nearly twenty degrees north."
+
+Three days later land was seen ahead, and this the captain, after taking
+an observation, declared to be Malayta, one of the largest islands of
+the group.
+
+"I would rather have gone on under this reduced sail," he said to Mr.
+Atherton, in whom he had great confidence, "if we had been sure of fine
+weather; but that we cannot reckon upon at this time of year, and I
+should not like to be caught in another gale in this crippled state so
+near the islands. So of the two evils I consider it the least to go in
+and try and get a spar that will do for our purpose."
+
+"What is the evil of going in?" Mr. Atherton asked.
+
+"The natives," the captain replied shortly. "They are a treacherous lot
+in all these islands; but the Australs bear a particularly bad
+reputation, and we shall have to be very careful in our dealings with
+them."
+
+"Well, as we are forewarned they are not likely to take us by surprise,
+captain; and as with the crew and passengers we can muster a pretty
+strong force, we ought to be able to beat off any open attack."
+
+"Yes, I think we could do that," the captain agreed. "If I did not think
+so I would not put in, but would take the chance of our making our way,
+crippled as we are, to New Zealand. The thing we shall have to guard
+against is a sudden and treacherous onslaught; the crews of many ships
+have been massacred owing to carelessness and over-confidence. However,
+we will not be caught napping, and I therefore hope to get off
+unscathed."
+
+As they neared the land the passengers were delighted with the aspect of
+the shore. Groves of trees came down to the very edge of the water; in
+the interior the land was high, but was covered to the summit of the
+hills with foliage. As they approached, and the captain gave orders to
+prepare for anchoring, they could see a number of natives gathered on
+the narrow strip of sands close to the water. They were waving boughs of
+trees in token of friendship, and were, as far as could be seen by the
+aid of a telescope, unarmed.
+
+"They look friendly, mother," Marion said after watching them through
+the glass. "Won't it be nice to land and take a walk among those
+feathery-looking trees. There will be no fear of fogs or cold here, the
+temperature is quite perfect."
+
+"You will not land, I can assure you, young lady," the captain, who was
+passing by and overheard her, said. "Those fellows look friendly enough,
+I agree, but there are no more treacherous rascals among the islanders
+of the Pacific. I shall give them as wide a berth as I can, and get them
+if possible to cut a spar and tow it out to us, instead of sending a
+party on shore to fetch it. No one will leave this ship with my
+permission, unless it be a boat's party armed to the teeth to fetch
+water. These fellows are as treacherous as the natives of Tierra del
+Fuego, and vastly more warlike and dangerous."
+
+"Are they cannibals, captain?" Mrs. Renshaw asked.
+
+"That I cannot tell you for certain, Mrs. Renshaw. They are thieves and
+murderers, but whether they eat human flesh is more than I can tell. It
+does not concern me greatly whether if they kill me they eat me
+afterwards or not; but I do not mean to give them the chance of killing
+me or any of us, I can assure you."
+
+"After the character you have given me of them I have no longer the
+slightest inclination to land, captain."
+
+As soon as the vessel came to an anchor a number of canoes put out,
+laden with yams, cocoa-nuts, and other vegetables and fruit for
+exchange. Had they been allowed they would have come alongside and
+climbed up to the deck, but the captain would not permit them to come
+within thirty or forty yards. Although there was no one on board who
+could speak their language, his emphatic gestures were understood by
+the natives, and were sufficient to show them that he was not to be
+trifled with. Two boats only were allowed to approach at a time, and a
+guard of six sailors with muskets were placed on deck with orders to
+prevent anyone coming up, and to cover those who descended the gangway.
+The younger passengers thought that the captain was unnecessarily timid;
+but ready as he was to oblige them on ordinary occasions, they saw that
+this time it would be no use to try to change his determination that
+none should go on shore. Going down the gangway they bargained with the
+natives, giving little articles in exchange for fruit.
+
+Mr. Atherton was evidently of the captain's opinion as to the necessity
+for prudence, and had stationed himself with his rifle near the gangway.
+
+"They look quite peaceful and cheerful," Marion Renshaw said to him. "Do
+you think there is really any use in all these precautions, Mr.
+Atherton?"
+
+"I do indeed, Miss Renshaw. I do not think one can be too careful when
+dealing with people who are notoriously so treacherous."
+
+"Are you a good shot with a rifle, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"Yes; although I say it myself, I am an exceptionally good shot. I have
+practised a great deal with the rifle, and have, I suppose, a natural
+aptitude for it; for when I fire I am morally certain of hitting my
+mark, though I am hardly conscious of taking aim."
+
+When the contents of a few boats had been taken on board the captain
+made signs that he required no more, and the natives, with looks of
+evident discontent, paddled back to the shore.
+
+"We shall have some chiefs off in the morning," the captain said.
+"To-day they have kept in the background, but seeing that we are wary
+and on our guard they will probably come off to-morrow to view matters
+for themselves. I shall let them perceive that I am well prepared, and
+it may be when they see this they will be inclined to do a little honest
+trading, and to bring off a strong spar with which we can at anyrate
+make a shift for our mainmast. We will keep watch and watch as if we
+were at sea. It is as likely as not some of their canoes may be coming
+out in the night to see if we are to be caught napping."
+
+"It is horrid," Kate Mitford said, as she with her sister, Marion, and
+several of the younger passengers stood together that evening on the
+poop looking towards the shore. The young moon was sinking in the west,
+the stars shone with great brilliancy, and the water was as smooth as
+glass. The outline of the palms could be made out against the sky, and
+in several places the light of fires could be perceived, and the
+stillness of the evening was broken by the hum of distant voices. "It is
+really a shame that we cannot go ashore. I am sure the savages looked
+civil and friendly, and it would be delightful to wander about in such a
+wood as that."
+
+Two or three voices were raised in assent.
+
+"Have you heard the little story of the spider and the fly, Miss Kate?"
+Mr. Atherton said, moving across from the other side of the deck, where
+he was smoking a cigar. "In that case, you know, it was the prettiest
+little bower that ever you did espy, and perhaps the fly admired it just
+as much as you admire that grove ashore. The result of a visit would be
+identical in both cases. Those on board other ships have been taken in
+by the peaceful appearance of the natives and the loveliness of the
+islands, and the result was fatal to them. Personally, I should feel
+much more comfortable if I saw those savages putting out in a body in
+their canoes to attack the ship than I do now while they are keeping up
+this pretence of friendliness. An open danger one can meet, but when you
+know that treachery is intended, but have no idea what form it will take
+or when the mask of friendship will be thrown off, it is trying to the
+nerves. Fortunately we know their character, and may hope to be ready
+when the danger comes. Still the waiting is trying."
+
+"And you really feel that, Mr. Atherton?" Marion Renshaw asked.
+
+"I do indeed, Miss Renshaw. We may get away without trouble; but if so,
+it will be solely because the natives see that we are prepared for them
+and are not to be taken by surprise. Seeing our crippled state, my own
+opinion is, that the natives will not let us go off without making at
+least one attempt to surprise us."
+
+Mr. Atherton spoke strongly, for he thought that it was possible that
+some of the youngsters might, unless thoroughly roused to a sense of
+danger, do something foolish and rash. His words had the effect desired.
+His share in the affair at Rio had caused him to be regarded with
+respect and admiration by the young men on board, and they felt that if
+in his opinion the danger was grave it was not for them to doubt its
+reality. A vigilant watch was kept all night, and loaded muskets were
+served out to the watch on deck. The guns had been loaded before they
+anchored, and the spare muskets were placed so as to be handy for the
+watch below should they be suddenly called up. After the moon went down
+a light mist rose on the surface of the sea. Several times during the
+night faint sounds were heard near the ship, but immediately the officer
+of the watch challenged, silence reigned for a considerable time.
+
+"How has the night passed, Ryan?" Mr. Atherton asked the first officer
+as soon as he came on deck, just as daylight was breaking.
+
+"There have been some of them near us all night," Mr. Ryan replied. "I
+do not think they were in force, but they wanted to see whether we kept
+a sharp watch; and I think we have satisfied them as to that, for
+everytime the slightest noise was heard we hailed at once. I should like
+to have sent a musket-ball in the direction of the sound, but as we must
+get a spar, if possible, and shall be all the better for a score or two
+casks of fresh water, it won't do to begin to quarrel with them. Once we
+get what we want on board the beggars may attack us as soon as they
+like. It would do them a world of good to get handsomely thrashed, and
+to be taught that vessels are not to be plundered with impunity."
+
+"As you say, it might do them good, but I hope there will be no trouble.
+I have no doubt whatever that we should beat them off, but we might lose
+some lives in doing it; besides, we have ladies on board."
+
+"I hope so too; and, prepared as we are, I should feel quite safe if it
+was not for that mast being gone. They know that we are comparative
+cripples, and no doubt looked upon us as lawful booty when they saw us
+making in; and I do not think they will let themselves be balked of
+their prey without an effort."
+
+"That is just my view of the matter, and I mean to keep a sharp look-out
+while we are here. You will all have your hands full, and I will get two
+or three of the young fellows to join with me in keeping a sharp watch
+over their doings."
+
+"That is a good plan," the mate agreed. "There will, as you say, be
+plenty for us to do, and it worries one to have to attend to work and to
+keep one's eyes at the back of one's head at the same time. Of course we
+shall always have a watch set whatever we are doing, still I have more
+faith in your look-out than in that of half a dozen fo'castle hands."
+
+When the two Allens and Wilfrid came on deck Mr. Atherton drew them
+aside. "Look here, lads," he began. "You heard what I said last night. I
+meant it, and I am sure I was not wrong, for there have been canoes
+hovering about us all night. Now, in a short time the officers and crew
+will be seeing about getting water on board, and if the natives bring
+out a spar that will do as a jury mainmast there will be the work of
+trimming it, getting it into its place, and rigging it. My own opinion
+is, that now the natives see we are suspicious and on the watch they
+will for some time make a show of being extremely friendly so as to
+throw us off our guard, and as the officers and sailors will be busy
+they may possibly relax their precautions a little. Now I propose that
+you and I shall constitute an amateur watch from sunrise to dark. After
+that the men's work will be done, and there will be no fear of their
+being taken by surprise. The real danger is, I think, in the daytime.
+Wilfrid and I will take the second-mate's watch, and do you two take the
+first-mate's--that is, if you agree to my proposal."
+
+The three young fellows at once expressed their willingness to do as he
+directed them.
+
+"During our respective watches," Mr. Atherton went on, "we must keep our
+attention directed solely to the natives. There must be no watching what
+is going on on board, no talking and laughing with the other passengers;
+we must consider ourselves as if on duty. One of us must take his place
+on the fo'castle, the other in the waist. The natives are sure to hang
+round the ship in their canoes watching what we are doing, and offering
+things for sale. It will be our duty to keep a vigilant eye upon them,
+to watch every movement, to give instant warning if their number is at
+any time larger than usual, and, in fact, to prevent the possibility of
+their closing suddenly in upon us and taking us by surprise. Remember,
+it is a case of absolute duty; I have volunteered to the first officer
+to undertake it, and he will, relying upon our vigilance, give his
+attention to his work."
+
+"Shall we be armed, Mr. Atherton?" James Allen asked.
+
+"Yes, James, I think that it will be as well to have our guns beside us
+while on duty. Of course there is no occasion to have them on our
+shoulders like sentries, but it will be well to have them always within
+reach of the hand in case of sudden danger. The report of a musket would
+give the alarm far quicker and more effectually than a shout would do,
+especially if men are at work on deck and making a noise. Well, as you
+agree, we will begin after breakfast."
+
+"How about meals, sir?" Tom Allen asked. "If they mean to make an attack
+I should think they would be likely to choose meal-time, when the
+passengers are all below and the deck will be comparatively deserted."
+
+"We must keep watch then also," Mr. Atherton said decidedly. "I will
+speak to Mr. Ryan and ask him to tell the steward that two of us will
+require something put on the table for them after the others have done.
+I do not think that he himself is likely to leave the deck when the
+captain is below, and the two of us who happen to be on duty can have
+our meals when he does. Of course whenever those on duty come down for
+this purpose the others will take their places until they return. We
+will change about each day. This is supposed to be your watch, Allen,
+from four to eight. Wilfrid and I will begin the work at that hour. You
+will relieve us at twelve, and we shall take the watch from four to
+eight. To-morrow we will take the early watch, and so on."
+
+"I will tell the Grimstones," Wilfrid, who had always gone for a daily
+chat with the men forward, said; "they will be glad to join us in the
+watch, and I should think the other men forward would do so too. I know
+they all find it very hard work to get through the day."
+
+The Grimstones at once agreed to keep watch, as did the other three men
+who occupied the fore cabin with them. Mr. Atherton got muskets and
+ammunition for them from Mr. Ryan, and the two Grimstones were
+appointed to his watch, the other men to that of the Allens.
+
+At seven bells most of the passengers came on deck to enjoy the fresh
+morning air for an hour before breakfast.
+
+"You are not going to enjoy the pleasure of Wilfrid's or my company at
+breakfast, Mrs. Renshaw," Mr. Atherton said, smiling, to that lady as
+she stood with the three girls round her on the poop.
+
+"Why not, Mr. Atherton?" she asked in surprise.
+
+"He and the Allens and myself are going to do amateur sentry work as
+long as we lie here, Mrs Renshaw. The crew will be all busy refitting
+the ship, and so I have volunteered to undertake, with their assistance,
+the duty of keeping a sharp eye on those tricky gentlemen ashore."
+
+"Are you in earnest, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"Quite in earnest that we are going to do so, Mrs. Renshaw. There may be
+no absolute occasion for it, but there is nothing like keeping on the
+safe side; and as we cannot go ashore, and one cannot talk continuously
+for fifteen or sixteen hours, we may just as well pass a portion of our
+time in playing at sentinels."
+
+"But when will you get breakfast?" Marion asked. "Shall I bring it up to
+you, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"No, thank you, Miss Renshaw. We have arranged to have it with Mr. Ryan
+afterwards. I am much obliged to you for your offer just the same. It is
+a very kind one, especially since you will, for once, particularly enjoy
+your breakfast, as you will have room for your elbows."
+
+"You are laughing at me again, Mr. Atherton. One would really think
+that you take me to be about ten years old."
+
+"I think a little teasing does you good, Miss Renshaw. It is one of the
+privileges of us old fellows to try to do good to our young friends; and
+girls of your age lord it so over their brothers and their brothers'
+friends, that it is good for them to be teased a little by their
+elders."
+
+"Would not you think, mother," Marion appealed, "that Mr. Atherton by
+his talk was somewhere about eighty and that I was quite a child?"
+
+"I agree with him that it is rather a good thing for girls of your age,
+Marion, to be snubbed a little occasionally; especially on a voyage like
+this, when there are several young fellows on board who have nothing
+better to do than to wait upon you and humour your whims."
+
+There was a general laugh. Before a fresh subject was started the
+breakfast bell rang and the passengers went below. Mr. Atherton fetched
+his rifle from his cabin, and Wilfrid was going to unpack his
+double-barrelled gun when his friend said: "I should not bother about
+that now, Wilfrid; take one of the ship's muskets. It will make just as
+much noise if you have to fire it, and you will not be alarming the
+passengers by bringing your gun backwards and forwards from your cabin.
+I am going to hang up my rifle when I come off guard in Ryan's cabin on
+deck, where it will be handy. You take the fo'castle, your two men can
+be in the waist, one on each side, and I will take the poop. Just at
+present our duty will be a nominal one, as the canoes have not put out,
+but I expect they will be here before long."
+
+Before breakfast was over, indeed, a large canoe was brought down from
+the woods and placed in the water, and a number of natives appeared on
+the shore. The first officer at once summoned the captain on deck.
+
+"Tell all the men to have their arms handy, Mr. Ryan," the captain said
+as he looked at the gathering on shore. "I do not suppose they mean to
+attack us in this open way, still we may as well be upon our guard.
+Order the men not to show their arms, but to go about their work as
+usual. We do not wish to appear afraid of them, or to take up a position
+of hostility. I hope the chiefs are coming off for a friendly palaver."
+
+In a few minutes the canoes put off from the shore. First came the great
+canoe, which was paddled by thirty men. In the bow and stern were
+hideous images. Four natives, evidently of superior rank, were seated
+near the stern, and in the bow stood a man beating his hands in time to
+the stroke of the paddles and singing a song, which was responded to by
+a deep exclamation from the rowers at every stroke. Another man stood by
+the side of the singer waving a green bough. Behind this great canoe
+followed a score of smaller ones.
+
+"We will receive them in state, Mr. Ryan. Evidently they intend to keep
+up an appearance of friendliness at present. We will meet them in the
+same spirit. Fasten the signal flags on to the halyards and run them up
+to the masthead, let half a dozen men with cutlasses take their place at
+the gangway as a sort of guard of honour, let the rest go on with their
+work but keep their arms handy for action."
+
+When the great canoe approached the vessel the men stopped paddling,
+and one of the chiefs standing up made an address to the captain, who
+was standing at the top of the gangway. Not a word that he said was
+understood, but the address seemed to be of a friendly nature, and the
+chief held up some cocoa-nuts and yams as if to show his desire to
+trade. When he had finished the captain took off his hat and also spoke,
+and by gestures invited the chiefs to come on board. By this time all
+the passengers had come on deck, and were watching the proceedings with
+great interest.
+
+"Do you think it safe to let them on board?" the first officer asked Mr.
+Atherton, who was intently watching the natives in the smaller canoes.
+
+"Quite safe," he replied. "So long as only a few of their followers come
+with them there is no fear of their attempting anything. While the
+chiefs are in our hands they act, as it were, as hostages for the good
+conduct of their people. So far their intentions are clearly peaceful.
+Whether that will last will depend upon whether they think there is a
+chance of success or not. At present all we have to do is to take
+advantage of it, and to get what we want on board."
+
+By this time the canoe was approaching the side of the ship. The four
+chiefs ascended the ladder, followed by four or five of lower rank who
+had been seated near them. As they reached the deck the principal chief
+turned round and shouted an order in a loud voice. Its effect was
+immediate. The canoe in which they had arrived at once paddled away to a
+short distance, while the smaller craft, which had before been drifting
+slowly towards the vessel, also retired and lay huddled behind the large
+canoe.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+A SAVAGE SURPRISE.
+
+
+The captain led the way on to the poop, the chiefs and the natives with
+them following, while the first officer with the six sailors with sabres
+kept in their rear. Once on the quarter-deck Mr. Ryan ranged three of
+the men by the bulwark on either side, telling them to sheath their
+cutlasses, but to be prepared for instant action in case of treachery.
+The chiefs preserved a stolid demeanour, scarce glancing at the
+passengers, who were gathered on the poop. At the captain's orders the
+steward brought up a number of cushions and placed them on the deck in a
+circle. The captain seated himself on one and motioned to the chiefs to
+follow his example, which they did without hesitation. Mr. Ryan now
+brought up a number of things as presents for the chiefs, and each was
+presented with a hand mirror, a roll of scarlet cloth, and some
+trinkets, as a small supply of these had been brought on board for trade
+with the natives in case of the necessity arising.
+
+The head chief was in addition presented with an axe, and rolls of
+coloured cotton strings of glass beads and some brass rings were given
+to the inferior chiefs. The natives appeared pleased with their
+presents. The captain then addressed them, and endeavoured to explain
+that he wanted a supply of water. An empty barrel was brought up and
+some water poured into this, and the captain then pointed to the shore,
+and by gestures intimated that he wished the barrels to be taken ashore
+and filled. The chiefs evidently understood the explanation, and nodded
+their assent. The captain then led them to the stump of the mainmast,
+pointed to the shore, and taking an axe imitated the action of chopping,
+and showed that he wanted them to fell a tree and bring it off to the
+vessel. The chief pointed to the boats hanging on the davits, placed the
+axe in the hands of one of the men, and clearly signified that the crew
+could go ashore and cut down a tree if they chose. The captain shook his
+head and placed the axe in the hands of one of the chiefs. Their leader,
+however, went up to the foremast, and by spreading out his arms
+signified that it was a great size, and then held out the small axe the
+captain had presented to him with an action of disdain.
+
+"The beggar means that with one axe they would never cut down a tree of
+that size," the first officer said.
+
+"That is all humbug, Ryan; they can bring down the biggest trees for the
+construction of their canoes. I believe they bring them down by fire.
+However, it is as well to humour them. Tell the carpenter to bring half
+a dozen axes."
+
+This was done, and the axes laid down on the deck. There was now a
+consultation between the natives. After a while they nodded, and then
+made signs that someone must go ashore with them to choose the tree.
+
+"What do you say, Ryan?" the captain asked. "It is of importance that we
+should get a stick that will suit us. The question is whether it will be
+safe to trust a man on shore with these scoundrels?"
+
+"I will go ashore if you like, captain," Mr. Ryan replied.
+
+"I do not like it, Ryan," the captain said. "You see, they would make
+mincemeat of an armed crew in no time."
+
+"I should not propose to take a crew, sir; they could afford no
+protection against a number of natives. I do not think the beggars would
+assault a single man. You see, there would be nothing to gain by it; and
+if they did it would put the ship on its guard, and their game at
+present is evidently to be friendly. I do not think there is any danger
+in the affair. If I did not go they might send off some stick that would
+be of no use at all to us, and as we came in on purpose to get a mast it
+is worth while risking something."
+
+"Well, Ryan," the captain said after a moment's deliberation, "I think
+perhaps you are right, and that one man would be safe with them. It is
+certainly of great importance for us to get the sort of stick we want,
+so as you are ready to volunteer I do not think myself justified in
+refusing your offer." The captain then put his hand on the chief
+officer's shoulder and intimated to the natives that he would accompany
+them on shore. The party then returned to the poop, and the steward
+brought up some tumblers and two or three bottles of rum. The chiefs'
+eyes glistened as the liquor was poured out, and each swallowed a half
+tumbler of the spirit with an air of the deepest satisfaction.
+
+"That is the present they like best," the captain said; "and I suppose I
+had better give them some for consumption on shore. At any rate it will
+keep them in a good temper until Ryan is back again." Accordingly two
+bottles of rum were presented to the leading chief, a bottle to the
+three next in rank, and two or three bottles among the others. The great
+canoe was hailed, the natives again took their places in it, accompanied
+by the first officer, and the boat then started for the shore. Some of
+the smaller craft now came alongside, and the process of barter was
+again commenced. Yams, bread-fruit, and other products of the island
+were obtained for the use of the ship in exchange for beads, empty
+bottles, and small mirrors, while the passengers succeeded in obtaining
+many curiously carved weapons, calabashes, woven cloths, and other
+mementoes of their visit. Only two or three of the canoes were allowed
+alongside at a time, and a vigilant look-out was maintained to see that
+the others did not approach the ship. The captain walked restlessly up
+and down the poop, constantly turning his glass upon the shore.
+
+An hour after the great canoe had reached it he exclaimed in a tone of
+intense satisfaction, "There is Ryan coming down to the beach. Thank
+heaven he is safe!" The first-mate was seen to take his place in a small
+canoe, which at once rowed off to the ship. The captain shook him
+heartily by the hand as he stepped on deck. "Thank heaven you have got
+back safely, Ryan! it has been a hazardous business, and I shall take
+care to let the owners know how you have risked your life by going
+ashore in their service. Well, how have you succeeded?"
+
+"I found a grand pine growing within thirty or forty yards of the water,
+about a quarter of a mile beyond that point to the left. As I expected,
+the natives had no idea of using the axes for such a purpose. When I
+left them a party were piling wood round the foot of the tree, and I
+have no doubt they will soon get it down in their own way. I suppose
+they will waste ten or twelve feet at the base, but that is of no
+consequence, for the tree is long enough and to spare to make us a
+fair-sized mainmast."
+
+"That is right; and as it is so close to the water we can send a boat to
+see how they are getting on. How about water?"
+
+"They showed me a spring about fifty yards from the beach, nearly facing
+us. There is plenty of water there, and it is perfectly fresh and sweet,
+for I tasted it. If they make any bother about bringing it off, a couple
+of boats with well-armed parties could fetch it without difficulty as
+the distance is so short."
+
+"That is capital, Ryan. I hope our difficulties are pretty well over,
+and that we shall get off without any trouble with these fellows."
+
+"I hope so, sir. They certainly seemed friendly enough with me on
+shore."
+
+In the evening Mr. Ryan, with a crew of six men, went in the captain's
+gig to see how the natives were getting on with the tree. The men had
+their muskets and cutlasses laid under the thwarts in readiness for
+action. The natives, however, appeared perfectly friendly. The crews of
+several of the canoes near which they passed shouted some sort of
+greeting, but paid no other attention to them. On rounding the point the
+first officer steered straight for the tree he had chosen. A light smoke
+was ascending from its foot, and half a dozen natives were gathered
+there. When close to the spot he ordered the men to turn the boat round
+and back her ashore.
+
+"I am going to land, lads," he said, "and see how they are getting on. I
+do not think that there is the least danger, but you had best keep in
+readiness to row off the instant I jump on board."
+
+Mr. Ryan then proceeded to the tree. He found that a circle of small
+fires had been built against it. These were fed with dry wood, and were
+slowly but steadily eating their way into the tree, and he saw that only
+two or three feet of the base would be injured by their action. He
+nodded approvingly to the natives, but muttered to himself: "It's a
+mighty slow way of bringing down a tree. It is not much above three feet
+and a half in diameter, even at the base, and a couple of men with axes
+would bring it down in an hour, while there is no saying how long they
+will be with these fires of theirs. However, I should say that they will
+get through it to-night or some time to-morrow. It is a fine stick, and
+runs up as straight as an arrow, and is thick enough for fifty feet for
+our purpose."
+
+He walked quietly back to the boat, took his seat, and was rowed back to
+the ship, where he reported that the natives were carrying out their
+promise, and that by the next day the tree would be down. On visiting
+the spot again on the following morning it was found that the tree had
+fallen.
+
+"The fellows know their business," Mr. Ryan said to the man who rowed
+the stroke-oar. "You see that they managed so that it should fall
+towards the water. Now, lads, you can take to the axes we have brought
+with us and chop it through at the point where we want it cut; it will
+save the trouble of getting off the upper branches, and render it much
+more handy for getting afloat."
+
+Leaving two of the men in the boat, Mr. Ryan and the other four leapt
+ashore, and were not long in cutting through the tree. Another half-hour
+sufficed to lop off all the branches below this point, and the trunk was
+then ready for launching. The natives stood round watching the work with
+exclamations of surprise at the speed with which the keen axes did their
+work. Mr. Ryan had brought with him from the ship a number of presents,
+and these he distributed among the party who had been engaged in felling
+the tree.
+
+"I do not know," he said to the captain when he returned, "whether they
+mean to get the stick in the water and bring it here, or whether they
+expect we shall do that part of the business ourselves."
+
+"I think we will wait until to-morrow morning, Mr. Ryan. If we hear
+nothing of them by then you had better take two boats--one with men to
+do the work, the other to lie just off and protect them while they do
+it."
+
+There was, however, no occasion for this, for early the next morning
+seven or eight canoes were seen coming round the point with much beating
+of tom-toms and sounding of conch horns.
+
+"Here comes the spar!" the captain exclaimed; "the worst of our
+difficulties is over, thank goodness!"
+
+"I would keep an eye open, Ryan, if I were you," Mr. Atherton said as
+the mate passed him to give orders for preparing to get the spar on
+deck. "There are a good many other canoes coming off from the shore,
+and they might take the opportunity for making a sudden attack."
+
+"Right you are," the mate said. "Let the starboard watch," he shouted,
+"keep their arms handy! Four men with muskets take their place at the
+top of the gangway, but do not show the arms unless you get orders to do
+so!"
+
+The trunk was towed alongside the ship. Mr. Atherton and the party who
+had placed themselves under his orders kept a vigilant watch on the
+canoes to see if the occupants were armed. There was a deal of talking
+and gesticulating going on among them, but no arms could be seen, and
+Mr. Atherton soon concluded that if treachery was intended the present
+was not the time at which it would be shown. The crew were all on deck,
+and the natives must have known their arms were close at hand, for each
+day a few of those who came to trade had been permitted to come on deck,
+partly to show confidence on the part of those on board, partly that the
+visitors might see the arms lying in readiness for use, and be able to
+report on shore that the ship was not to be taken by surprise.
+
+No sooner was the spar alongside than a couple of sailors lowered
+themselves down and passed ropes round it. These ropes were then passed
+through blocks and taken to the capstan. The bars were fitted and seized
+by a dozen men. The boatswain's whistle sounded, and starting their
+anchor song the men tramped round and round, the ropes tightened, and
+the heavy spar was parbuckled up on to the deck. No sooner was it got
+on board than the four chiefs who had before visited the ship came
+alongside. There was another talk, and they were presented with a
+considerable number of presents for themselves and followers as a reward
+for their service in sending off the spar. Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid did
+not approach the group of passengers round the chiefs, keeping their
+attention vigilantly upon the boats, from which the danger, if it
+existed, would come.
+
+The Allens, however, in accordance with Mr. Atherton's instructions,
+watched the natives closely, and noticed as they came on deck they cast
+quick and scrutinizing glances round them as if to see what were the
+chances of a surprise. Mr. Ryan, however, had, when he saw the great
+canoe approaching, placed ten men with muskets on guard, and the chiefs
+doubtless perceived that a surprise could not be effected. After a stay
+of about a quarter of an hour the chiefs departed with their presents,
+of which, by the care they took of it, it was evident that they
+considered a case of rum to be by far the most precious. No sooner was
+the trunk of the pine fairly on board than a gang of men provided with
+adzes began, under the direction of the carpenter, to prepare it. The
+bark was chipped off, the stumps of the branches shaved close, and they
+then began to chip it down to the required thickness from end to end.
+
+"It will make a fine spar," the captain said in a tone of great
+satisfaction, after he had examined it. "I think it will do for her
+permanent mast. If it will it will save us a lot of trouble when we get
+into Wellington."
+
+"I think it will be a little light, sir," Mr. Ryan said, "by the time we
+have got it perfectly smooth and even. Still, I have seen lighter spars
+in a ship of this size, and I certainly think we are most fortunate in
+getting such a stick. When do you think you will get it ready, Watson?"
+
+"I should say we shall have it nearly ready for getting into its place
+by to-morrow night, Mr. Ryan," the carpenter replied, "though we may not
+quite finish it until next day; for, you see, when it comes to getting
+it smoothed, I and my mate must do it by ourselves."
+
+"I should not be particular about smoothing it," the captain said, "but
+of course you must make it so that it will take the spare irons we have
+got for the topmast. We shall have plenty of time to put the finishing
+touches to it when we get to Wellington. I begin to think these natives
+are not so black as they are painted, Mr. Ryan."
+
+"Perhaps not, sir; but maybe if they had not seen that we were so ready
+for them there would be a different tale to tell."
+
+"That is so," the captain agreed. "There is no doubt that the best way
+of dealing with natives is never to give them a chance."
+
+The carpenter's gang continued steadily at their work, while the first
+officer got up the sheer-legs and hoisted the stump of the mainmast from
+its place. The butt of the new mainmast was cut to match this, and on
+the second day after it arrived alongside it was hoisted into its
+position. The whole of the stays and rigging of the mainmast had been
+cut away as soon as it went overboard; but there was plenty of spare
+rope on board, and before evening the new mast was firmly stayed in its
+place, and all was in readiness for hoisting the spar that was to serve
+as topmast.
+
+The natives had watched the proceedings with great interest. Quite a
+crowd of canoes gathered round the ship, and were greatly surprised at
+seeing the heavy spar raised by the sheers and dropped into its place;
+and they replied to the hearty cheers that rose from the crew and
+passengers when this was accomplished by wild yells and cries and the
+sounding of their horns.
+
+"I begin to think," the captain said to Mr. Atherton, "that the natives
+have got a worse name than they deserve. I do not mean, of course, that
+they have not perpetrated several atrocious massacres, but I expect
+these must have been the result of extreme carelessness on the part of
+those on ships, or perhaps of rough treatment, for some captains treat
+the natives of islands like these like dogs. As far as they could have
+told there was an excellent chance of attacking the ship to-day, though
+we know that we kept up a vigilant watch all the time, and yet nothing
+could have been more friendly than they were."
+
+"There is no doubt something in what you say, captain," Mr. Atherton
+agreed. "Many of the captains of the ships who trade among these islands
+are certainly rough fellows, who would think nothing of knocking a
+native down, and others again are so culpably careless as to offer
+almost an inducement to the natives to grasp what is to them untold
+wealth. Still, I think it is as well to be cautious."
+
+"Of course we shall be cautious," the captain replied; "but I really do
+not think that you and the others need bother yourselves to be always
+standing on sentry."
+
+"It is no trouble," Mr. Atherton said, "and I think we will keep it up
+until we are fairly under weigh."
+
+Mr. Atherton was not pleased at seeing that the captain the next day
+relaxed somewhat in the strictness of the rules he laid down, and the
+crew were allowed to trade freely with the natives.
+
+"We must be more vigilant than ever," he said to Wilfrid and the Allens.
+"The captain is so pleased at having got his mast on board that he is
+disposed to view the natives with friendly eyes, which, if they mean
+treachery, is just what they want. Finding that we were too much on the
+watch to be taken by surprise, they would naturally try to lull us with
+a sense of false security."
+
+In the afternoon the chief again came off and formally invited the
+captain to a feast on shore. He accepted the invitation, and went back
+with them, accompanied by three or four of the passengers who had
+scoffed at the idea of danger. After a stay of two or three hours they
+returned on board.
+
+"I think, Mr. Ryan," the captain said that evening, "you had better take
+a couple of boats in the morning and go ashore for water. We shall have
+everything ready for getting up our anchor after dinner. Of course your
+crew will be well armed and take every precaution, but I do not think
+that there is the slightest danger."
+
+"Very well, sir. You may be sure I will keep my weather-eye open."
+
+Mr. Atherton shook his head when in the morning he saw the boats being
+lowered, and heard from the first officer the orders he had received.
+
+"From what you say there is water enough to last us to Wellington if we
+are all put on somewhat shorter allowance, and that would be infinitely
+better than running the risk of your going ashore."
+
+"The water might last if all goes well," the mate said, "but if we were
+to get becalmed for some time, which is likely enough in these
+latitudes, we should be in an awkward fix. I shall keep a sharp look-out
+on shore, never fear. The distance to the spring is, as I told you, not
+above fifty yards, and I will keep half the men filling and the other
+half on guard. If they should mean mischief we will give it them hot."
+
+"How many men will you take?"
+
+"Sixteen--ten in the cutter and six in the gig."
+
+"That would only leave us ten on board," Mr. Atherton said. "If they
+attack you they will attack us too, that is a moral certainty. At any
+rate, I will hint to some of the passengers that they had better keep
+their arms in readiness while you are away."
+
+Mr. Atherton refused to go down to breakfast when the Allens came up to
+relieve him after finishing their meal.
+
+"We will have both watches on deck this morning," he said. "We shall be
+very short-handed while Ryan and his party are away. Unfortunately the
+captain is convinced there is not the slightest danger. He snubbed me
+this morning quite smartly when I said casually that I supposed that he
+would not let any of the natives on board while Ryan was away."
+
+As the rest of the passengers came up from breakfast, Mr. Atherton spoke
+to some of those with whom he had been most intimate on the voyage, and
+told them that he thought it would be just as well for them to bring
+their arms on deck and keep them close at hand until the watering party
+returned.
+
+"It is no great trouble," he said, "and it is just as well to be ready
+in case the natives mean mischief. I know that some of the youngsters
+consider me to be an alarmist, and I will give them free leave to laugh
+at me when we are once safely out at sea, but the stake is too heavy to
+admit of carelessness; there are not only our own lives but those of the
+ladies to be thought of."
+
+Three or four of the passengers followed this advice and brought their
+muskets or double-barrelled guns on deck. They were a good deal laughed
+at by the rest, who asked them if they had joined Atherton's army, as
+the little party who had kept watch were called. However, when the boats
+pushed off with the empty casks, and the passengers saw how large was
+the complement of the crew who had left them, three of the others
+strolled down to the cabin and got their guns. In half an hour the great
+canoe with the chiefs came off, and as it approached the ship Mr.
+Atherton told Wilfrid to go forward, and tell the five men there to come
+aft and be in readiness to mount to the poop the moment they saw any
+sign of trouble. "If there is a row," he said, "we have to hold the
+poop. There are only the two ladders to defend, and we can do that; but
+it would be useless to try to hold the whole of the ship."
+
+As the captain left the poop and went down into the waist to receive the
+chiefs, Mr. Atherton went up to where Mrs. Renshaw was sitting.
+
+"Will you take my advice, Mrs. Renshaw?"
+
+"Certainly I will," she said, smiling; "for I am sure it will be good,
+whatever it is."
+
+"Then, Mrs. Renshaw, I advise you at once to go below with your daughter
+and the Miss Mitfords. I do not say that we are going to have trouble,
+but if we are this is the time. Pray oblige me by doing as I ask."
+
+Mrs. Renshaw at once rose, called Marion and the other two girls, who
+were gaily chatting with a group of the passengers, and asked them to go
+below with her. Wilfrid and the two Allens were now on the poop, as Mr.
+Atherton had told them that they had better remain there instead of
+placing themselves at other points. The Grimstones and the three other
+passengers forward were gathered near the ladders.
+
+As usual the chiefs accompanied the captain on to the poop, followed by
+half a dozen of the minor chiefs; and Mr. Atherton noticed that several
+of the others, instead of sitting quietly in the canoe, slipped up after
+them on to the deck. The flotilla of small canoes, which had as usual
+put out in the train of the large one, was edging in towards the vessel.
+Mr. Atherton leant over the poop rail and spoke to the second officer,
+who was engaged in the waist with the men.
+
+"Mr. Rawlins, I do not quite like the look of things. I think that it
+would be as well if you were to gather as many of the hands as you can
+at the foot of the ladder here, without, of course, alarming the
+natives, as it may be only my fancy."
+
+The second-mate nodded, and at once told the men with him to knock off
+from their work. "Get hold of your cutlasses quietly," he said, "and
+gather near the foot of the starboard port ladder." Then going to the
+gangway he stopped a native who was just climbing up from the canoe, and
+motioned to them that no more were to come on board.
+
+The talk with the chiefs was a short one. The stewards brought up two
+cases of rum, and when these were handed over to them the natives rose
+as if to go. Suddenly the leader drew his axe from his girdle, and with
+a loud yell buried it deep in the captain's head.
+
+The yell was echoed from some hundred throats, the crew of the canoe
+leapt to their feet and began to clamber up the side of the vessel,
+while those in the smaller craft dashed their paddles into the water and
+urged their boats towards it. At the same moment the natives on board
+all drew concealed weapons. So quick had been the action of the chief
+that Mr. Atherton had not time to prevent it, but before the body of the
+captain touched the deck that of the chief was stretched beside it with
+a bullet through the brain.
+
+Wilfrid and the Allens seeing the natives rise to go had thought the
+danger over, and two passengers had been struck down before they brought
+their rifles to their shoulders. They were within a few feet of the
+chiefs, and each of their shots told. For a minute or two there was a
+scene of wild confusion. The natives in the waist fell furiously upon
+the sailors, but these, fortunately put upon their guard, received the
+attack with determination. The sound of the lads' rifles was followed
+almost instantly by the sharp cracks of a revolver Mr. Atherton
+produced from his pocket, and each shot told with fatal effect. When the
+revolver was empty not a native remained alive on the poop.
+
+The other passengers had been taken so completely by surprise that even
+those who had brought up their arms did not join in the fray until the
+poop was cleared. "Keep them back there!" Mr. Atherton shouted as the
+natives came swarming up the ladder on the port side. Several shots were
+fired, but the passengers were too startled for their aim to be true.
+
+"Give me your musket, Renshaw!" Mr. Atherton exclaimed, snatching the
+piece the latter had just discharged from his hands, "my rifle is too
+good for this work." He then clubbed the weapon, and whirling it round
+his head as if it had been a straw fell upon the natives, who were just
+pouring up on to the poop, shouting to the passengers, "Fire on the mass
+below! I will keep these fellows at bay!" Every blow that fell stretched
+a man lifeless on deck, until those who had gained the poop, unable to
+retreat owing to the pressure of those behind them, and terrified by the
+destruction wrought by this giant, sprang over the bulwark into the sea.
+Just as they did so the little party of sailors and steerage passengers,
+finding themselves unable to resist the pressure, made their way up to
+the poop by the starboard ladder, hotly pressed by the natives.
+
+By this time several of the male passengers who had rushed below for
+their weapons ran up, and Wilfred and the Allens having reloaded, such a
+discharge was poured into the natives on the port ladder that the
+survivors leapt down on to the deck below, and the attack for a moment
+ceased. The whole of the forward portion of the ship was by this time
+in the hands of the natives. Three sailors who were at work there had
+been at once murdered, only one of the party having time to make his
+escape up the fore rigging. Spears now began to fly fast over the poop.
+
+"We must fall back a bit, Mr. Rawlins, or we shall be riddled," Mr.
+Atherton said. "Your men had better run down and get muskets; we will
+keep these fellows at bay. I do not think they will make a rush again
+just at present. Will you see that the door leading out on to the waist
+is securely barricaded, and place two or three men there? Mr. Renshaw,
+will you and some of the other passengers carry down those ladies who
+have fainted, and assure them all that the danger is really over."
+
+Mr. Atherton had so naturally taken the command that the second mate at
+once obeyed his instructions. Most of the ladies had rushed below
+directly the fray began, but two or three had fainted, and these were
+soon carried below. The male passengers, eighteen in all, were now on
+deck. Several of them looked very pale and scared, but even the most
+timid felt that his life depended on his making a fight for it. A
+perfect shower of spears were now flying over the poop from the natives
+in the canoes alongside, and from the ship forward.
+
+"We had best lie down, gentlemen," Mr. Atherton said. "If the natives
+make a rush up the ladders we must be careful not to fire all at once or
+we should be at their mercy. Let those by the bulwarks fire first, and
+the others take it up gradually while the first reload. Of course if
+they make a really determined rush there will be nothing to do but to
+meet them and drive them back again."
+
+Unfortunately the four cannon of the _Flying Scud_ were all amidships,
+and were therefore not available for the defence.
+
+"If we could make a breastwork, Mr. Atherton, so that we could stand up
+behind it and fire down into the waist we might drive these fellows
+out," the second officer suggested.
+
+"A very good idea. Wilfrid, will you run down and ask the ladies to get
+up to the top of the companion all the mattrasses, trunks, and other
+things that would do to form a barricade? It will be a good thing for
+them to have something to do. Mr. Rawlins, will you send down the
+stewards to help? they might get some cases and barrels up. As fast as
+they bring them up we will push them along the deck and form a
+breastwork."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+THE END OF THE VOYAGE.
+
+
+When Wilfred went below to get materials for a barricade, he found the
+ladies kneeling or sitting calm and quiet, although very pale and white,
+round the table, while Mrs. Renshaw was praying aloud. She concluded her
+prayer just as he came down. There was a general chorus of questions.
+
+"Everything is going on well," Wilfrid said cheerfully; "but we want to
+make a breastwork, for the spears are flying about so, one cannot stand
+up to fire at them. I have come to ask you all to carry up mattrasses
+and pillows and cushions and portmanteaus, and anything else that will
+make a barricade. The steward will open the lazaret and send up barrels
+and things. Please set to work at once."
+
+Not a moment was lost; the ladies carried the things rapidly up the
+companion, two of the passengers passed them outside, and others lying
+in a line pushed them forward from one to another until they arrived at
+those lying, rifle in hand, twenty feet aft of the poop rails. There was
+soon a line of mattrasses four deep laid across the deck.
+
+"That will do to begin with," Mr. Atherton said. "Now, let us push these
+before us to the end of the poop, and we can then commence operations.
+The sailors, Wilfrid Renshaw, the Allens, and myself will first open
+fire. Will the rest of you please continue to pass things along to add
+to the height of our barricade? I wish we knew how they are getting on
+on shore." For almost immediately after the struggle had begun on board
+the sound of musketry had broken out from that quarter, and they knew
+that the watering party had been attacked directly the natives knew that
+their chiefs had commenced the massacre on board ship.
+
+Several times, in spite of the danger from the flying spears, Mr.
+Atherton had gone to the stern and looked towards the shore. The boats
+lay there seemingly deserted, and the fight was going on in the wood. A
+number of canoes had placed themselves so as to cut off the return of
+the boats should the sailors succeed in making their way to them.
+
+As soon as the line of mattrasses was pushed forward to the edge of the
+poop a steady fire was opened upon the natives, who had already taken
+off the hatches, and were engaged in bringing their plunder up on deck,
+deferring the dangerous operation of carrying the poop for the present.
+
+As soon, however, as the fire opened upon them they seized their spears
+and tomahawks, and, led by one of their chiefs, made a rush at the two
+poop ladders. Mr. Atherton gave a shout, and the whole of the passengers
+seizing their muskets sprang to their feet and ran forward to the
+barricade, and so heavy a fire was poured into the natives as they tried
+to ascend the ladders, that they fell back again and contented
+themselves with replying to the fire with volleys of spears. The
+passengers at once renewed their work of passing the materials for the
+barricade forward, and this was continued until it rose breast high.
+They then took their places closely together behind it, and joined its
+defenders in keeping up a heavy fire upon the natives. So deadly was its
+effect that the latter began to lose heart and to jump over into the
+canoes alongside.
+
+A cheer broke from the passengers as they saw the movement of retreat.
+It was no longer necessary for any to reserve their fire, and this was
+redoubled. The natives were discouraged by the want of leaders; their
+principal chiefs had all been killed on the poop, and any other who
+attempted to rally them and lead them again to an attack was instantly
+shot down by Mr. Atherton, who, as Wilfrid, who was standing next to
+him observed, never once failed to bring down the man he aimed at.
+
+"I think we might go at them, sir, now," the second officer said to Mr.
+Atherton; "the fight is all out of them."
+
+"I think so too, Rawlins. Now, gentlemen, give them one last volley and
+then pull down the barricade across the ends of the ladders and charge
+them." The volley was given, and then with a ringing cheer the barricade
+was thrust aside, and, led on one side by Mr. Atherton and on the other
+by the second officer, the defenders of the poop sprang down the ladders
+and rushed forward. The natives did not stop to await them, but sprung
+overboard with the greatest precipitation, and the _Flying Scud_ was
+once again in the hands of its lawful owners.
+
+"Now, Rawlins, do you and the sailors work the guns, we will pepper them
+with our rifles," Mr. Atherton said. "Mr. Renshaw, will you go aft and
+tell the ladies that all is over?"
+
+But this they had already learned. Marion, after the things had been
+passed up, had taken her place at the top of the companion, occasionally
+peering out to see what was going on, and running down with the news to
+them below, and as the loud cheer which preceded the charge had broken
+from those on deck, she had called out to the ladies below that the
+natives were beaten. The shower of spears from the boats had ceased as
+soon as the natives saw their friends leaping overboard, and as Mr.
+Renshaw ascended the poop to deliver the message the ladies were
+flocking out on deck, each anxious to ascertain whether those most dear
+to them had suffered in the fray. Marion run forward and threw herself
+into his arms.
+
+"Not hurt, father?"
+
+"No, my dear, thank God. Some of us have got spear wounds more or less
+awkward, but nobody has been killed except those who were struck down at
+the beginning." As he spoke the four cannon boomed out one after
+another, for they had been loaded some days before, and a hail of
+bullets and pieces of iron with which they had been crammed tore through
+the canoes, while terrible yells rose from the natives. Three of the
+canoes were instantly sunk, and half the paddlers in the large boat of
+the chief were killed or disabled. Almost the same instant a dropping
+fire of musketry was opened, the passengers firing as soon as they had
+reloaded their pieces.
+
+"Give another dose to that big fellow!" the second officer shouted to
+the men at the two guns at that side of the ship. "Shove a ball in, men,
+and a bagful of bullets--take steady aim, and remember the poor
+captain!" A minute later the guns were fired. A terrible cry was heard,
+and almost instantaneously the great canoe disappeared below the water.
+
+"Get the other two guns over to this side," Mr. Rawlins said; "we must
+lend a hand now to the party ashore. Load all the guns with grape, and
+aim at those canoes between us and them." These, following the example
+of those around the ship, were already moving towards the shore, and the
+discharge of the four guns sunk two of them and sent the others off in
+headlong flight.
+
+"What had we better do now, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"I should load with round shot now, Rawlins, and open fire into the wood
+on both sides of the landing-place. The sound of the shot crashing among
+the trees will demoralize the scoundrels even if you do not hit anyone."
+
+Three or four rounds were fired, and then those on board gave a cheer as
+they saw the sailors issue out from among the trees and take their
+places in the boats. Half a minute later they were rowing towards the
+vessel, unmolested by the natives. Mr. Ryan stood up in the stern of his
+boat as soon as they were within hailing distance and shouted--"How has
+it gone with you?"
+
+"We have beaten them off, as you see," the second officer shouted back;
+"but the ship was pretty nearly in their hands for a time. The captain
+is killed, I am sorry to say; four of our men, and two of the
+passengers. How have you done?"
+
+"We have lost three men," Mr. Ryan replied, "and most of us are
+wounded."
+
+The boats were soon alongside, and Mr. Ryan, after hearing what had
+taken place on board, related his experience. "We had got about half the
+casks filled when we heard a rifle shot on board a ship, followed
+directly by the yells of the black divils. I ordered the men to drop the
+casks and take to their guns, but I had scarcely spoken when a volley of
+spears fell among us. Two men were killed at once. I had intended to
+take to the boats and come off to lend you a hand, but by the yelling
+and the shower of spears I saw that the spalpeens were so thick round us
+that if we had tried we should pretty well all be killed before we
+could get fairly out, so I told the men to take to the trees and keep up
+a steady fire whenever the natives tried to make a rush at us. I was, of
+course, terribly anxious about you all at first, and I knew that if the
+ship was taken they must have us all sooner or later. After the first
+few shots there was silence for a time, and I feared the worst."
+
+"The spears were flying so thick we could not stand up to fire," the
+second officer put in.
+
+"Ah! that was it. Well, I was afraid you had all been massacred, and you
+may imagine how relieved I was when I heard a dropping fire of musketry
+begin; I knew then that they had failed to take you by surprise. The
+fire at last got so heavy I was sure that most of you had escaped the
+first attack, and we then felt pretty hopeful, though I did not see how
+we were to get down to the boats and get off to you. When we heard the
+first cannon shot we gave a cheer that must have astonished the natives,
+for we knew you must have cleared the deck of the scoundrels. I had set
+a man at the edge of the trees by the water to let us know how you were
+going on, and he soon shouted that the canoes were drawing off! Then we
+heard the big canoe was sunk, and that you had driven off the craft that
+were lying between us and the ship. A minute later the round shot came
+crashing among the trees, and almost immediately the yelling round us
+ceased, and we felt sure they must be drawing off. We waited until you
+had fired a couple more rounds, and then as all seemed quiet we fell
+back to the boats, and, as you saw, got off without a single spear
+being thrown at us. I am awfully sorry for the poor captain. If he had
+but taken your advice, Mr. Atherton, all this would not have happened;
+but at last he got to trust these treacherous scoundrels, and this is
+the result."
+
+"Well, Mr. Ryan, you are in command now," Mr. Atherton said, "and we are
+all ready to carry out any orders that you will give us."
+
+"First of all then, Mr. Atherton, I must, in the name of the owners of
+this ship, of myself, the officers and crew, thank you for having saved
+it and us from the hands of these savages. From what Mr. Rawlins tells
+me, and from what I know myself, I am convinced that had it not been for
+your vigilance, and for the part you have taken in the defence of the
+ship, the natives would have succeeded in their treacherous design of
+massacring all on board almost without resistance."
+
+A cheer broke from the passengers and crew, and Mr. Renshaw said when it
+had subsided: "I, on the part of the passengers, endorse all that Mr.
+Ryan has said; we owe it to you, Atherton, that by God's mercy we and
+those dear to us have escaped from death at the hands of these savages.
+It was you who put some of us on our guard; it was your marvellous
+shooting with the revolver that first cleared the poop; and your
+extraordinary strength, that enabled you single-handed to check the
+onslaught of the natives and give us time to rally from our first
+surprise, and saved the ship and us."
+
+"Do not let us say anything more about it," Mr. Atherton said; "we have
+all done our duty to the best of our power, and have reason to be
+heartily thankful to God that we have got out of this scrape without
+heavier loss than has befallen us. Now, Mr. Ryan, please give your
+orders."
+
+"The first thing, undoubtedly, is to clear the deck of these bodies,"
+Mr. Ryan said.
+
+"What about the wounded?" Mr. Renshaw asked, "no doubt some of the poor
+wretches are still alive."
+
+"They do not deserve any better fate than to be tossed overboard with
+the others; still, as that would go against the grain, we will see what
+we can do." He looked over the side. "There is a good-sized canoe
+floating there fifty yards away. I suppose the fellows thought it would
+be safer to jump overboard and swim ashore. Four of you men get out the
+gig and tow the canoe alongside. We will put any wounded we find into it
+and send it adrift; they will come out and pick it up after we are
+fairly off."
+
+The bodies of sixty natives who had been killed outright were thrown
+overboard, and eighteen who were found to be still alive were lowered
+into the canoe. "I do not think we are really doing them much kindness,
+though of course we are doing the best we can for them," Mr. Atherton
+said to Mr. Renshaw. "I doubt if one of them will live. You see, all who
+were able to drag themselves to the side jumped overboard, and were
+either drowned or hauled into the canoes."
+
+As soon as the operation was over the casks of water were got on board
+and the boats hoisted to the davits. The anchor was then hove up and
+some of the sails shaken out, and with a gentle breeze the vessel began
+to draw off the land. As soon as this was done all hands set to work
+washing down the decks; and in two or three hours, except for the bullet
+marks on the deck and bulwarks, there were no signs left of the
+desperate conflict that had raged on board the _Flying Scud_. At sunset
+all hands gathered on the poop, and the bodies of the captain and two
+passengers, and of the sailors who had fallen, were reverently delivered
+to the deep, Mr. Ryan reading the funeral service.
+
+The ladies had retired below after the boats had come alongside, and did
+not come up until all was ready for the funeral. Mrs. Renshaw and three
+or four of the others had been employed in dressing the wounds of those
+who had been injured. Four out of the six sailors who had survived the
+massacre on board had been more or less severely wounded before they won
+their way on the quarter-deck, and six of the watering party were also
+wounded. Eight of the passengers had been struck with the flying spears;
+but only two of these had received wounds likely to cause anxiety. After
+the funeral was over more sail was hoisted, the breeze freshened, and
+the _Flying Scud_ proceeded briskly on her way.
+
+The rest of the voyage was uneventful. Thankful as all were for their
+escape, a gloom hung over the ship. The death of the captain was much
+felt by all. He had been uniformly kind and obliging to the passengers,
+and had done everything in his power to make the voyage a pleasant one.
+One of the passengers who was killed was a young man with none on board
+to mourn him, but the other had left a widow and two children, whose
+presence in their midst was a constant reminder of their narrow escape
+from destruction.
+
+The voyage had produced a very marked change in Mr. Renshaw. It had
+brought him in far closer connection with his children than he had ever
+been before, with results advantageous to each. Hitherto they had
+scarcely ever seen him except at meals, and even at these times his
+thoughts were so wholly taken up with the writings on which he was
+engaged that he had taken but little part in the general conversation
+beyond giving a willing assent to any request they made, and evincing no
+interest whatever in their plans and amusements.
+
+Now, although for four or five hours a day he worked diligently at his
+study of the Maori language, he was at other times ready to join in what
+was going on. He often walked the deck by the hour with Wilfrid and
+Marion, and in that time learned far more of their past life, of their
+acquaintances and amusements at their old home, than he had ever known
+before. He was genial and chatty with all the other passengers, and the
+astonishment of his children was unbounded when he began to take a
+lively part in the various amusements by which the passengers whiled
+away the long hours, and played at deck quoits and bull. The latter game
+consists of a board divided into twelve squares, numbered one to ten,
+with two having bulls' heads upon them; leaden discs covered with canvas
+are thrown on to this board, counting according to the number on which
+they fall, ten being lost for each quoit lodged on a square marked by a
+bull's head.
+
+On the evening of the day before the shores of New Zealand came in
+sight Mr. Renshaw was sitting by his wife. "The voyage is just finished,
+Helen," he said. "It has been a pleasant time. I am sorry it is over."
+
+"A very pleasant time, Alfred," she replied, "one of the most pleasant I
+have ever spent."
+
+"I see now," he went on, "that I have made a mistake of my life, and
+instead of making an amusement of my hobby for archaeology have thrown
+away everything for it. I have been worse than selfish. I have utterly
+neglected you and the children. Why, I seem only to have made an
+acquaintance with them since we came on board a ship. I see now, dear,
+that I have broken my marriage vows to you. I have always loved you and
+always honoured you, but I have altogether failed to cherish you."
+
+"You have always been good and kind, Alfred," she said softly.
+
+"A man may be good and kind to a dog, Helen; but that is not all that a
+wife has a right to expect. I see now that I have blundered miserably. I
+cannot change my nature altogether, dear; that is too late. I cannot
+develop a fund of energy by merely wishing for it; but I can make the
+happiness of my wife and children my first thought and object, and my
+own pursuits the second. I thought the loss of our money was a terrible
+misfortune. I do not think so now. I feel that I have got my wife again
+and have gained two children, and whatever comes of our venture here I
+shall feel that the failure of the bank has brought undeserved happiness
+to me."
+
+"And to me also," Mrs. Renshaw said softly as she pressed her husband's
+hand. "I feel sure that we shall all be happier than we have ever been
+before. Not that we have been unhappy, dear, very far from it; still you
+have not been our life and centre, and it has been so different since
+the voyage began."
+
+"He is not half a bad fellow, after all," Mr. Atherton said, as leaning
+against the bulwark smoking his cigar he had glanced across at the
+husband and wife seated next to each other talking in low tones, and
+evidently seeing nothing of what was passing around them. "He has
+brightened up wonderfully since we started. Of course he will never be a
+strong man, and is no more fit for a settler's life than he is for a
+habitation in the moon. Still, he is getting more like other people. His
+thoughts are no longer two or three thousand years back. He has become a
+sociable and pleasant fellow, and I am sure he is very fond of his wife
+and children. It is a pity he has not more backbone. Still, I think the
+general outlook is better than I expected. Taking it altogether it has
+been as pleasant a voyage as I have ever made. There is the satisfaction
+too that one may see something of one's fellow-passengers after we land.
+This northern island is not, after all, such a very big place. That is
+the worst of homeward voyages. People who get to know and like each
+other when they arrive in port scatter like a bomb-shell in every
+direction, and the chances are against your ever running up against any
+of them afterwards."
+
+Somewhat similar ideas occupied the mind of most of the passengers that
+evening. The voyage had been a pleasant one, and they were almost sorry
+that it was over; but there was a pleasurable excitement at the thought
+that they should next day see the land that was to be their home, and
+the knowledge that they should all be staying for a few days at
+Wellington seemed to postpone the break-up of their party for some
+little time.
+
+No sooner was the anchor dropped than a number of shore boats came off
+to the ship. Those who had friends on shore and were expecting to be met
+watched anxiously for a familiar face, and a cry of delight broke from
+the two Mitfords as they saw their father and mother in one of these
+boats. After the first joyful greeting was over the happy little party
+retired to the cabin, where they could chat together undisturbed, as all
+the passengers were on deck. Half an hour later they returned to the
+deck, and the girls led their father and mother up to Mrs. Renshaw.
+
+"I have to thank you most heartily, Mrs. Renshaw, for your great
+kindness to my girls. They tell me that you have throughout the voyage
+looked after them as if they had been your own daughters."
+
+"There was no looking after required, I can assure you," Mrs. Renshaw
+said. "I was very pleased, indeed, to have them in what I may call our
+little party, and it was a great advantage and pleasure to my own girl."
+
+"We are going ashore at once," Mr. Mitford said. "My girls tell me that
+you have no acquaintances here. My own place is hundreds of miles away,
+and we are staying with some friends while waiting the arrival of the
+ship, and therefore cannot, I am sorry to say, put you up; but in any
+other way in which we can be of assistance we shall be delighted to give
+any aid in our power. The girls say you are thinking of making this
+your head-quarters until you decide upon the district in which you mean
+to settle. In that case it will, of course, be much better for you to
+take a house, or part of a house, than to stop at an hotel; and if so it
+will be best to settle upon one at once, so as to go straight to it and
+avoid all the expenses of moving twice. It is probable that our friends,
+the Jacksons, may know of some suitable place, but if not I shall be
+glad to act as your guide in house-hunting."
+
+Mr. Renshaw here came up and was introduced to Mr. Mitford, who repeated
+his offer.
+
+"We shall be extremely glad," Mr. Renshaw replied; "though I really
+think that it is most unfair to take you even for a moment from your
+girls after an absence of five years."
+
+"Oh, never mind that," Mr. Mitford said; "we shall land at once, and
+shall have all the morning to talk with them. If you and Mrs. Renshaw
+will come ashore at four o'clock in the afternoon my wife and I will
+meet you at the landing-place. Or if, as I suppose you would prefer to
+do, you like to land this morning and have a look at Wellington for
+yourselves, this is our address, and if you will call at two o'clock, or
+any time later, we shall be at your service. I would suggest, though,
+that if you do land early, you should first come round to us, because
+Jackson may know some place to suit you; and if not, I am sure that he
+will be glad to accompany you and act as your guide."
+
+"I should not like to trouble--" Mr. Renshaw began.
+
+"My dear sir, you do not know the country. Everyone is glad to help a
+new chum--that is the name for fresh arrivals--to the utmost of his
+power if he knows anything whatever about him, and no one thinks
+anything of trouble."
+
+"In that case," Mr. Renshaw said smiling, "we will gladly avail
+ourselves of the offer. We should all have been contented if the voyage
+had lasted a month longer; but being here, we all, I suppose, want to
+get ashore as soon as possible. Therefore we shall probably call at your
+address in the course of an hour or so after you get there."
+
+Wilfrid and Marion were indeed in such a hurry to get ashore that a very
+few minutes after the Mitfords left the side of the ship, the Renshaws
+took a boat and started for the shore. Most of the other passengers also
+landed.
+
+"We shall go in alongside the quays in an hour's time," the captain said
+as they left; "so you must look for us there when you have done
+sight-seeing. We shall begin to get the baggage up at once for the
+benefit of those who are in a hurry to get away to the hotels; but I
+shall be glad for you all to make the ship your home until to-morrow."
+
+For an hour after landing the Renshaws wandered about Wellington, which
+they found to be a pretty and well-built town with wide streets.
+
+"Why, it is quite a large place!" Wilfrid exclaimed in surprise.
+"Different, of course, from towns at home, with more open spaces. I
+expected it would be much rougher than it is."
+
+"It is the second town of the island, you see," Mr. Renshaw said; "and
+is an important place. Well, I am glad we did not cumber ourselves by
+bringing everything out from England, for there will be no difficulty
+in providing ourselves with everything we require here."
+
+After wandering about for an hour they proceeded to the address Mr.
+Mitford had given them. It was a house of considerable size, standing in
+a pretty garden, a quarter of a mile from the business part of the town.
+They were warmly received by the Mitfords, and introduced to Mr. and
+Mrs. Jackson.
+
+"Mr. Mitford has been telling me that you want to get a house, or part
+of a house, for a few weeks till you look about you and decide where you
+will settle down," Mr. Jackson said. "I am a land and estate agent,
+besides doing a little in other ways. We most of us turn our hands to
+anything that presents itself here. I have taken a holiday for this
+morning and left my clerk in charge, so I am quite at your service. You
+will find it difficult and expensive if you take a whole house, so I
+should advise you strongly to take lodgings. If you were a large party
+it would be different, but you only want a sitting-room and three
+bed-rooms."
+
+"We could do with a sitting-room, a good-sized bed-room for my wife and
+myself, and a small one for my daughter," Mr. Renshaw said; "and take a
+bed-room out for a few nights for Wilfrid, as he will be starting with a
+friend to journey through the colony and look out for a piece of land to
+suit us."
+
+"Then there will be no difficulty at all. You will find lodgings rather
+more expensive than in England. I do not mean more expensive than a
+fashionable watering-place, but certainly more expensive than in a town
+of the same kind at home. House rent is high here; but then, on the
+other hand, your living will cost you less than at home."
+
+After an hour's search lodgings were found in a house at no great
+distance from that of Mr. Jackson. It was a small house, kept by the
+widow of the owner and captain of a small trading ship that had been
+lost a year previously. The ship had fortunately been insured, and the
+widow was able to keep on the house in which she lived, adding to her
+income by letting a portion of it to new arrivals who, like the
+Renshaws, intended to make a stay of some little time in Wellington
+before taking any steps to establish themselves as settlers.
+
+"I think," Mr. Jackson said when this was settled, "you are doing wisely
+by letting your son here take a run through the colony. There is no
+greater mistake than for new-comers to be in a hurry. Settle in haste
+and repent at leisure is the rule. Mr. Mitford was saying that he hoped
+that you might settle down somewhere in his locality; but at any rate it
+will be best to look round first. There is plenty of land at present to
+be obtained anywhere, and there are many things to be considered in
+choosing a location. Carriage is of course a vital consideration, and a
+settler on a river has a great advantage over one who has to send his
+produce a long distance to market by waggon. Then, again, some people
+prefer taking up virgin land and clearing it for themselves, while
+others are ready to pay a higher sum to take possession of a holding
+where much of the hard work has already been done, and a house stands
+ready for occupation.
+
+"At present no one, of course, with a wife and daughter would think of
+settling in the disturbed district, although farms can be bought there
+for next to nothing. The war is, I hope, nearly at an end, now that we
+have ten British regiments in the island. They have taken most of the
+enemy's pahs, though they have been a prodigious time about it, and we
+colonists are very discontented with the dilatory way in which the war
+has been carried on, and think that if things had been left to ourselves
+we could have stamped the rebellion out in half the time. The red-coats
+were much too slow; too heavily weighted and too cautious for this sort
+of work. The Maoris defend their pahs well, inflict a heavy loss upon
+their assailants, and when the latter at last make their attack and
+carry the works the Maoris manage to slip away, and the next heard of
+them is they have erected a fresh pah, and the whole thing has to be
+gone through again. However, we need not discuss that now. I take it
+that anyhow you would not think of settling down anywhere in the
+locality of the tribes that have been in revolt."
+
+"Certainly not," Mr. Renshaw said. "I am a peaceful man, and if I could
+get a house and land for nothing and an income thrown into the bargain,
+I should refuse it if I could not go to bed without the fear that the
+place might be in flames before the morning."
+
+"I am bound to say that the natives have as a whole behaved very well to
+the settlers; it would have been easy in a great number of cases for
+them to have cut them off had they chosen to do so. But they have fought
+fairly and well according to the rules of what we may call honourable
+warfare. The tribesmen are for the most part Christians, and have
+carried out Christian precepts.
+
+"In one case, hearing that the troops assembling to attack one of their
+pahs were short of provisions, they sent down boat-loads of potatoes and
+other vegetables to them, saying that the Bible said, 'If thine enemy
+hunger feed him.' Still, in spite of instances of this kind, I should
+certainly say do not go near the disturbed districts, for one cannot
+assert that if hostilities continue they will always be carried on in
+that spirit. However, things are at present perfectly peaceable
+throughout the provinces of Wellington and Hawke Bay, and it may be
+hoped it may continue so. I have maps and plans of all the various
+districts, and before your son starts will give him all the information
+I possess as to the advantages and disadvantages of each locality, the
+nature of the soil, the price at which land can be purchased, and the
+reputation of the natives in the neighbourhood."
+
+The next day the Renshaws landed after breakfast and took up their abode
+in the new lodgings. These were plainly but comfortably furnished, and
+after one of the trunks containing nick-nacks of all descriptions had
+been opened, and some of the contents distributed, the room assumed a
+comfortable home-like appearance. A lodging had been obtained close by
+for the two Grimstones. The young fellows were heartily glad to be on
+shore again, for life among the steerage passengers during a long voyage
+is dull and monotonous. Mr. Renshaw had looked after them during the
+voyage, and had supplied them from his own stores with many little
+comforts in the way of food, and with books to assist them to pass their
+time; still they were very glad the voyage was over.
+
+When he now told them it was probable that a month or even more might
+pass after their arrival in the colony before he could settle on a piece
+of land, and that during that time they would remain at Wellington, they
+at once asked him to get them work of some kind if he could. "We should
+be learning something about the place, sir; and should probably get our
+food for our work, and should be costing you nothing, and we would much
+rather do that than loiter about town doing nothing."
+
+Mr. Renshaw approved of their plan, and mentioned it to Mr. Jackson,
+who, on the very day after their landing, spoke to a settler who had
+come in from a farm some twenty miles in the interior.
+
+"They are active and willing young fellows and don't want pay, only to
+be put up and fed until the man who has brought them out here with him
+gets hold of a farm."
+
+"I shall be extremely glad to have them," the settler said. "This is a
+very busy time with us, and a couple of extra hands will be very useful.
+They will learn a good deal as to our ways here in the course of a
+month, and, as you say, it would be far better for them to be at work
+than to be loafing about the place doing nothing."
+
+Accordingly, the next morning the two Grimstones went up country and set
+to work.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+THE NEW ZEALAND WAR.
+
+
+For a few days the greater part of the passengers who had arrived by the
+_Flying Scud_ remained in Wellington. Mr. Atherton and the two Allens
+had put up at the same hotel. The latter intended to go out as shepherds
+or in any other capacity on a farm, for a few months at any rate, before
+investing in land. They had two or three letters of introduction to
+residents in Wellington, and ten days after the arrival of the ship they
+called at the Renshaws' to say good-bye, as they had arranged to go for
+some months with a settler up the country. They promised to write
+regularly to Wilfrid and tell him all about the part to which they were
+going.
+
+"Mr. Atherton has promised to write to us," they said, "and tell us
+about the districts he visits with you, and if you and he discover
+anything particularly inviting we shall at any rate come and see you, if
+you will give us an invitation when you are settled, and look round
+there before buying land anywhere else. It would be very pleasant to be
+somewhere near you and him."
+
+"We shall be very glad, indeed, to see you," Mrs. Renshaw said; "still
+more glad if you take up a piece of ground near us. Having friends near
+is a very great point in such a life as this, and it would be most
+agreeable having a sort of little colony of our own."
+
+"We should have liked very much," James Allen said, "to say good-bye to
+the Miss Mitfords, but as we do not know their father and mother it
+might seem strange for us to call there."
+
+"I do not think they are at all people to stand on ceremony," Mrs.
+Renshaw said; "but I will put on my bonnet and go round with you at once
+if you like."
+
+This was accordingly done. Mr. Mitford had heard of the young men as
+forming part of the little group of passengers on board the _Flying
+Scud_, and gave them a hearty invitation to pay him a visit if they
+happened to be in his neighbourhood, and the next day they started for
+the farm on which they had engaged themselves. Two days later there was
+a general break up of the party, for Mr. and Mrs. Mitford started with
+their daughters in a steamer bound to Hawke Bay.
+
+"Will you tell me, Mr. Jackson, what all the trouble in the north has
+been about," Wilfrid asked that evening, "for I have not been able to
+find out from the papers?"
+
+"It is a complicated question, Wilfrid. When New Zealand was first
+colonized the natives were very friendly. The early settlers confidently
+pushed forward into the heart of native districts, bought tracts of land
+from the chiefs, and settled there. Government purchased large blocks of
+land, cut off by intervening native territory from the main settlements,
+and sold this land to settlers without a suspicion that they were
+thereby dooming them to ruin. The settlers were mostly small farmers,
+living in rough wooden houses scattered about the country, and
+surrounded by a few fields; the adjoining land is usually fern or forest
+held by the natives. They fenced their fields, and turned their cattle,
+horses, and sheep at large in the open country outside these fences,
+paying rent to the natives for the privilege of doing so.
+
+"This led to innumerable quarrels. The native plantations of wheat,
+potatoes, or maize are seldom fenced in, and the cattle of the settlers
+sometimes committed much devastation among them; for the Maori fields
+were often situated at long distances from their villages, and the
+cattle might, therefore, be days in their patches before they were found
+out. On the other hand, the gaunt long-legged Maori pigs, which wander
+over the country picking up their own living, were constantly getting
+through the settlers' fences, rooting up their potatoes, and doing all
+sorts of damage.
+
+"In these cases the settlers always had the worst of the quarrel. They
+either had no weapons, or, being isolated in the midst of the natives,
+dared not use them; while the Maoris, well armed and numerous, would
+come down waving their tomahawks and pointing their guns, and the
+settlers, however much in the right, were forced to give way. The
+natural result was that the colonists were continually smarting under a
+sense of wrong, while the Maoris grew insolent and contemptuous, and
+were filled with an overweening confidence in their own powers, the
+result of the patience and enforced submission of the settlers. The
+authority of the queen over the natives has always been a purely nominal
+one. There was indeed a treaty signed acknowledging her government, but
+as none of the chiefs put their name to this, and the men who signed
+were persons of inferior rank with no authority whatever to speak for
+the rest, the treaty was not worth the paper on which it was written.
+
+"The Maoris from the first exhibited a great desire for education. They
+established numerous schools in their own districts and villages; in
+most cases accepted nominally if not really the Christian religion, and
+studied history with a good deal of intelligence. Some of them read that
+the Romans conquered England by making roads everywhere through the
+island, and the natives therefore determined that no roads should be
+constructed through their lands, and every attempt on the part of
+government to carry roads beyond the lands it had bought from them was
+resisted so firmly and angrily that the attempt had to be abandoned. The
+natives were well enough aware that behind the despised settlers was the
+power of England, and that if necessary a numerous army could be sent
+over, but they relied absolutely upon their almost impassable swamps,
+their rivers, forests, and mountains.
+
+"Here they thought they could maintain themselves against any force that
+might be sent against them, and relying upon this they became more and
+more insolent and overbearing, and for some time before the outbreak in
+1860 every one saw that sooner or later the storm would burst, and the
+matter have to be fought out until either we were driven from the island
+or the natives became thoroughly convinced of their inability to oppose
+us.
+
+"At first the natives had sold their land willingly, but as the number
+of the European settlers increased they became jealous of them, and
+every obstacle was thrown in the way of land sales by the chiefs.
+Disputes were constantly arising owing to the fact that the absolute
+ownership of land was very ill defined, and perhaps a dozen or more
+persons professed to have claims of some sort or other on each piece of
+land, and had to be individually settled with before the sale could be
+effected. When as it seemed all was satisfactorily concluded, fresh
+claimants would arise, and disputes were therefore of constant
+occurrence, for there were no authorities outside the principal
+settlements to enforce obedience to the law.
+
+"Even in Auckland itself the state of things was almost unbearable.
+Drunken Maoris would indulge in insolent and riotous behaviour in the
+street; for no native could be imprisoned without the risk of war, and
+with the colonists scattered about all over the country the risk was too
+great to be run. In addition to the want of any rule or authority to
+regulate the dealings of the natives with the English, there were
+constant troubles between the native tribes.
+
+"Then began what is called the king movement. One of the tribes invited
+others to join in establishing a central authority, who would at once
+put a stop to these tribal feuds and enforce something like law and
+order, and they thought that having a king of their own would improve
+their condition--would prevent land from being sold to the whites and be
+a protection to the people at large, and enable them to hold their own
+against the settlers. Several of the tribes joined in this movement.
+Meetings were held in various parts in imitation of the colonial
+assemblies. The fruit of much deliberation was that a chief named
+Potatau, who was held in the highest esteem, not only by the tribes of
+Waikato, but throughout the whole island, as one of the greatest of
+their warriors and wisest of their chiefs, was chosen as king.
+
+"The movement excited much apprehension in Auckland and the other
+settlements, for it was plain that if the Maoris were governed by one
+man and laid aside their mutual enmities they would become extremely
+formidable. At the great meeting that was held, the Bishop of New
+Zealand, the head of the Wesleyan body, and several other missionaries
+were present, and warned the Maoris of the dangers that would arise from
+the course they were taking.
+
+"The warning was in vain, and Potatau was chosen king. Mr. Fenton, a
+government official, went on a tour among the natives. He found that
+there was still what was called a queen's party, but the king's party
+was very much the strongest. For two years, however, things went on
+somewhat as before, and it was not until 1860, when a quarrel arose over
+some land in the province of Taranaki, that troubles fairly began. In
+this district a chief named Wiremu-Kingi had established a sort of land
+league, and given notice to the governor that he would not permit any
+more land to be sold in the district. A native named Teira, who owned
+some land at Waiteira, offered it for sale to the government. After
+examining his title, and finding that it was a valid one, the land was
+purchased.
+
+"In the spring of 1860 the governor tried to take possession.
+Wiremu-Kingi forcibly resisted, the troops were called out, and war
+began. Wiremu-Kingi had unquestionably certain rights on Teira's land,
+for he and his tribe were amicably settled upon it, had built houses,
+and were making plantations; but of these facts the government were
+ignorant when they bought the land. Wiremu-Kingi at once joined the king
+movement, from which he had previously stood aloof. A meeting was held
+at the Waikato. Chief Wiremu-Kingi and Mr. M'Lean, the native secretary,
+both addressed the meeting, and Potatau and many of the chiefs were of
+opinion that the English had acted fairly in the case. Many of the
+younger chiefs, however, took the part of the Taranaki natives, and
+marched away and joined them.
+
+"Unfortunately, in the first fight that took place, our troops were
+driven back in an attack upon a pah, and the news of this success so
+fired the minds of all the fighting men of the Waikato, and neighbouring
+tribes, that they flocked down to Taranaki and joined in plundering the
+deserted homes of the settlers, and in the attacks upon the troops.
+Potatau and his council did all they could to stop their men from going,
+but the desire to distinguish themselves and to take part in the
+victories over the Pakehas, which is what the natives call the whites,
+were too strong for them. In the midst of all this turmoil Potatau died,
+and his son Matu-Taera was made king.
+
+"In the fighting that went on in Taranaki discipline and training soon
+began to make themselves felt. The troops in the colony were largely
+reinforced, and pah after pah were captured. The war went on. But though
+English regiments with a strong force of artillery were engaged in it,
+it cannot be said that the natives have been conquered, and General
+Cameron, who came out and assumed the command, found the task before
+him a very difficult one.
+
+"There was for a time a pause in hostilities when Sir George Grey came
+out as governor in the place of Governor Brown, but the natives
+recommenced hostilities by a treacherous massacre near New Plymouth, and
+fighting began again at once.
+
+"The native pah near the Katikara river was attacked by a column of
+infantry with artillery, and shelled by the guns of a ship of war, and
+the Maoris were driven out of a position that they believed impregnable.
+The Waikatos now rose and murdered and plundered many of the settlers,
+and a force marched for the first time into their country, carried a
+formidable pah at Koheroa, and, although unprovided with artillery,
+defeated the Maoris in a fight in the thick bush. The very formidable
+position at Merimeri, which lay surrounded by swamps near the Waikato
+river, was next captured, although held by eleven hundred Maoris, led by
+their great chief Wiremu-Tamehana, called by the missionaries William
+Thompson.
+
+"The next attack was upon a strongly-fortified position at Rangiriri,
+lying between the Waikato river and Waikare lake. This was successful,
+and the nation were next thrashed at Rangiawhia, at Kaitake, on the 25th
+of last March. Thus, you see, in almost all of these fights we succeeded
+in capturing the enemy's pah or in defeating them if they fought in the
+open. Unfortunately, although these engagements showed the natives that
+in fair fighting they were no match for our troops, they have done
+little more. When their pahs were captured they almost invariably
+managed to make their way through the dense bush, and it can scarcely be
+said that we do more than hold the ground occupied by our soldiers. And
+so matters still go on. The fighting has been confined to the Taranaki
+and Auckland provinces, and we may hope that it will go no further."
+
+"Well, it is quite evident," Mr. Renshaw said, "that neither the Waikato
+country nor Taranaki are fit places for quiet people to settle at the
+present time, and I suppose the northern part of Wellington is not much
+better?"
+
+"No, I cannot say it is," Mr. Jackson said. "The Wanganui tribe on the
+river of that name are in alliance with the Taranaki people, and have
+joined them in fighting against us, and I believe that General Cameron
+will shortly undertake a campaign against them. I should strongly advise
+you to turn your attention to the eastern side of this province, or to
+the province of Hawke Bay, higher up, where they have had no trouble
+whatever, and where, as you know, our friends the Mitfords are settled."
+
+"What is this that I have heard about a new religion that has been
+started among the Maoris?"
+
+"There is but little known about it, and if it were not that should this
+religion spread it will add to our difficulties, no one would think
+anything about it one way or the other. There was a fellow named Te Ua,
+who had always been looked upon as a harmless lunatic. No doubt he is a
+lunatic still, though whether he will be harmless remains to be seen.
+However, he some little time ago gave out that the archangel Michael,
+the angel Gabriel, and hosts of minor spirits visited him and gave him
+permission to preach a new religion, and bestowed on him great power.
+
+"The religion was to be called Pai Marire, which interpreted literally
+means good and peaceful; and it is also called Hau-Hau, the meaning of
+which is obscure, but it is a special word of power that Te Ua professes
+to have specially received from the angel Gabriel. As far as we have
+been able to learn the Hau-Haus have no special belief or creed, except
+that their leader has a divine mission, and that all he says is to be
+implicitly obeyed. Certainly the religion has spread quickly among the
+tribes, and has latterly taken the form of hostility to us. Still, we
+may hope that it will soon die out. It is said that Te Ua has told his
+followers that they are invulnerable, but if they try conclusions with
+us they will very speedily find that he has deceived them, and are not
+likely to continue their belief in him."
+
+"Then the colonists themselves, Mr. Jackson, have taken but little share
+in the fighting so far?"
+
+"Oh, yes, they have. There have been several corps of Rangers which have
+done capital service. The corps led by Majors Atkinson, Von Tempsky, and
+M'Donnell have done great service, and are far more dreaded by the
+natives than are the slow-moving regular troops. They fight the natives
+in their own manner--make raids into their country and attack their
+positions at night, and so much are they dreaded that the natives in
+villages in their vicinity are in the habit of leaving their huts at
+night and sleeping in the bush lest they should be surprised by their
+active enemy. The general opinion among us colonists is that ten
+companies like Von Tempsky's would do a great deal more than ten British
+regiments towards bringing the matter to a conclusion.
+
+"In the first place, the officers and troops of the regular army cannot
+bring themselves to regard the natives with the respect they deserve as
+foes. Their movements are hampered by the necessity of a complicated
+system of transport. Their operations, accompanied as they are by
+artillery and a waggon train, are slow in the extreme, and do what they
+will the natives always slip through their hands. The irregular corps,
+on the other hand, thoroughly appreciate the activity and bravery of the
+Maoris. They have lived among them, and know their customs and ways.
+They have suffered from the arrogance and insolence of the natives
+before the outbreak of the war, and most of them have been ruined by the
+destruction of their farms and the loss of years of patient labour. Thus
+they fight with a personal feeling of enmity against their foes, and
+neither fatigue nor danger is considered by them if there is a chance of
+inflicting a blow upon their enemy. I am convinced that at last the
+imperial government will be so disgusted at the failure of the troops to
+bring the war to a conclusion, and at the great expense and loss of life
+entailed by the operations, that they will recall the regulars and leave
+the colonists to manage the affair themselves, in which case I have no
+fear whatever as to their bringing it to a prompt conclusion. Looking at
+the matter from a business point of view, there is no doubt, Mr.
+Renshaw, that those who, like yourself, come out at the present time
+will benefit considerably. You will get land at a quarter the price you
+would have had to pay for it had it not been for these troubles, and as
+soon as the war is over the tide of emigration will set in again more
+strongly than before, and land will go to prices far exceeding those
+that ruled before the outbreak began."
+
+Upon the following morning Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid embarked in the
+schooner. They had been furnished by Mr. Jackson with a number of
+letters of introduction to settlers in every district they were to
+visit. "These will really only be of use to you in the small towns," he
+said, "for in the country districts every house is open, and you have
+generally only to ride up to a door, put up your horses, and walk in,
+and you are almost sure to meet with a hearty welcome. Still, as you are
+new-comers, and have not rubbed off your old country ideas, it will be
+more pleasant for you to take letters. At the ports, such as they are,
+you may really find them useful, for you will not find any inns. You can
+strike out anywhere into the back country without the least fear of
+being inconvenienced by natives."
+
+The two friends spent a pleasant fortnight touching at the settlements,
+situated for the most part at the mouths of the rivers, and spending the
+time the vessel remained there in short excursions into the interior.
+They were most pleased with the Wairarapa Valley, running up from
+Palliser Bay; but this being near Wellington the land was all taken up,
+and there were many flourishing villages and small towns.
+
+"This is very nice," Wilfrid said, "but the price of land is far too
+high for us, and we might almost as well have taken to farming in
+England."
+
+The eastern coast of the province was dotted by little settlements,
+lying for the most part at the mouths of small rivers, and several of
+these offered favourable facilities for settlement. Passing on, they
+found that the coast was bolder along the province of Hawke Bay. They
+stopped at Clive, at the mouth of the bay, for a day or two, and went up
+the Tukataki river in a canoe to the town of Waipawa. But here they
+found the farms thick and land comparatively expensive. They left the
+schooner at Napier, the chief town of the province, and after making
+several excursions here went up in a coasting craft to the mouth of the
+river Mohaka, which runs into the sea a short distance to the south of
+the boundary line between Hawke Bay and the province of Auckland. A few
+miles up this river was the farm of Mr. Mitford. Hiring a boat they
+proceeded up the river, and landed in front of the comfortable-looking
+farmhouse of the settler.
+
+Mr. Mitford, seeing strangers approaching, at once came down to meet
+them, and received them with the greatest cordiality as soon as he saw
+who they were.
+
+"I am heartily glad to see you!" he exclaimed, "and the girls will be
+delighted. They have been wondering ever since we got here when you
+would arrive. You have not, I hope, fixed upon any land yet, for they
+have set their heart upon your settling down as our neighbours. This is
+as pretty a valley as there is in the island, and you will have no
+difficulty in getting land at the lowest government price. There being
+no settlement of any size at the mouth of the river has deterred
+emigrants from coming here to search for land. But we can talk about
+that afterwards. Come straight up to the house. I will send down one of
+my native boys to bring up your baggage."
+
+They spent a very pleasant evening at the farmhouse. Mr. Mitford owned a
+considerable extent of land, and was doing very well. He reared cattle
+and horses, which he sent down for sale to Wellington. The house was
+large and comfortable, and bore signs of the prosperity of its owner.
+The girls were delighted at the place. They had been left in care of
+relatives at home when their father and mother came out six years before
+to settle in New Zealand, and everything was as new to them as to
+Wilfrid. They had taken to riding as soon as they arrived, and had
+already made excursions far up the valley with their father.
+
+"We were at a place yesterday, Wilfrid," the eldest girl said, "that we
+agreed would suit your father admirably. It is about ten miles up the
+river. It was taken up only last year, father says, by a young
+Englishman, who was going to make a home for someone he was engaged to
+in England. A few days since he was killed by a tree he was cutting down
+falling upon him. He lived twenty-four hours after the accident, and
+father rode out to him when he heard of it. He directed him to sell the
+land for whatever it would fetch, and to send the money over to England.
+There are two hundred acres on the river and a comfortable log hut,
+which could of course be enlarged. He had about fifteen acres cleared
+and cultivated. The scenery is beautiful, much prettier than it is here,
+with lots of lovely tree-ferns; and there are many open patches, so
+that more land can be cleared for cultivation easily. Mabel and I agreed
+when we rode over there two days ago that it would be just the place for
+you."
+
+"It sounds first-rate," Wilfrid said; "just the sort of place that will
+suit us."
+
+"But how about me, Miss Mitford?" Mr. Atherton asked. "Have you had my
+interest at heart as well as those of Wilfrid and his people?"
+
+"You can take up the next bit of land above it," Mr. Mitford said.
+"Langston's was the last settlement on the river, so you can take up any
+piece of land beyond it at the government upset price, and do as much
+fishing and shooting as you like, for I hear from my daughters that you
+are not thinking of permanently settling here, but are only a bird of
+passage. Anyhow, it would not be a bad investment for you to buy a
+considerable acreage, for as soon as the troubles are over there is sure
+to be a rush of emigration; and there are very few places now where land
+is to be had on a navigable river, so that when you are tired of the
+life you will be able to sell out at considerable profit."
+
+"It sounds tempting, Mr. Mitford, and I will certainly have a look at
+the ground. How much would this piece of land be of Mr. Langston's?"
+
+"The poor fellow told me to take anything that I could get. He said he
+knew that at present it was very difficult to sell land, as no new
+settlers were coming out, and that he should be very glad if I get what
+he gave for it, which was ten shillings an acre, and to throw in the
+improvements he had made; so that a hundred pounds would buy it all. I
+really don't think that Mr. Renshaw could do better if he looked all
+through the island. With a cow or two, a pen of pigs, and a score or two
+of fowls, he would practically be able to live on his land from the hour
+he settled there."
+
+Wilfrid was greatly pleased at the idea. He knew that his father and
+mother had still eight hundred pounds untouched; two hundred pounds,
+together with the proceeds of his mother's trinkets and jewels, and the
+sale of the ponies and pony carriage, which had been her own property,
+having sufficed to pay for the passage of themselves and their two
+labourers, and for all expenses up to the time of their arrival at
+Wellington. "If we could get another piece of two hundred acres
+adjoining it at the same price, I think my father would like to take
+it," he said; "it would give more room for horses and cattle to graze.
+Of course we should not want it at first; but if as we got on we wanted
+more land, and had neighbours all round us and could not get it, it
+would be a nuisance."
+
+"I agree with you," Mr. Mitford said. "Two hundred acres is more than
+you want if you are going to put it under the plough; it is not enough
+if you are going to raise cattle and horses. I should certainly
+recommend you to take up another two hundred. The next land on this side
+is still vacant. Poor Langston chose the spot because it happened to be
+particularly pretty, with an open glade down to the river, but the land
+for fully two miles on this side is unoccupied. You can get it at ten
+shillings an acre at present. I will see about it for you if you make up
+your mind after seeing Langston's place, to take it."
+
+"Of course I cannot settle it by myself, sir, not absolutely. I can only
+recommend it to my father as the best place that I have seen. If it is
+as you describe it they will be delighted."
+
+"Well, we will ride over to-morrow and have a look at it. The only
+possible objection I have is loneliness; but that will improve in time;
+the natives here are perfectly peaceful, and we have never had the
+slightest trouble with them."
+
+"We are a good large party to begin with, you see," Wilfrid said.
+"Having the two men with us will take away the feeling of loneliness,
+especially if Mr. Atherton decides upon taking the piece of land next to
+us. Then there are the two Allens who came out with us. I promised to
+write and tell them if I found any nice place; and they said
+particularly that they wanted ground on a river if they could get it, as
+they are fond of boating and fishing, and fancied that if there were
+other farms round that they could, until their own place paid, help to
+keep themselves by taking their neighbours' crops down to market."
+
+"Yes, it might pay if they got a large flat-boat capable of carrying
+cargo; but as far as light goods, letters, and groceries from town are
+concerned, the Indians could do it cheaper in their canoes. However, at
+present there is no market for them to come down to. I keep what I call
+a grocery store for the benefit of the two or three score of settlers
+there are on the river. I do not make any profit out of the matter, but
+each season get a hogshead or two of sugar, a couple of tons of flour,
+some barrels of molasses, a few chests of tea, and an assortment of odds
+and ends, such as pickles, &c., with a certain amount of rum and
+whisky, and sell them at the price they stand me in at. I do not know
+what they would do without it here. I only open the store on the first
+Monday of each month, and they then lay in what stores they require, so
+it gives me very little trouble. I generally take produce in return. My
+bills run on until they get up to the value of something a customer
+wants to sell--a horse, or two or three dozen sheep. That suits me just
+as well as money, as I send a cargo off to Wellington every two or three
+months.
+
+"In time no doubt a settlement will spring up somewhere near the mouth
+of the river, and we shall have a trader or two establishing themselves
+there; but at present I am the purveyor of the district, and manage most
+of the business of the settlers in the way of buying and selling at
+Wellington. So, you see, if you establish yourself here you will have no
+choice but to appoint me your grocer."
+
+Wilfrid laughed. "It will be a great advantage to us to be able to get
+our things so close at hand. I was wondering how people did in the back
+settlements."
+
+"They generally send their drays every two or three months down to the
+nearest store, which may, of course, be fifty miles off, or even more.
+Here, fortunately, you will not be obliged at first to have a dray, but
+can send any produce you have to sell down by water, which is a far
+cheaper and more convenient mode of carriage. You will not have much to
+send for some time, so that will not trouble you at present."
+
+"Oh, no. We shall be quite content if we can live on the produce of our
+farm for the next year or two," Wilfrid laughed.
+
+"It is," Mr. Mitford said, "an immense advantage to settlers when they
+have sufficient funds to carry them on for the first two or three years,
+because in that case they gain the natural increase of their animals
+instead of having to sell them off to pay their way. It is wonderful how
+a flock of sheep or a herd of cattle will increase if there is no
+selling. You may take it that under favourable circumstances a herd of
+cattle will nearly double itself every two years, allowing, of course, a
+large proportion of the bull calves to be sold off as soon as they
+arrive at maturity. Sheep will increase even faster. If you can do
+without selling, you will be surprised, if you start with say fifty
+sheep or ten cows, in how short a time you will have as many animals as
+your land will carry."
+
+"But what are we to do then, sir?"
+
+"Well, you will then, providing the country has not in the meantime
+become too thickly settled, pay some small sum to the natives for the
+right of grazing your cattle on their unoccupied ground. They cultivate
+a mere fraction of the land. In this way you can keep vastly larger
+herds than your own ground could carry. However, it is time to be
+turning in for the night. To-morrow we will start the first thing after
+breakfast to inspect Langston's land."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X.
+
+THE GLADE.
+
+
+When the party assembled at breakfast the next morning, Mr. Atherton's
+first question was:
+
+"Is there such a thing as a boat or a good-sized canoe to be had, Mr.
+Mitford? If you had an elephant here I might manage, but as I suppose
+you do not keep such an animal in your stud I own that I should greatly
+prefer going by water to running the risk of breaking a horse's back and
+my own neck. If such a thing cannot be obtained I will get you, if you
+will, to let me have a native as guide, and I will walk, taking with me
+some small stock of provisions. I can sleep at this hut of Langston's,
+for I say frankly that I should not care about doing the distance there
+and back in one day."
+
+"I have a boat," Mr. Mitford said smiling, "and you shall have a couple
+of natives to paddle you up. I will give orders for them to be ready
+directly after breakfast. You will scarcely be there as soon as we are,
+but you will be there long before we leave. Of course we shall spend
+some time in going over the ground, and we shall take a boy with us with
+a luncheon basket, so you will find refreshment awaiting you when you
+get there."
+
+"That will suit me admirably." Mr. Atherton said. "A boating excursion
+up an unknown river is just the thing I like--that is, when the boat is
+a reasonable size. I was once fool enough on the Amazon to allow myself
+to be persuaded that a canoe at most two feet wide would carry me, and
+the tortures I suffered during that expedition, wedged in the bottom of
+that canoe, and holding on to the sides, I shall never forget. The
+rascally Indians made matters worse by occasionally giving sly lurches
+to the boat, and being within an ace of capsizing her. I had two days of
+that work before I got to a village where I could obtain a craft of
+reasonable size, and I should think I must have lost two stone in weight
+during the time. You think that that was rather an advantage I can see,
+Miss Mitford," he broke off, seeing a smile upon the girl's face. "Well,
+yes, I could spare that and more, but I should prefer that it was
+abstracted by other means than that of agony of mind; besides, these
+improvements are not permanent."
+
+After a hearty breakfast the party prepared for their start. Mrs.
+Mitford had already said that she should not accompany them, the
+distance being longer than she cared to ride; and four horses were
+therefore brought round. Mr. Atherton was first seen fairly on his way
+in a good-sized boat, paddled by two powerful Maoris. Mr. Mitford, his
+daughters, and Wilfrid then mounted; the lad had already been asked if
+he was accustomed to riding.
+
+"Not lately," he replied, "but I used to have a pony and rode a good
+deal when I was a small boy, and I daresay I can stick on."
+
+Wilfrid was delighted with his ride through the forest. In his other
+trips ashore their way had led through an open country with low scrub
+bush, and this was his first experience of a New Zealand forest. Ferns
+were growing everywhere. The tree-ferns, coated with scales, rose from
+thirty to forty feet in the air. Hymenophylla and polypodia, in
+extraordinary variety, covered the trunks of the forest trees with
+luxuriant growth. Smaller ferns grew between the branches and twigs, and
+a thick growth of ferns of many species extended everywhere over the
+ground.
+
+The trees were for the most part pines of different varieties, but
+differing so widely in appearance from those Wilfrid had seen in
+England, that had not Mr. Mitford assured him that they were really
+pines he would never have guessed they belonged to that family. Mr.
+Mitford gave him the native names of many of them. The totara matai were
+among the largest and most beautiful. The rimu was distinguished by its
+hanging leaves and branches, the tanekaha by its parsley-shaped leaves.
+Among them towered up the poplar-shaped rewarewa and the hinau, whose
+fruit Mr. Mitford said was the favourite food of the parrots.
+
+Among the great forest trees were several belonging to the families of
+the myrtles and laurels, especially the rata, whose trunk often measured
+forty feet in circumference, and on whose crown were branches of scarlet
+blossoms. But it was to the ferns, the orchids, and the innumerable
+creepers, which covered the ground with a natural netting, coiled round
+every stem, and entwined themselves among the topmost branches, that the
+forest owed its peculiar features. Outside the narrow cleared track
+along which they were riding it would have been impossible for a man to
+make his way unless with the assistance of knife and hatchet, especially
+as some of the climbers were completely covered with thorns.
+
+And yet, although so very beautiful, the appearance of the forest was
+sombre and melancholy. A great proportion of the plants of New Zealand
+bear no flowers, and except high up among some of the tree-tops no gay
+blossoms or colour of any kind meet the eye to relieve the monotony of
+the verdure. A deep silence reigned. Wilfrid did not see a butterfly
+during his ride, or hear the song or even the chirp of a single bird. It
+was a wilderness of tangled green, unrelieved by life or colour. Mr.
+Mitford could give him the names of only a few of the principal trees;
+and seeing the infinite variety of the foliage around him, Wilfrid no
+longer wondered Mr. Atherton should have made so long a journey in order
+to study the botany of the island, which is unique, for although many of
+the trees and shrubs can be found elsewhere, great numbers are entirely
+peculiar to the island.
+
+"Are there any snakes?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"No; you can wander about without fear. There is only one poisonous
+creature in New Zealand, and that is found north of the port of
+Tauranga, forty or fifty miles from here. They say it exists only there
+and round Potaki, near Cook's Strait. It is a small black spider, with a
+red stripe on its back. The natives all say that its bite is poisonous.
+It will not, they say, cause death to a healthy person, though it will
+make him very ill; but there are instances of sickly persons being
+killed by it. Anyhow, the natives dread it very much. However, as the
+beast is confined to two small localities, you need not trouble about
+it. The thorns are the only enemies you have to dread as you make your
+way through the forest."
+
+"That is a comfort, anyhow," Wilfrid said; "it would be a great nuisance
+to have to be always on the watch against snakes."
+
+The road they were traversing had been cleared of trees from one
+settler's holding to another, and they stopped for a few minutes at
+three or four of the farmhouses. Some of these showed signs of comfort
+and prosperity, while one or two were mere log cabins.
+
+"I suppose the people here have lately arrived?" Wilfrid remarked as
+they rode by one of these without stopping.
+
+"They have been here upwards of two years," Mr. Mitford replied; "but
+the place is not likely to improve were they to be here another ten.
+They are a thriftless lazy lot, content to raise just sufficient for
+their actual wants and to pay for whisky. These are the sort of people
+who bring discredit on the colony by writing home declaring that there
+is no getting on here, and that a settler's life is worse than a dog's.
+
+"People who come out with an idea that a colony is an easy place to get
+a living in are completely mistaken. For a man to succeed he must work
+harder and live harder here than he would do at home. He is up with the
+sun, and works until it is too dark to work longer. If he employs men he
+must himself set an example to them. Men will work here for a master who
+works himself, but one who thinks that he has only to pay his hands and
+can spend his time in riding about the country making visits, or in
+sitting quietly by his fire, will find that his hands will soon be as
+lazy as he is himself. Then the living here is rougher than it is at
+home for one in the same condition of life. The fare is necessarily
+monotonous. In hot weather meat will not keep more than a day or two,
+and a settler cannot afford to kill a sheep every day; therefore he has
+to depend either upon bacon or tinned meat, and I can tell you that a
+continuance of such fare palls upon the appetite, and one's meals cease
+to be a pleasure. But the curse of the country, as of all our colonies,
+is whisky. I do think the monotony of the food has something to do with
+it, and that if men could but get greater variety in their fare they
+would not have the same craving for drink. It is the ruin of thousands.
+A young fellow who lands here and determines to work hard and to abstain
+from liquors--I do not mean totally abstain, though if he has any
+inclination at all towards drink the only safety is total abstinence--is
+sure to get on and make his way, while the man who gives way to drink is
+equally certain to remain at the bottom of the tree. Now we are just
+passing the boundary of the holding you have come to see. You see that
+piece of bark slashed off the trunk of that tree? That is what we call a
+blaze, and marks the line of the boundary."
+
+After riding a few minutes further the trees opened, and they found
+themselves in a glade sloping down to the river. A few acres of land had
+been ploughed up and put under cultivation. Close by stood the hut, and
+beyond a grassy sward, broken by a few large trees, stretched down to
+the river.
+
+"That's the place," Mr. Mitford said, "and a very pretty one it is. Poor
+young Langston chose his farm specially for that bit of scenery."
+
+"It is pretty," Wilfrid agreed; "I am sure my father and mother will be
+delighted with it. As you said, it is just like a piece of park land at
+home."
+
+The hut was strongly built of logs. It was about thirty feet long by
+twenty wide, and was divided into two rooms; the one furnished as a
+kitchen and living-room, the other opening from it as a bed-room.
+
+"There is not much furniture in it," Mr. Mitford said; "but what there
+is is strong and serviceable, and is a good deal better than the
+generality of things you will find in a new settler's hut. He was
+getting the things in gradually as he could afford them, so as to have
+it really comfortably furnished by the time she came out to join him. Of
+course the place will not be large enough for your party, but you can
+easily add to it; and at any rate it is vastly better coming to a shanty
+like this than arriving upon virgin ground and having everything to do."
+
+"I think it is capital," Wilfrid said.
+
+"Now we will take a ride over the ground, and I will show you what that
+is like. Of course it will give you more trouble clearing away the
+forest than it would do if you settled upon land without trees upon it.
+But forest land is generally the best when it is cleared; and I think
+that to people like your father and mother land like this is much
+preferable, as in making the clearings, clumps and belts of trees can be
+left, giving a home-like appearance to the place. Of course upon bare
+land you can plant trees, but it is a long time before these grow to a
+sufficient size to give a character to a homestead. Besides, as I told
+you, there are already several other natural clearings upon the ground,
+enough to afford grass for quite as many animals as you will probably
+start with."
+
+After an hour's ride over the holding and the lands adjoining it, which
+Mr. Mitford advised should be also taken up, they returned to the hut. A
+shout greeted them as they arrived, and they saw Mr. Atherton walking up
+from the river towards the hut.
+
+"A charming site for a mansion," he said as they rode up. "Mr. Mitford,
+I think I shall make you a bid for this on my own account, and so cut
+out my young friend Wilfrid."
+
+"I am afraid you are too late," Mr. Mitford laughed. "I have already
+agreed to give him the option of it, keeping it open until we can
+receive a reply from his father."
+
+"I call that too bad," Mr. Atherton grumbled. "However, I suppose I must
+move on farther. But really this seems a charming place, and I am sure
+Mrs. Renshaw will be delighted with it. Why, there must be thirty acres
+of natural clearing here?"
+
+"About that," Mr. Mitford replied; "and there are two or three other
+patches which amount to about as much more. The other hundred and forty
+are bush and forest. The next lot has also some patches of open land, so
+that altogether out of the four hundred acres there must be about a
+hundred clear of bush."
+
+"And how about the next lot, Mr. Mitford?"
+
+"I fancy that there is about the same proportion of open land. I have
+only once been up the river higher than this, but if I remember right
+there is a sort of low bluff rising forty or fifty feet above the river
+which would form a capital site for a hut."
+
+"I will set about the work of exploration this afternoon," Mr. Atherton
+said, "and if the next lot is anything like this I shall be very well
+contented to settle down upon it for a bit. I have always had a fancy
+for a sort of Robinson Crusoe life, and I think I can get it here,
+tempered by the change of an occasional visit to our friends when I get
+tired of my own company."
+
+The men had by this time brought up the basket of provisions, and the
+two girls were spreading a cloth on the grass in the shade of a tree at
+a short distance from the hut, for all agreed that they would rather
+take their lunch there than in the abode so lately tenanted by young
+Langston. After the meal was over the party mounted their horses and
+rode back. One of the natives who had come up from the boat remained
+with Mr. Atherton, the others started back in the boat, as Mr. Atherton
+declared himself to be perfectly capable of making the journey on foot
+when he had finished his explorations. He returned two days later, and
+said he was quite satisfied with the proposed site for his hut and with
+the ground and forest.
+
+"I regard myself as only a temporary inhabitant," he said, "and shall be
+well content if, when I am ready for another move, I can get as much for
+the ground as I gave for it. In that way I shall have lived rent free
+and shall have had my enjoyment for nothing, and, I have no doubt, a
+pleasant time to look back upon."
+
+"Do you never mean to settle down, Mr. Atherton?" Mrs. Mitford asked.
+
+[Illustration: WILFRID AND THE GRIMSTONES FIND IT HARD WORK
+
+_Page 197_]
+
+"In the dim future I may do so," he replied. "I have been wandering ever
+since I left college, some fifteen years ago. I return to London
+periodically, spend a few weeks and occasionally a few months there,
+enjoy the comforts of good living and club-life for a bit; then the
+wandering fit seizes me and I am off again. Nature altogether made a
+mistake in my case. I ought to have been a thin wiry sort of man, and in
+that case I have no doubt I should have distinguished myself as an
+African explorer or something of that sort. Unfortunately she placed my
+restless spirit in an almost immovable frame of flesh, and the
+consequence is the circle of my wandering is to a certain extent
+limited."
+
+"You make yourself out to be much stouter than you are, Mr. Atherton. Of
+course you are stout, but not altogether out of proportion to your
+height and width of shoulders. I think you put it on a good deal as an
+excuse for laziness."
+
+Mr. Atherton laughed. "Perhaps you are right, Mrs. Mitford, though my
+weight is really a great drawback to my carrying out my views in regard
+to travel. You see, I am practically debarred from travelling in
+countries where the only means of locomotion is riding on horses. I
+could not find animals in any foreign country that would carry me for
+any distances. I might in England, I grant, find a weight-carrying cob
+capable of conveying twenty stone along a good road, but I might search
+all Asia in vain for such a horse, while as for Africa, it would take a
+dozen natives to carry me in a hammock. No, I suppose I shall go on
+wandering pretty nearly to the end of the chapter, and shall then settle
+down in quiet lodgings somewhere in the region of Pall Mall."
+
+Upon the day after his return from the inspection of the farm Wilfrid
+wrote home to his father describing the location, and saying that he
+thought it was the very thing to suit them. It would be a fortnight
+before an answer could be received, and during that time he set to work
+at Mr. Mitford's place to acquire as much knowledge as possible of the
+methods of farming in the colony. The answer arrived in due course, and
+with it came the two Grimstones. Wilfrid had suggested in his letter
+that if his father decided to take the farm the two men should be sent
+up at once to assist in adding to the hut and in preparing for their
+coming, and that they should follow a fortnight later. Mrs. Mitford also
+wrote, offering them a warm invitation to stay for a time with her until
+their own place should be ready for their occupation.
+
+Mr. Mitford had an inventory of the furniture of the hut, and this was
+also sent, in order that such further furniture as was needed might be
+purchased at Wellington. As soon as the letter was received, inclosing,
+as it did, a cheque for a hundred pounds, Wilfrid went over with the two
+Grimstones and took possession. Mr. Mitford, who was the magistrate and
+land commissioner for the district, drew up the papers of application
+for the plot of two hundred acres adjoining the farm, and sent it to
+Wellington for Mr. Renshaw's signature, and said that in the meantime
+Wilfrid could consider the land as belonging to them, as it would be
+theirs as soon as the necessary formalities were completed and the money
+paid.
+
+When Wilfrid started, two natives, whom Mr. Mitford had hired for him,
+accompanied him, and he also lent him the services of one of his own
+men, who was a handy carpenter. The Grimstones were delighted with the
+site of their new home.
+
+"Why, it is like a bit of England, Master Wilfrid! That might very well
+be the Thames there, and this some gentleman's place near Reading; only
+the trees are different. When we get up a nice house here, with a garden
+round it, it will be like home again."
+
+During the voyage the Renshaws had amused themselves by drawing a plan
+of their proposed house, and although this had to be somewhat modified
+by the existence of the hut, Wilfrid determined to adhere to it as much
+as possible. The present kitchen should be the kitchen of the new house,
+and the room leading from it should be allotted to the Grimstones.
+Adjoining the kitchen he marked out the plan of the house. It was to
+consist of a sitting-room twenty feet square; beyond this was Mr. and
+Mrs. Renshaw's bed-room; while behind it were two rooms, each ten feet
+square, for himself and Marion. The roof was to project four feet in
+front of the sitting-room, so as to form a verandah there.
+
+A boat-load of supplies was sent up from Mr. Mitford's stores. These
+consisted of flour, sugar, tea, molasses, and bacon, together with half
+a sheep. It was arranged that while the building was going on Wilfrid
+and the two Grimstones should occupy the bed-room, and that the natives
+should sleep in the kitchen. The Grimstones had brought with them the
+bedding and blankets with which they had provided themselves on board
+ship, while Wilfrid took possession of the bed formerly occupied by the
+young settler. Mr. Mitford himself came over next morning and gave
+general instructions as to the best way of setting about the building of
+the house. He had already advised that it should be of the class known
+as log-huts.
+
+"They are much cooler," he said, "in the heat of summer than frame-huts,
+and have the advantage that in the very improbable event of troubles
+with the natives they are much more defensible. If you like, afterwards,
+you can easily face them outside and in with match-board and make them
+as snug as you like; but, to begin with, I should certainly say build
+with logs. My boy will tell you which trees you had better cut down for
+the work. It will take you a week to fell, lop, and roughly square them,
+and this day week I will send over a team of bullocks with a native to
+drag them up to the spot."
+
+The work was begun at once. Half a dozen axes, some adzes, and other
+tools had been brought up with the supplies from the stores, and the
+work of felling commenced.
+
+Wilfrid would not have any trees touched near the hut.
+
+"There are just enough trees about here," he said, "and it would be an
+awful pity to cut them down merely to save a little labour in hauling.
+It will not make any great difference whether we have the team for a
+week or a fortnight."
+
+Wilfrid and the two young Englishmen found chopping very hard work at
+first, and were perfectly astounded at the rapidity with which the
+Maoris brought the trees down, each of them felling some eight or ten
+before the new hands had managed to bring one to the ground.
+
+"I would not have believed it if I had not seen it," Bob, the elder of
+the two brothers, exclaimed as he stood breathless with the perspiration
+streaming from his forehead, "that these black chaps could have beaten
+Englishmen like that! Half a dozen strokes and down topples the tree,
+while I goes chop, chop, chop, and don't seem to get any nearer to it."
+
+"It will come in time," Wilfrid said. "I suppose there is a knack in it,
+like everything else. It looks easy enough, but it is not easy if you
+don't know how to do it. It is like rowing; it looks the easiest thing
+in the world until you try, and then you find that it is not easy at
+all."
+
+When work was done for the day Wilfrid and the Grimstones could scarcely
+walk back to the hut. Their backs felt as if they were broken, their
+arms and shoulders ached intolerably, their hands smarted as if on fire;
+while the Maoris, who had each achieved ten times the result, were as
+brisk and fresh as they were at starting. One of them had left work an
+hour before the others, and by the time they reached the hut the flat
+cakes of flour and water known as dampers had been cooked, and a large
+piece of mutton was frizzling over the fire. Wilfrid and his companions
+were almost too tired to eat, but they enjoyed the tea, although they
+missed the milk to which they were accustomed. They were astonished at
+the Maoris' appetite, the three natives devouring an amount of meat
+which would have lasted the others for a week.
+
+"No wonder they work well when they can put away such a lot of food as
+that," Bob Grimstone said, after watching them for some time in silent
+astonishment. "Bill and me was always considered as being pretty good
+feeders, but one of these chaps would eat twice as much as the two of
+us. I should say, Mr. Wilfrid, that in future your best plan will be to
+let these chaps board themselves. Why, it would be dear to have them
+without pay if you had to feed them!"
+
+"Mutton is cheap out here," Wilfrid said. "You can get five or six
+pounds for the price which one would cost you at home; but still, I do
+not suppose they give them as much meat as they can eat every day. I
+must ask Mr. Mitford about it."
+
+He afterwards learned that the natives received rations of flour and
+molasses and tobacco, and that only occasionally salt pork or fresh meat
+were issued to them. But Mr. Mitford advised that Wilfrid should, as
+long as they were at this work, let them feed with the men.
+
+"You will get a good deal more out of them if they are well fed and in
+good humour. When your people arrive the natives will of course have a
+shanty of their own at some distance from your house, and then you will
+put things on regular footing and serve out their rations to them
+weekly. I will give you the scale usually adopted in the colony."
+
+The second day Wilfrid and the Grimstones were so stiff that they could
+at first scarcely raise their axes. This gradually wore off, and at the
+end of three or four days they found that they could get through a far
+greater amount than at first with much less fatigue to themselves; but
+even on the last day of the week they could do little more than a third
+of the amount performed by the natives. By this time an ample supply of
+trees had been felled. The trunks had been cut into suitable lengths and
+roughly squared. The bullocks arrived from Mr. Mitford's, and as soon as
+the first logs were brought up to the house the work of building was
+commenced. The Maori carpenter now took the lead, and under his
+instructions the walls of the house rose rapidly. The logs were mortised
+into each other at the corners; openings were left for the doors and
+windows. These were obtained from Mr. Mitford's store, as they were
+constantly required by settlers.
+
+At a distance of four feet in front of the house holes were dug and
+poles erected, and to these the framework of the roof was extended. This
+point was reached ten days after the commencement of the building, and
+the same evening a native arrived from Mr. Mitford's with a message that
+the party from Wellington had arrived there and would come over the next
+day. He also brought a letter to Wilfrid from the Allens, in answer to
+one he had written them soon after his arrival, saying that they were so
+pleased with his description of the district they should come down at
+once, and, if it turned out as he described it, take up a tract of land
+in his neighbourhood.
+
+While Wilfrid had been at work he had seen Mr. Atherton several times,
+as that gentleman had, upon the very day after his first trip up the
+river, filled up the necessary papers, hired half a dozen natives, and
+started up the river in a boat freighted with stores to his new
+location. Wilfrid had not had time to go over to see him there, but he
+had several times sauntered over from his place, which was half a mile
+distant, after the day's work was over. He had got up his hut before
+Wilfrid fairly got to work.
+
+It was, he said, a very modest shanty with but one room, which would
+serve for all purposes; his cooking being done by a native, for whom he
+had erected a small shelter twenty yards away from his own.
+
+"I have not quite shaken down yet," he said, "and do not press you to
+come over to see me until I have got everything into order. I am sure
+you feel thankful to me that I do not expect you to be tramping over to
+see me after your long day's work here. By the time your people arrive I
+shall have everything in order. I am expecting the things I have written
+for and my own heavy baggage in a few days from Wellington."
+
+Glad as he was to hear that his father and mother had arrived, Wilfrid
+would have preferred that their coming should have been delayed until
+the house was finished and ready for them, and after his first greeting
+at the water side he said: "You must not be disappointed, mother, at
+what you will see. Now everything is in confusion, and the ground is
+covered with logs and chips. It looked much prettier, I can assure you,
+when I first saw it, and it will do so again when we have finished and
+cleared up."
+
+"We will make all allowances, Wilfrid," his mother replied as he helped
+her from the boat; "but I do not see that any allowance is necessary.
+This is indeed a sweetly pretty spot, and looks as you said like a park
+at home. If the trees had been planted with a special view to effect
+they could not have been better placed."
+
+"You have done excellently, Wilfrid," his father said, putting his hand
+on his shoulder. "Mr. Mitford here has been telling me how energetically
+you have been working, and I see that the house has made wonderful
+progress."
+
+Marion had, after the first greeting, leapt lightly from the boat and
+run up to the house, towards which the others proceeded at a more
+leisurely pace, stopping often and looking round at the pleasant
+prospect. Marion was full of questions to Wilfrid when they arrived. Why
+were the walls made so thick? How were they going to stop up the
+crevices between the logs? Where were the windows and doors coming from?
+What was the roof going to be made of? Was there going to be a floor, or
+was the ground inside going to be raised to the level of the door-sill?
+When did he expect to get it finished, and when would they be ready to
+come in? Couldn't they get some creepers to run up and hide these ugly
+logs? Was it to be painted or to remain as it was?
+
+Wilfrid answered all these questions as well as he was able. There was
+to be a floor over all the new portion of the building; Mr. Mitford was
+getting up the requisite number of planks from a saw-mill at the next
+settlement. The crevices were to be stopped with moss. It would be for
+their father to decide whether the logs should be covered with
+match-boarding inside or out, or whether they should be left as they
+were for the present. It would probably take another fortnight to finish
+the roof, and at least a week beyond that before the place would be fit
+for them to move in.
+
+"You see, Marion, I have built it very much on the plan we decided upon
+on board the ship, only I was obliged to make a change in the position
+of the kitchen and men's room. The two Grimstones are going to set to
+work to-morrow to dig up a portion of the ploughed land behind the house
+and sow vegetable seeds. Things grow very fast here, and we shall soon
+get a kitchen-garden. As to flowers, we shall leave that to be decided
+when you come here."
+
+"I wish I could come over and live here at once and help," Marion said.
+
+"There is nothing you can help in at present, Marion, and it will be
+much more useful for you to spend a month in learning things at Mr.
+Mitford's. You undertook to do the cooking; and I am sure that will be
+quite necessary, for father and mother could never eat the food our
+Maori cook turns out. And then you have got to learn to make butter and
+cheese and to cure bacon. That is a most important point, for we must
+certainly keep pigs and cure our own as Mr. Mitford does, for the stuff
+they have got at most of the places we touched at was almost uneatable.
+So, you see, there is plenty to occupy your time until you move in here,
+and our comfort will depend a vast deal upon the pains you take to learn
+to do things properly."
+
+"What are you going to roof it with, Wilfrid?" Mr. Renshaw asked.
+
+"We are going to use these poles, father. They will be split in two and
+nailed with the flat side down on the rafters, and the shingles are
+going to be nailed on them. That will give a good solid roof that will
+keep out a good deal of heat. Afterwards if we like we can put beams
+across the room from wall to wall and plank them, and turn the space
+above into a storeroom. Of course that will make the house cooler and
+the rooms more comfortable, but as it was not absolutely necessary I
+thought it might be left for a while."
+
+"I think, Wilfrid, I should like to have the rooms done with boards
+inside at once. The outside and the ceiling you speak of can very well
+wait, but it will be impossible to get the rooms to look at all neat and
+tidy with these rough logs for walls."
+
+"It certainly will be more comfortable," Wilfrid agreed. "Mr. Mitford
+will get the match-boards for you. I will measure up the walls this
+evening and let you know how much will be required. And now shall we
+take a walk round the place?" The whole party spent a couple of hours in
+going over the property, with which Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw were greatly
+pleased. Luncheon had been brought up in the boat, and by the time they
+returned from their walk Mrs. Mitford and her daughters, who had not
+accompanied them, had lunch ready and spread out on the grass. The meal
+was a merry one. Mr. Renshaw was in high spirits at finding things so
+much more home-like and comfortable than he had expected. His wife was
+not only pleased for herself, but still more so at seeing that her
+husband evinced a willingness to look at matters in the best light, and
+to enter upon the life before him without regret over the past.
+
+"What are you going to call the place, Mr. Renshaw?" Mrs. Mitford asked.
+"That is always an important point."
+
+"I have not thought about it," Mr. Renshaw replied. "What do you think?"
+
+"Oh, there are lots of suitable names," she replied, looking round. "We
+might call it Riverside or The Park or The Glade."
+
+"I think The Glade would be very pretty," Marion said; "Riverside would
+suit so many places."
+
+"I like The Glade too," Mrs. Renshaw said. "Have you thought of
+anything, Wilfrid?"
+
+"No, mother, I have never given it a thought. I think The Glade will do
+nicely." And so it was settled, and success to The Glade was thereupon
+formally drunk in cups of tea.
+
+A month later the Renshaws took possession of their new abode. It looked
+very neat with its verandah in front of the central portion, and the
+creepers which Wilfrid had planted against the walls on the day after
+their visit, promised speedily to cover the logs of which the house was
+built. Inside the flooring had been planed, stained a deep brown and
+varnished, while the match-boarding which covered the walls was stained
+a light colour and also varnished. The furniture, which had arrived the
+day before from Hawke's Bay was somewhat scanty, but Wilfrid and Marion,
+who had come over for the purpose, had made the most of it. A square of
+carpet and some rugs gave a cosy appearance to the floor, white curtains
+hung before the windows and a few favourite pictures and engravings,
+which they had brought with them from home, broke the bareness of the
+walls. Altogether it was a very pretty and snug little abode of which
+Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw took possession.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI.
+
+THE HAU-HAUS.
+
+
+The next three months made a great change in the appearance of The
+Glade. Three or four plots of gay flowers cut in the grass between the
+house and the river gave a brightness to its appearance. The house was
+now covered as far as the roof with greenery, and might well have been
+mistaken for a rustic bungalow standing in pretty grounds on the banks
+of the Thames. Behind, a large kitchen-garden was in full bearing. It
+was surrounded by wire network to keep out the chickens, ducks, and
+geese, which wandered about and picked up a living as they chose,
+returning at night to the long low shed erected for them at some
+distance from the house, receiving a plentiful meal on their arrival to
+prevent them from lapsing into an altogether wild condition.
+
+Forty acres of land had been reploughed and sown, and the crops had
+already made considerable progress. In the more distant clearings a
+dozen horses, twenty or thirty cows, and a small flock of a hundred
+sheep grazed, while some distance up the glade in which the house stood
+was the pig-sty, whose occupants were fed with refuse from the garden,
+picking up, however, the larger portion of their living by rooting in
+the woods.
+
+Long before Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw moved into the house, Wilfrid, whose
+labours were now less severe, had paid his first visit to Mr. Atherton's
+hut. He was at once astonished and delighted with it. It contained
+indeed but the one room, sixteen feet square, but that room had been
+made one of the most comfortable dens possible. There was no flooring,
+but the ground had been beaten until it was as hard as baked clay, and
+was almost covered with rugs and sheep-skins; a sort of divan ran round
+three sides of it, and this was also cushioned with skins. The log walls
+were covered with cow-hides cured with the hair on, and from hooks and
+brackets hung rifles, fishing-rods, and other articles, while horns and
+other trophies of the chase were fixed to the walls.
+
+While the Renshaws had contented themselves with stoves, Mr. Atherton
+had gone to the expense and trouble of having a great open fireplace,
+with a brick chimney outside the wall. Here, even on the hottest day,
+two or three logs burnt upon old-fashioned iron dogs. On the wall above
+was a sort of trophy of oriental weapons. Two very large and comfortable
+easy chairs stood by the side of the hearth, and in the centre of the
+room stood an old oak table, richly carved and black with age. A
+book-case of similar age and make, with its shelves well filled with
+standard works, stood against the one wall unoccupied by the divan.
+
+Wilfrid stood still with astonishment as he looked in at the door, which
+Mr. Atherton had himself opened in response to his knock.
+
+"Come in, Wilfrid. As I told you yesterday evening I have just got
+things a little straight and comfortable."
+
+"I should think you had got them comfortable," Wilfrid said. "I should
+not have thought that a log cabin could have been made as pretty as
+this. Why, where did you get all the things? Surely you can never have
+brought them all with you?"
+
+"No, indeed," Mr. Atherton laughed; "the greatest portion of them are
+products of the country. There was no difficulty in purchasing the
+skins, the arms, and those sets of horns and trophies. Books and a few
+other things I brought with me. I have a theory that people very often
+make themselves uncomfortable merely to effect the saving of a pound or
+two. Now, I rather like making myself snug, and the carriage of all
+those things did not add above five pounds to my expenses."
+
+"But surely that table and book-case were never made in New Zealand?"
+
+"Certainly not, Wilfrid. At the time they were made the natives of this
+country hunted the Moa in happy ignorance of the existence of a white
+race. No, I regard my getting possession of those things as a special
+stroke of good luck. I was wandering in the streets of Wellington on the
+very day after my arrival, when I saw them in a shop. No doubt they had
+been brought out by some well-to-do emigrant, who clung to them in
+remembrance of his home in the old country. Probably at his death his
+place came into the hands of some Goths, who preferred a clean deal
+table to what he considered old-fashioned things. Anyhow, there they
+were in the shop, and I bought them at once; as also those arm-chairs,
+which are as comfortable as anything of the kind I have ever tried. By
+the way, are you a good shot with the rifle, Wilfrid?"
+
+"No, sir; I never fired a rifle in my life before I left England, nor a
+shot-gun either."
+
+"Then I think you would do well to practise, lad; and those two men of
+yours should practise too. You never can say what may come of these
+native disturbances; the rumours of the progress of this new religion
+among them are not encouraging. It is quite true that the natives on
+this side of the island have hitherto been perfectly peaceable, but if
+they get inoculated with this new religious frenzy there is no saying
+what may happen. I will speak to your father about it. Not in a way to
+alarm him; but I will point out that it is of no use your having brought
+out firearms if none of you know how to use them, and suggest that it
+will be a good thing if you and the men were to make a point of firing a
+dozen shots every morning at a mark. I shall add that he himself might
+just as well do so, and that even the ladies might find it an amusement,
+using, of course, a light rifle, or firing from a rest with an ordinary
+rifle with light charges, or that they might practice with revolvers.
+Anyhow, it is certainly desirable that you and your father and the men
+should learn to be good shots with these weapons. I will gladly come
+over at first and act as musketry instructor."
+
+Wilfrid embraced the idea eagerly, and Mr. Atherton on the occasion of
+his first visit to The Glade in a casual sort of way remarked to Mr.
+Renshaw that he thought every white man and woman in the outlying
+colonies ought to be able to use firearms, as, although they might never
+be called upon to use them in earnest, the knowledge that they could do
+so with effect would greatly add to their feeling of security and
+comfort. Mr. Renshaw at once took up the idea and accepted the other's
+offer to act as instructor. Accordingly, as soon as the Renshaws were
+established upon their farm, it became one of the standing rules of the
+place that Wilfrid and the two men should fire twelve shots at a mark
+every morning before starting for their regular work at the farm.
+
+The target was a figure roughly cut out of wood, representing the size
+and to some extent the outline of a man's figure.
+
+"It is much better to accustom yourself to fire at a mark of this kind
+than to practise always at a target," Mr. Atherton said. "A man may
+shoot wonderfully well at a black mark in the centre of a white square,
+and yet make very poor practice at a human figure with its dull shades
+of colour and irregular outline."
+
+"But we shall not be able to tell where our bullets hit," Wilfrid said;
+"especially after the dummy has been hit a good many times."
+
+"It is not very material where you hit a man, Wilfrid, so that you do
+hit him. If a man gets a heavy bullet, whether in an arm, a leg, or the
+body, there is no more fight in him. You can tell by the sound of the
+bullet if you hit the figure, and if you hit him you have done what you
+want to. You do not need to practise at distances over three hundred
+yards; that is quite the outside range at which you would ever want to
+do any shooting, indeed from fifty to two hundred I consider the useful
+distance to practise at. If you get to shoot so well that you can with
+certainty hit a man between those ranges, you may feel pretty
+comfortable in your mind that you can beat off any attack that might be
+made on a house you are defending.
+
+"When you have learnt to do this at the full-size figure you can put it
+in a bush so that only the head and shoulders are visible, as would be
+those of a native standing up to fire. All this white target-work is
+very well for shooting for prizes, but if troops were trained to fire at
+dummy figures at from fifty to two hundred yards distance, and allowed
+plenty of ammunition for practice and kept steadily at it, you would see
+that a single company would be more than a match for a whole regiment
+trained as our soldiers are."
+
+With steady practice every morning, Wilfrid and the two young men made
+very rapid progress, and at the end of three months it was very seldom
+that a bullet was thrown away. Sometimes Mr. Renshaw joined them in
+their practice, but he more often fired a few shots some time during the
+day with Marion, who became quite an enthusiast in the exercise. Mrs.
+Renshaw declined to practise, and said that she was content to remain a
+non-combatant, and would undertake the work of binding up wounds and
+loading muskets. On Saturday afternoons, when the men left off work
+somewhat earlier than usual, there was always shooting for small prizes.
+Twelve shots were fired by each at a figure placed in the bushes a
+hundred yards away, with only the head and shoulders visible. After each
+had fired, the shot-holes were counted and then filled up with mud, so
+that the next marks made were easily distinguishable.
+
+Mr. Renshaw was uniformly last. The Grimstones and Marion generally ran
+each other very close, each putting eight or nine of their bullets into
+the figure. Wilfrid was always handicapped two shots, but as he
+generally put the whole of his ten bullets into the mark, he was in the
+majority of cases the victor. The shooting party was sometimes swelled
+by the presence of Mr. Atherton and the two Allens, who had arrived a
+fortnight after the Renshaws, and had taken up the section of land next
+below them. Mr. Atherton was incomparably the best shot of the party.
+Wilfrid, indeed, seldom missed, but he took careful and steady aim at
+the object, while Mr. Atherton fired apparently without waiting to take
+aim at all. Sometimes he would not even lift his gun to his shoulder,
+but would fire from his side, or standing with his back to the mark
+would turn round and fire instantaneously.
+
+"That sort of thing is only attained by long practice," he would say in
+answer to Wilfrid's exclamations of astonishment. "You see, I have been
+shooting in different parts of the world and at different sorts of game
+for some fifteen years, and in many cases quick shooting is of just as
+much importance as straight shooting."
+
+But it was with the revolver that Mr. Atherton most surprised his
+friends. He could put six bullets into half a sheet of note-paper at a
+distance of fifty yards, firing with such rapidity that the weapon was
+emptied in two or three seconds.
+
+"I learned that," he said, "among the cow-boys in the West. Some of them
+are perfectly marvellous shots. It is their sole amusement, and they
+spend no inconsiderable portion of their pay on cartridges. It seems to
+become an instinct with them, however small the object at which they
+fire they are almost certain to hit it. It is a common thing with them
+for one man to throw an empty meat-tin into the air and for another to
+put six bullets in before it touches the ground. So certain are they of
+their own and each others' aim, that one will hold a halfpenny between
+his finger and thumb for another to fire at from a distance of twenty
+yards, and it is a common joke for one to knock another's pipe out of
+his mouth when he is quietly smoking.
+
+"As you see, though my shooting seems to you wonderful, I should be
+considered quite a poor shot among the cow-boys. Of course, with
+incessant practice such as they have I should shoot a good deal better
+than I do; but I could never approach their perfection, for the simple
+reason that I have not the strength of wrist. They pass their lives in
+riding half-broken horses, and incessant exercise and hard work harden
+them until their muscles are like steel, and they scarcely feel what to
+an ordinary man is a sharp wrench from the recoil of a heavily-loaded
+Colt."
+
+Life was in every way pleasant at The Glade. The work of breaking up the
+land went on steadily, but the labour, though hard, was not excessive.
+In the evening the Allens or Mr. Atherton frequently dropped in, and
+occasionally Mr. Mitford and his daughters rode over, or the party came
+up in the boat. The expense of living was small. They had an ample
+supply of potatoes and other vegetables from their garden, of eggs from
+their poultry, and of milk, butter, and cheese from their cows. While
+salt meat was the staple of their food, it was varied occasionally by
+chicken, ducks, or a goose, while a sheep now and then afforded a week's
+supply of fresh meat.
+
+Mr. Renshaw had not altogether abandoned his original idea. He had
+already learnt something of the Maori language from his studies on the
+voyage, and he rapidly acquired a facility of speaking it from his
+conversations with the two natives permanently employed on the farm. One
+of these was a man of some forty years old named Wetini, the other was a
+lad of sixteen, his son, whose name was Whakapanakai, but as this name
+was voted altogether too long for conversational purposes he was
+re-christened Jack.
+
+Wetini spoke but a few words of English, but Jack, who had been educated
+at one of the mission schools, spoke it fluently. They, with Wetini's
+wife, inhabited a small hut situated at the edge of the wood, at a
+distance of about two hundred yards from the house. It was Mr. Renshaw's
+custom to stroll over there of an evening, and seating himself by the
+fire, which however hot the weather the natives always kept burning, he
+would converse with Wetini upon the manners and customs, the religious
+beliefs and ceremonies, of his people.
+
+In these conversations Jack at first acted as interpreter, but it was
+not many weeks before Mr. Renshaw gained such proficiency in the tongue
+that such assistance was no longer needed.
+
+But the period of peace and tranquillity at The Glade was but a short
+one. Wilfrid learnt from Jack, who had attached himself specially to
+him, that there were reports among the natives that the prophet Te Ua
+was sending out missionaries all over the island. This statement was
+true. Te Ua had sent out four sub-prophets with orders to travel among
+the tribes and inform them that Te Ua had been appointed by an angel as
+a prophet, that he was to found a new religion to be called Pai Marire,
+and that legions of angels waited the time when, all the tribes having
+been converted, a general rising would take place, and the Pakeha be
+annihilated by the assistance of these angels, after which a knowledge
+of all languages and of all the arts and sciences would be bestowed upon
+the Pai Marire.
+
+Had Te Ua's instructions been carried out, and his agents travelled
+quietly among the tribes, carefully abstaining from all open hostility
+to the whites until the whole of the native population had been
+converted, the rising when it came would have been a terrible one, and
+might have ended in the whole of the white population being either
+destroyed or forced for a time to abandon the island. Fortunately the
+sub-prophets were men of ferocious character. Too impatient to await the
+appointed time, they attacked the settlers as soon as they collected
+sufficient converts to do so, and so they brought about the destruction
+of their leaders' plans.
+
+These attacks put the colonists on their guard, enabled the authorities
+to collect troops and stand on the defensive, and, what was still more
+important, caused many of the tribes which had not been converted to the
+Pai Marire faith to range themselves on the side of the English. Not
+because they loved the whites, but because from time immemorial the
+tribes had been divided against each other, and their traditional
+hostility weighed more with them than their jealousy with the white
+settlers.
+
+Still, although these rumours as to the spread of the Pai Marire or
+Hau-Hau faith reached the ears of the settlers, there were few in the
+western provinces who believed that there was any real danger. The
+Maoris had always been peaceful and friendly with them, and they could
+not believe that those with whom they had dwelt so long could suddenly
+and without any reason become bloodthirsty enemies.
+
+Wilfrid said nothing to his parents as to what he had heard from Jack,
+but he talked it over with Mr. Atherton and the Allens. The latter were
+disposed to make light of it, but Mr. Atherton took the matter
+seriously.
+
+"There is never any saying how things will go with the natives," he
+said. "All savages seem to be alike. Up to a certain point they are
+intelligent and sensible; but they are like children; they are easily
+excited, superstitious in the extreme, and can be deceived without the
+slightest difficulty by designing people. Of course to us this story of
+Te Ua's sounds absolutely absurd, but that is no reason why it should
+appear absurd to them. These people have embraced a sort of
+Christianity, and they have read of miracles of all sorts, and will have
+no more difficulty in believing that the angels could destroy all the
+Europeans in their island than that the Assyrian army was miraculously
+destroyed before Jerusalem.
+
+"Without taking too much account of the business, I think, Wilfrid, that
+it will be just as well if all of us in these outlying settlements take
+a certain amount of precautions. I shall write down at once to my agent
+at Hawke Bay asking him to buy me a couple of dogs and send them up by
+the next ship. I shall tell him that it does not matter what sort of
+dogs they are so that they are good watch-dogs, though, of course, I
+should prefer that they should be decent dogs of their sort, dogs one
+could make companions of. I should advise you to do the same.
+
+"I shall ask Mr. Mitford to get me up at once a heavy door and shutters
+for the window strong enough to stand an assault. Here again I should
+advise you to do the same. You can assign any reason you like to your
+father. With a couple of dogs to give the alarm, with a strong door and
+shutters, you need not be afraid of being taken by surprise, and it is
+only a surprise that you have in the first place to fear. Of course if
+there were to be anything like a general rising we should all have to
+gather at some central spot agreed upon, or else to quit the settlement
+altogether until matters settle down. Still, I trust that nothing of
+that sort will take place. At any rate, all we have to fear and prepare
+against at present is an attack by small parties of fanatics."
+
+Wilfrid had no difficulty in persuading his father to order a strong oak
+door and shutters for the windows, and to get a couple of dogs. He began
+the subject by saying: "Mr. Atherton is going to get some strong
+shutters to his window, father. I think it would be a good thing if we
+were to get the same for our windows."
+
+"What do we want shutters for, Wilfrid?"
+
+"For just the same reason that we have been learning to use our
+firearms, father. We do not suppose that the natives, who are all
+friendly with us, are going to turn treacherous. Still, as there is a
+bare possibility of such a thing, we have taken some pains in learning
+to shoot straight. In the same way it would be just as well to have
+strong shutters put up. We don't at all suppose we are going to be
+attacked, but if we are the shutters would be invaluable, and would
+effectually prevent anything like a night surprise. The expense wouldn't
+be great, and in the unlikely event of the natives being troublesome in
+this part of this island we should all sleep much more soundly and
+comfortably if we knew that there was no fear of our being taken by
+surprise. Mr. Atherton is sending for a couple of dogs too. I have
+always thought that it would be jolly to have a dog or two here, and if
+we do not want them as guards they would be pleasant as companions when
+one is going about the place."
+
+A few days after the arrival of two large watch-dogs and of the heavy
+shutters and door, Mr. Mitford rode in to The Glade. He chatted for a
+few minutes on ordinary subjects, and then Mrs. Renshaw said: "Is
+anything the matter, Mr. Mitford? you look more serious than usual."
+
+"I can hardly say that anything is exactly the matter, Mrs. Renshaw; but
+I had a batch of newspapers and letters from Wellington this morning,
+and they give rather stirring news. The Hau-Haus have come into
+collision with us again. You know that a fortnight since we had news
+that they had attacked a party of our men under Captain Lloyd and
+defeated them, and, contrary to all native traditions, had cut off the
+heads of the slain, among whom was Captain Lloyd himself. I was afraid
+that after this we should soon hear more of them, and my opinion has
+been completely justified. On the 1st of May two hundred of the Ngataiwa
+tribe, and three hundred other natives under Te Ua's prophet Hepanaia
+and Parengi-Kingi of Taranaki, attacked a strong fort on Sentry Hill,
+garrisoned by fifty men of the 52d Regiment under Major Short.
+
+"The Ngataiwa took no part in the action, but the Hau-Haus charged with
+great bravery. The garrison, fortunately being warned by their yells of
+what was coming, received them with such a heavy fire that their leading
+ranks were swept away, and they fell back in confusion. They made a
+second charge, which was equally unsuccessful, and then fell back with a
+loss of fifty-two killed, among whom were both the Hau-Hau prophet and
+Parengi-Kingi.
+
+"The other affair has taken place in the Wellington district. Matene,
+another of the Hau-Hau prophets, came down to Pipiriki, a tribe of the
+Wanganui. These people were bitterly hostile to us, as they had taken
+part in some of the former fighting, and their chief and thirty-six of
+his men were killed. The tribe at once accepted the new faith. Mr.
+Booth, the resident magistrate, who was greatly respected among them,
+went up to try to smooth matters down, but was seized, and would have
+been put to death if it had not been for the interference in his favour
+of a young chief named Hori Patene, who managed to get him and his wife
+and children safely down in a canoe to the town of Wanganui. The
+Hau-Haus prepared to move down the river to attack the town, and sent
+word to the Ngatihau branch of the tribe who lived down the river to
+join them. They and two other of the Wanganui tribes living on the lower
+part of the river refused to do so, and also refused to let them pass
+down the river, and sent a challenge for a regular battle to take place
+on the island of Moutoa in the river.
+
+"The challenge was accepted. At dawn on the following morning our
+natives, three hundred and fifty strong, proceeded to the appointed
+ground. A hundred picked men crossed on to the island, and the rest
+remained on the banks as spectators. Of the hundred, fifty, divided into
+three parties each under a chief, formed the advance guard, while the
+other fifty remained in reserve at the end of the island two hundred
+yards away, and too far to be of much use in the event of the advance
+guard being defeated. The enemy's party were a hundred and thirty
+strong, and it is difficult to understand why a larger body was not sent
+over to the island to oppose them, especially as the belief in the
+invulnerability of the Hau-Haus was generally believed in, even by the
+natives opposed to them.
+
+"It was a curious fight, quite in the manner of the traditional warfare
+between the various tribes before our arrival on the island. The lower
+tribesmen fought, not for the defence of the town, for they were not
+very friendly with the Europeans, having been strong supporters of the
+king party, but simply for the prestige of the tribe. No hostile war
+party had ever forced the river, and none ever should do so. The
+Hau-Haus came down the river in their canoes and landed without
+opposition. Then a party of the Wanganui advance guard fired. Although
+the Hau-Haus were but thirty yards distant none of them fell, and their
+return volley killed the chiefs of two out of the three sections of the
+advance guard and many others.
+
+"Disheartened by the loss of their chiefs, the two sections gave way,
+shouting that the Hau-Haus were invulnerable. The third section, well
+led by their chief, held their ground, but were driven slowly back by
+the overwhelming force of the enemy. The battle appeared to be lost,
+when Tamehana, the sub-chief of one of the flying sections, after vainly
+trying to rally his men, arrived on the ground, and, refusing to obey
+the order to take cover from the Hau-Haus' fire, dashed at the enemy and
+killed two of them with his double-barrelled gun. The last of the three
+leaders was at this moment shot dead. Nearly all his men were more or
+less severely wounded, but as the Hau-Haus rushed forward they fired a
+volley into them at close quarters, killing several. But they still came
+on, when Tamehana again rushed at them. Seizing the spear of a dead man
+he drove it into the heart of a Hau-Hau. Catching up the gun and
+tomahawk of the fallen man, he drove the latter so deeply into the head
+of another foe that in wrenching it out the handle was broken. Finding
+that the gun was unloaded, he dashed it in the face of his foes, and
+snatching up another he was about to fire, when a bullet struck him in
+the arm. Nevertheless he fired and killed his man, but the next moment
+was brought to the ground by a bullet that shattered his knee.
+
+"At this moment Hainoma, who commanded the reserve, came up with them,
+with the fugitives whom he had succeeded in rallying. They fired a
+volley, and then charged down upon the Hau-Haus with their tomahawks.
+After a desperate fight the enemy were driven in confusion to the upper
+end of the island, where they rushed into the water and attempted to
+swim to the right bank. The prophet was recognized among the swimmers.
+One of the Wanganui plunged in after him, overtook him just as he
+reached the opposite bank, and in spite of the prophet uttering the
+magic words that should have paralysed his assailant, killed him with
+his tomahawk and swam back with the body to Hainoma."
+
+"They seem to have been two serious affairs," Mr. Renshaw said; "but as
+the Hau-Haus were defeated in each we may hope that we have heard the
+last of them, for as both the prophets were killed the belief in the
+invulnerability of Te Ua's followers must be at an end."
+
+"I wish I could think so," Mr. Mitford said; "but it is terribly hard to
+kill a superstition. Te Ua will of course say that the two prophets
+disobeyed his positive instructions and thus brought their fate upon
+themselves, and the incident may therefore rather strengthen than
+decrease his influence. The best part of the business in my mind is that
+some of the tribes have thrown in their lot on our side, or if not
+actually on our side at any rate against the Hau-Haus. After this we
+need hardly fear any general action of the natives against us. There are
+all sorts of obscure alliances between the tribes arising from
+marriages, or from their having fought on the same side in some far-back
+struggle. The result is that the tribes who have these alliances with
+the Wanganui will henceforth range themselves on the same side, or will
+at any rate hold aloof from this Pai Marire movement. This will also
+force other tribes, who might have been willing to join in a general
+movement, to stand neutral, and I think now, that although we may have a
+great deal of trouble with Te Ua's followers, we may regard any absolute
+danger to the European population of the island as past.
+
+"There may, I fear, be isolated massacres, for the Hau-Haus, with their
+cutting off of heads and carrying them about, have introduced an
+entirely new and savage feature into Maori warfare. I was inclined to
+think the precautions you and Atherton are taking were rather
+superfluous, but after this I shall certainly adopt them myself.
+Everything is perfectly quiet here, but when we see how readily a whole
+tribe embrace the new religion as soon as a prophet arrives, and are
+ready at once to massacre a man who had long dwelt among them, and for
+whom they had always evinced the greatest respect and liking, it is
+impossible any longer to feel confident that the natives in this part of
+the country are to be relied upon as absolutely friendly and
+trustworthy.
+
+"I am sorry now that I have been to some extent the means of inducing
+you all to settle here. At the time I gave my advice things seemed
+settling down at the other end of the island, and this Hau-Hau movement
+reached us only as a vague rumour, and seemed so absurd in itself that
+one attached no importance to it."
+
+"Pray do not blame yourself, Mr. Mitford; whatever comes of it we are
+delighted with the choice we have made. We are vastly more comfortable
+than we had expected to be in so short a time, and things look
+promising far beyond our expectations. As you say, you could have had no
+reason to suppose that this absurd movement was going to lead to such
+serious consequences. Indeed you could have no ground for supposing that
+it was likely to cause trouble on this side of the island, far removed
+as we are from the scene of the troubles. Even now these are in fact
+confined to the district where fighting has been going on for the last
+three or four years--Taranaki and its neighbourhood; for the Wanganui
+River, although it flows into the sea in the north of the Wellington
+district, rises in that of Taranaki, and the tribes who became Hau-Haus
+and came down the river had already taken part in the fighting with our
+troops. I really see no reason, therefore, for fearing that it will
+spread in this direction."
+
+"There is no reason whatever," Mr. Mitford agreed; "only, unfortunately,
+the natives seldom behave as we expect them to do, and generally act
+precisely as we expect they will not act. At any rate I shall set to
+work at once to construct a strong stockade at the back of my house. I
+have long been talking of forming a large cattle-yard there, so that it
+will not in any case be labour thrown away, while if trouble should come
+it will serve as a rallying-place to which all the settlers of the
+district can drive in their horses and cattle for shelter, and where
+they can if attacked hold their own against all the natives of the
+districts."
+
+"I really think you are looking at it in almost too serious a light, Mr.
+Mitford; still, the fact that there is such a rallying-place in the
+neighbourhood will of course add to our comfort in case we should hear
+alarming rumours."
+
+"Quite so, Mr. Renshaw. My idea is there is nothing like being prepared,
+and though I agree with you that there is little chance of trouble in
+this remote settlement, it is just as well to take precautions against
+the worst."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII.
+
+THE FIRST ALARM.
+
+
+One morning Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw went down to spend a long day with the
+Mitfords. The latter had sent up the boat over-night, and they started
+the first thing in the morning. For the two or three days previous Jack,
+the young native, had more than once spoken to Wilfrid of the propriety
+of the hands keeping near the house, but Wilfrid had failed to obtain
+from him any specific reasons for the warning.
+
+"Bad men come down from Waikato," he said. "Much talkee talkee among
+natives."
+
+"But what do they talk about, Jack?"
+
+Jack shook his head. "Jack no hear talkee. Men come to hut and talk with
+father. Other Maoris on land steal in and talk too, but no talk before
+Jack; always turn him out or send him on errand. But Jack hear sometimes
+a word, and think that trouble come. Young master better not go far away
+by himself, and tell two white men to keep close to hut. Perhaps nothing
+come, but better to be on guard."
+
+"Very well, Jack; I am obliged to you for the warning. I will tell the
+Grimstones not to go out to the outlying clearings, but to occupy
+themselves with what they can find to do near home."
+
+Jack nodded. "That best, Master Wilfrid, but no talk too much with me.
+If my people thought I speak to you then trouble come to Jack."
+
+Wilfrid nodded, and without saying anything to his father and mother
+told the Grimstones to keep near the house. "After you have done
+shooting of a morning," he said, "instead of bringing your guns into the
+house as usual take them down with you to the place where you are at
+work, so that they will be handy in case of necessity. Most likely there
+is no danger whatever; but I have heard a rumour that some people from
+Waikato have come into this neighbourhood, and if so no doubt they are
+trying to get the tribes here to join the Hau-Haus. I do not think that
+there is much chance of their succeeding, for the natives have always
+been very friendly, and there has been no dispute about land or any
+other grievance; but when one knows how suddenly they have risen in
+other places, it is better to take precautions."
+
+After breakfast on the morning when his father and mother had started,
+Wilfrid strolled out on to the verandah, and stood for some little time
+hesitating what he should do. The Grimstones had just started to look up
+some cattle in one of the distant clearings, one of the native hands
+having reported the evening before two of the animals were missing.
+
+"I will go not far till they come back," he said to himself. "The garden
+wants hoeing. Weeds grow as fast here as they do at home. That will be
+just the job for me." He was about to turn to enter the house, when he
+saw four natives emerge from the trees and make towards him.
+
+"Marion," he said through the open door, "get the guns down from the
+rack, and see that they are capped and ready. There are four natives
+coming towards the house. I daresay they are friendly, and are probably
+only on the way down the river to look for work, still as we are alone
+you cannot be too careful."
+
+Hearing Marion reply "All right, Wilfrid!" the lad leant against the
+door in a careless attitude, and awaited the coming of the natives. As
+they approached he saw they were all strangers to him, although he knew
+most of the natives in the neighbourhood by sight, for these not
+infrequently came in to barter a pig or a sheep for tobacco, sugar, or
+other things necessary to them. The natives as they came up gave the
+usual salutation of good-day, to which Wilfrid replied.
+
+"We are hungry," a tall Maori, who by his dress appeared to be a chief,
+said.
+
+"I will get you something to eat," Wilfrid answered.
+
+The Maoris would have followed into the house, but he stopped and said
+sharply, "We do not allow strangers in the house. Those we know are free
+to enter and depart as they choose, but I have not seen any of you
+before. If you will sit down on that bench outside I will bring you
+food."
+
+He soon reappeared with a dish of maize and boiled pork, for a supply
+was generally kept in readiness in case any of the natives should come
+in.
+
+"Shuffle about and make a noise," he said to Marion as she got the dish
+from the cupboard. "They cannot know who are inside, and if they mean
+mischief--and honestly I do not like their looks--they will be more
+likely to try it on if they think that I am alone."
+
+The Maoris took the food in silence, and as they ate it Wilfrid was
+amused to hear Marion stamping heavily about inside, and occasionally
+speaking as if to her father. He could see that the men were listening,
+and they exchanged words in a low tone with each other.
+
+Presently the leader of the party said, "Drink!" Wilfrid went in and
+brought out a pitcher of water. "Gin!" the chief said shortly. "I have
+no gin to give you," Wilfrid replied; "we do not keep spirits."
+
+The natives rose to their feet. "We will come in and see," the leader
+said.
+
+"No you won't!" Wilfrid said firmly. "I have given you what food there
+is in the house, and you are welcome to it; but strangers don't come
+into the house unless they are invited."
+
+The native laid his hand on Wilfrid's shoulder to push him aside, but
+four months of chopping and digging had hardened every muscle in the
+lad's body. He did not move an inch, but jerked the Maori's hand off his
+shoulder.
+
+With an exclamation of anger the native drew a heavy knobbed stick from
+the girdle round his waist, but before he could raise it to strike
+another figure appeared at the door. Marion held a gun in her hand which
+she raised to her shoulder. "Drop that," she said in a clear ringing
+voice, "or I fire!"
+
+Taken by surprise, and seeing the rifle pointed full at his head, the
+chief instantly dropped his club. At the same instant Wilfrid sprang to
+the door, exclaiming "Go in, Marion!" and before the natives had
+recovered from their surprise the door was shut and barred.
+
+They had not been deceived by Marion's attempt to personate a man, and
+their sharp ears had told them while eating their meal that there was
+but one person in the house, and that it was a girl. They knew that
+there was no other about, having watched the house for some time, and
+had therefore anticipated that the work of murder and plunder would be
+accomplished without difficulty. The instant the door was closed they
+bounded away at the top of their speed to the shelter of the bush,
+expecting every moment to hear the report of a rifle behind them; but
+the Renshaws had not thought of firing.
+
+"Well done, Marion!" Wilfrid exclaimed as soon as the door was fastened.
+"I was on the point of springing upon him when I heard your voice behind
+me; I think that I could have tripped him backwards, but if I had done
+so the others would have been upon me with their clubs. Now, let us
+close and fasten the shutters, though I do not think we need have any
+fear of their coming back. In each case we have heard of they have
+always fallen on the settlers suddenly and killed them before they had
+time for resistance, and I do not think there is a chance of their
+trying to attack us now that they know we are ready for them. I expect
+that they were passing down to some of their people below, and seeing,
+as they thought, a defenceless hut, thought it would be an easy business
+to plunder it and knock on the head anyone they might find here. Now
+that they have failed they will probably go on their journey again."
+
+"I was horribly frightened, Wilfrid," Marion said when they joined each
+other in the sitting-room after making all the fastenings secure.
+
+"You did not look frightened a bit, Marion; and you certainly gave that
+fellow a tremendous scare. Didn't he drop his club sharp? And now, what
+do you think we had better do? The first thing is to get the Grimstones
+in. Those fellows may have been watching for some time and saw them go
+out."
+
+"But they have got their guns with them, Wilfrid. The natives would
+surely not think of attacking two men with guns when they have nothing
+but their clubs."
+
+"No, they certainly would not think of doing that, Marion. But the
+chances are that they have got guns, and that they left them in the bush
+when they sallied out, as they wanted to look peaceful and take us by
+surprise."
+
+"I did not think of that, Wilfrid. Yes, perhaps they have guns. Well,
+you know, it has always been agreed that in case of danger three shots
+should be fired as a warning to those who might be out. If we fire and
+they hear it they will hurry back."
+
+"Yes, but they might be shot as they make their way down to the house;
+that is what I am afraid of."
+
+Marion was silent for a minute. "Do you know where they have gone to,
+Wilfrid?"
+
+"They have gone in the first place to the clearing with those two big
+trees standing in the centre, but I cannot say where they may go to
+afterwards, for they had to look for four or five of the cattle that had
+strayed away."
+
+"I can slip out from the window in the men's room and get into the bush
+and work round to the clearing, Wilfrid, and fire three shots there;
+that would bring them to me at once. You see, the natives couldn't cross
+the clearing here without your having them under your gun."
+
+"No, Marion," Wilfrid said decidedly; "that is not to be thought of. If
+they saw you going they could work up through the bush on their side to
+the top of the clearing, and then follow you. No; I think I will fire
+the three shots. We have talked it over several times, you know, and the
+Grimstones have been told that if they heard the alarm they must make
+their way cautiously to the top of the clearing and see what is going on
+before they venture to make for the house. As soon as I see them I can
+shout to them to keep to the bush on their left till they get opposite
+the house. Everything is so still that one can hear a shout a long way,
+and I feel sure I could make them understand as far off as the end of
+the clearing. It isn't as if we were sure that these fellows were still
+hanging about ready to attack us; the probabilities are all the other
+way. They would have murdered us if they could have taken us by
+surprise, but that is a different thing altogether to making an attack
+now they know we are armed and ready."
+
+Taking three of the rifles, Wilfrid opened one of the shutters at the
+back of the house and fired them, with an interval of about five seconds
+between each shot, then he stood at the window and watched the upper
+end of the glade. "Dear me!" he exclaimed suddenly, "I am sorry we
+fired."
+
+"Why?" Marion asked in surprise.
+
+"Because Mr. Atherton is sure to hear it if he is at home, and will come
+hurrying over; and if these fellows are still there he may come right
+into the middle of them."
+
+"I do not think he would do that, Wilfrid," Marion said, after thinking
+for a moment or two. "Mr. Atherton is not like the Grimstones. He has
+been in all sorts of adventures, and though I am sure he will come to
+our help as soon as he can, I think he would take every precaution. He
+would know that the natives will be likely to come from above, and
+therefore be between him and us, and would come along carefully so as
+not to be surprised."
+
+"I hope so, I am sure," Wilfrid said; "for he is an awfully good fellow.
+Still, as you say, he is sure to keep his eyes opened, and unless they
+surprise him I should back him against the four of them."
+
+In a quarter of an hour they heard a shout from the edge of the
+clearing. "There are the Allens!" Wilfrid exclaimed as he leapt to the
+door. "I forgot about them, although of course they are nearer than Mr.
+Atherton. All right!" he shouted; "you can come on." The two Allens ran
+across the open space between the wood and the house.
+
+"What is it, Wilfrid?" they exclaimed as they came up. "You fired the
+alarm-signal, did you not?" Both were breathless with the speed at which
+they had run. They had been engaged in felling when they heard the
+shot, and had thrown down their axes, run into the hut for their guns,
+and made for The Glade at the top of their speed. In a few words Wilfrid
+explained what had happened, and that there was every reason to believe
+that four hostile neighbours were lurking in the bush on the opposite
+side of the glade. The Allens at once volunteered to go up to the head
+of the clearing to warn the Grimstones. Returning to the point where
+they had left the forest, they made their way among the trees until they
+reached the upper end of the clearing; then they sat down and listened.
+In a few minutes they heard the sound of breaking twigs. "Here come the
+men," the elder Allen said; "the Maoris would come along noiselessly."
+Two or three minutes later the Grimstones came up at a run, accompanied
+by their two dogs.
+
+"This way," James Allen said.
+
+"What is it, sir?" Bob Grimstone gasped. "We were a long way in the
+woods when we thought we heard three shots. We were not quite sure about
+it, but we started back as fast as we could come. There is nothing
+wrong, I hope?"
+
+"Fortunately nothing has happened," James Allen replied; "but four
+strange Maoris came up to the house, and would certainly have murdered
+Mr. Wilfrid and his sister if they had not been prepared for them.
+Whether they are in the bush now or not I do not know; but we have come
+up to warn you not to go up the clearing, as, if they are there, they
+might pick you off as you did so. We must come down under shelter of the
+trees till we are opposite the house."
+
+In ten minutes they reached the house. Just as they did so Mr. Atherton
+appeared at the edge of the wood which they had just left.
+
+"Thank God you are all safe!" he said as he strolled up to the house.
+"Your three shots gave me a fright; but as I heard no more I was
+relieved, for the signal told that you had not been taken by surprise,
+and as there was no more firing it was clear they had drawn off."
+
+"But how did you get to that side of the clearing, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"I followed the wood till within a few hundred yards of the clearing, as
+I made sure if there were hostile natives about they would be at the
+edge of the bush. Then I got down into the river and waded along the
+edge. The bank in front here was not high enough to hide me, though I
+stooped as much as I could; but I reckoned that all eyes would be fixed
+on the house, and it was not likely I should be noticed. And now, what
+is it all about? I am sure you would not have fired the signal unless
+there had been good cause for the alarm." Wilfrid related what had taken
+place.
+
+"Well done, Miss Marion!" Mr. Atherton said when he had finished. "It
+was lucky for your brother that you did not go with your father and
+mother this morning.
+
+"It was lucky," Wilfrid agreed; "but at the same time, if I had been
+quite alone I should have closed the shutters and door as they came up,
+and kept indoors. I only ventured to meet them outside because I knew
+that Marion had a gun ready to hand to me the moment I wanted it."
+
+"Yes; but you see there was not time to hand you the gun, Wilfrid, as
+it turned out, and you would have been knocked on the head to a
+certainty if your sister had not come to your rescue."
+
+"That I certainly should; and I know that I owe Marion my life. What do
+you think we had better do now?"
+
+"I do not think we can do anything, Wilfrid, beyond trying to find out
+whether the fellows who came here were alone, or were part of a larger
+party. Where are your natives?"
+
+"The three men are chopping, and Jack went out with the Grimstones to
+look for the cattle."
+
+"Was he with you when you heard the shots fired, Bob?"
+
+"He was with us a minute or two before, and was following a track. After
+we heard the signal we did not think anything more about him, and
+whether he followed us or went on looking after the cattle I do not
+know."
+
+"If you go to the door, Wilfrid, and give a loud cooey it will bring him
+in if he is within hearing. You may be sure that he heard the signal,
+for his ears are keener than those of your men; but he would not rush
+straight back, but would come cautiously through the woods according to
+his nature."
+
+Wilfrid went to the door and gave a loud cooey. A minute later the Maori
+issued from the bush, nearly opposite the house, and ran in.
+
+"That's just where the natives took to the bush," Wilfrid said. "Perhaps
+he will be able to tell us something about them."
+
+"I expect he has been scouting," Mr. Atherton said, "and his coming
+boldly out from that point is a pretty sure proof that the natives have
+made off. Well, Jack, so you heard our signal?"
+
+Jack nodded.
+
+"And what have you been doing since?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"Jack went through the bush fast till he got near house, then, as the
+guns were not going off, he knew there could be no attack; but thought
+black man might be lying in bush, so he crept and crawled. Presently he
+heard man talk, and then saw four Maori walking fast away from house. He
+only heard them say as he passed, 'No use now; too many Pakehas. Come
+another day and finish them all.' Jack was coming straight to house when
+he heard cooey."
+
+"You have seen nothing of your father and the other two men, Jack?"
+
+The Maori boy shook his head. "They chop wood; perhaps not heard
+signal."
+
+"More likely they heard, but thought it better to stay away," Wilfrid
+said.
+
+"No got guns; they not fighting-men," Jack said, as if in excuse.
+
+"There is something in that," Mr. Atherton said. "The Hau-Haus have
+always proved themselves even more merciless towards the friendly
+natives than towards the whites; and these men, being unarmed, might,
+even with the best disposition in the world, be afraid to come to the
+house. At any rate, I am glad those fellows have made off. You see, they
+were in a position to shoot any of us if they got the chance, while we
+were scarce in a position to return the compliment."
+
+"Why not?" James Allen asked.
+
+"Because, although we could have now no doubt whatever as to their
+intentions, they have committed no actual assault. They tried their best
+to push their way into the house, and when Wilfrid opposed them one of
+them drew his club; but they might say this was only done to frighten
+him, and that they had no thought of using it. If they had fired a shot,
+we should of course be justified in killing them; but were we to begin
+the shooting, the whole tribe they belong to would take it up, and there
+would be a cry for vengeance; and even if nothing were done at once, we
+should be marked down to be wiped out at the first opportunity.
+
+"We shall learn in a day or two whether the matter was serious or not,"
+Mr. Atherton went on. "If there is anything like a general defection of
+the natives in these parts yours will not have been the only place
+threatened, and we shall hear of attacks on other settlers. If we do not
+hear of such attacks we can safely put it down that these four fellows
+were mere haphazard passers, like tramps at home, who were tempted by
+the fact that the house contained only two persons. In that case we need
+feel no further anxiety; for as you would be able to recognize them if
+you met them anywhere, they would not be likely to come near this part
+of the district again. At any rate I will set off with the boy here and
+one of the dogs, and will follow up their tracks and see if they have
+gone well away. I have no doubt they have done so; still, it will be
+more comfortable to make certain of it."
+
+"By the way, Bob," Wilfrid said, "don't you take those two dogs out
+again. I don't think they would be any good for hunting cattle, and
+would be much more likely to frighten and hunt them away than to help
+you to drive them in. At any rate they were bought as guards, and are to
+remain about the house. Shall I go with you, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"No, thank you, Wilfrid; Jack will be enough to help me follow the
+tracks, for what he heard them say is almost proof that they have gone.
+I shall go round to my own place when I have followed them fairly off
+the land, but will come round here to-morrow morning, when we will hold
+a general council of war. It is no use my coming back again this
+evening, as your father and the others will not be here before that
+time. It is possible that they will bring us some news from the
+Mitfords. If there is any trouble anywhere along the river Mitford is
+sure to be the first to hear of it. I will send a message back by Jack
+when he has gone as far as necessary for our purpose."
+
+Two hours later Jack returned with the news that the Maoris had gone
+straight on without making a stop. Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw were expected
+back at about ten o'clock. They were to breakfast early at the Mitfords
+and to come up with their light canoe. They arrived, however, soon after
+eight o'clock.
+
+"Is all well?" Mr. Renshaw shouted as he stepped from the boat.
+
+"All well, father," Marion replied, running down to meet them. "We had a
+little unpleasantness yesterday, but nothing of consequence. What brings
+you back so early? You must have started before daylight."
+
+"Bad news came in yesterday evening, and we should have come straight
+over if it had been possible, but Mr. Mitford would not let us leave
+till morning. We have been very anxious about you."
+
+"What is the news?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"The natives murdered two settlers at a farm some four miles from Mr.
+Mitford's. Yesterday he received letters both from Poverty Bay and
+Napier saying that the natives were in a very disturbed state, that
+Hau-Hau prophets had been going about among them, and that in both
+districts there had been several murders. Corps of volunteers are being
+raised at Napier, and they have sent to Wellington for a company of the
+constabulary. The settlers at Poverty Bay are also making preparations
+for defence. Mr. Mitford was asked to get all the colonists on this
+river to arm and prepare for an attack. Of course this news was very
+alarming in itself, and when two or three hours later the news came in
+of the murders in our own settlement we were naturally most anxious
+about you. However, as we could not come over in the dark through the
+forest, and as Mitford pointed out that the house was well prepared for
+defence, and that you would certainly be on the alert and had the dogs,
+who would give you notice of any body of men coming, we consented to
+remain if he would send us home in the canoe at five o'clock in the
+morning. And now, what is it that happened here yesterday?"
+
+"It was nothing very alarming, father. Four natives came up and asked
+for food, which of course I gave them. Then they wanted gin, and seeing
+that I was alone tried to push their way into the house I tried to stop
+them. The fellow snatched at his club. As he did so Marion appeared at
+the door with a levelled rifle, and the fellows, who had no guns with
+them, took to their heels. We gave the alarm-signal, and the Allens and
+Mr. Atherton came over at once, and the Grimstones ran in from their
+work. However, the natives had made their way off, and I do not suppose
+we shall hear any more of them."
+
+"I don't know, Wilfrid," his father said. "If it had been only this
+affair I should not have thought much about it. The natives are often
+rude and insolent, and these men might not have meant to do more than
+help themselves to a bottle of spirits, but taken with these accounts
+from Napier and Poverty Bay, and with the murders yesterday, I think it
+is very serious."
+
+"Mr. Atherton and the Allens promised to come over at ten o'clock,
+father, to chat the matter over with you, and hear whether you had
+brought news of any troubles elsewhere. So we shall have quite a
+council. And now let us have breakfast. We were just going to sit down
+when we heard your call, and I am sure you must be as hungry as hunters
+after your three hours on the water."
+
+Breakfast was scarcely finished when Mr. Atherton and the Allens
+arrived, and were made acquainted with the news of the murder of the two
+settlers on the previous day.
+
+"It is clear," Mr. Atherton said, "that the affair here yesterday was
+not, as I hoped, a mere incident, such as might happen anywhere if a
+party of ruffianly fellows arrived at a lonely house which they thought
+they could rob with impunity. This sad business you tell us of shows
+that there is a general movement among the natives, the result, I
+suppose, of the arrival of some emissary from the Hau-Haus. It is an
+awkward business. What is Mr. Mitford's opinion on the subject?"
+
+"He thinks it will be well that all settlers on the river capable of
+bearing arms should be enrolled as a volunteer corps, and be in
+readiness to turn out at a moment's notice. He is of opinion that all
+those whose farms lie at a distance from the main body should drive in
+their animals and bring in such goods as they can carry to his station,
+as one of the most central. Huts could be got up there, and the animals
+all kept at night in his large stockaded yard. In case the natives seem
+inclined to make a regular attack the women and children could be sent
+down the river in boats or put on board a ship and sent to Napier.
+Fortunately, there is seldom a week without a craft of some sort putting
+into the river."
+
+"There is no doubt that this would be the safest plan," Mr. Atherton
+said, "but it would be a serious thing for the settlers to abandon their
+crops and houses to the natives unless it was certain that the danger
+was very great."
+
+"That is my opinion," Mr. Renshaw said. "I am certainly not disposed to
+have the results of our labour destroyed without a struggle."
+
+Wilfrid looked alike surprised and pleased. "I am glad to hear you say
+so, father. It would be an awful nuisance and loss to have all our crops
+destroyed and our house burnt down, and to have to begin the whole thing
+over again. I don't see what would have been the use of getting
+everything ready for defence if we are all to run away directly there
+is danger; but I think it would be a good thing to send the animals down
+to Mr. Mitford's, as he is good enough to offer to take them. We might
+send down the three natives to look after them, as of course they will
+have to go out to graze in the daytime, and keep Jack here. I do not
+know about the other men, and one doesn't seem able to trust the natives
+in the slightest; but I feel sure of Jack, and he would be useful to us
+in many ways in the house, besides being able to scout in the woods far
+better than we could do."
+
+"I think that you are right, Mr. Renshaw," Mr. Atherton said. "I should
+propose as an addition that the Allens here and I make this our
+head-quarters while the scare lasts. We could run up a light shanty with
+a few hours' work just behind the house. The Allens could go over to
+their work during the day and return here at night, and I should wander
+about the woods with my gun as usual. I do not think we need fear any
+attack in the daytime. If it comes at all it will be at night or at
+early morning. The natives will know from the men who were here that you
+are well armed, and will try to catch you napping. We won't be any more
+trouble to you than we can help, and with the addition of our three guns
+I think we could defend ourselves against any number of natives. What do
+you think of my proposal, lads?"
+
+The Allens said at once that they thought it was an excellent one, if
+Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw were willing to have the trouble of them.
+
+"It will be no trouble at all," Mrs. Renshaw said, "and will be a very
+great comfort. With seven men to protect us Marion and I shall feel
+perfectly safe, and it will be in all ways pleasant to have you here
+with us. I do not see that you need build a hut outside at all. There
+will be no difficulty in making up beds here and in the kitchen, and
+then we shall be all together."
+
+"But I do not propose that you should cook for us, Mrs. Renshaw. If we
+had a hut of our own our boys could do that for us. You see, we are
+coming up here for our own defence as well as yours."
+
+"I should not think of such a thing," Mrs. Renshaw said decidedly.
+"There is no more trouble in cooking for nine than there is for six;
+and, as I have said, it will be a real pleasure to us to have you
+stopping here."
+
+"Very well. Then in that case, Mrs. Renshaw, we will accept your
+invitation. I will bring over my belongings to-day and store them in
+your loft above, and the Allens had better bring over anything they do
+not want burnt by the natives. I still hope that these outrages are the
+work of a few ruffians, and that the natives in general will not allow
+themselves to be persuaded into hostilities against us; still, if the
+worst comes to the worst, I am convinced that we can hold this house
+against quite as strong a force as they are likely to bring to attack
+it. There is one precaution I should advise you to take at once, and
+that is to lay in a store of water. I daresay you have got some empty
+molasses and pork casks, that is if you do not burn them as soon as you
+empty them. If not we must set to work and make a strong wooden tank. In
+case we were really besieged, it would be fatal to us if we were caught
+without a supply of water."
+
+Fortunately there were three or four empty casks. These were taken down
+to the river and thoroughly washed, filled with water and rolled up to
+the house. While this was being done, Wilfrid, with the Grimstones and
+the natives, had gone out and driven in all the animals from the
+clearings, and as soon as they were brought in Wilfrid with the natives
+started to drive them to Mr. Mitford's. Mr. Atherton went over to his
+hut, and before night his two natives had brought over all his most
+valuable property, and the next day his hut was completely stripped. The
+Allens only brought over a few things. Their furniture was rough and
+heavy, and they contented themselves by carrying it out into the forest
+near and hiding it in the undergrowth. Wilfrid returned to The Glade in
+the evening. He said that many of the settlers had come in, and were
+erecting shelters of hides, canvas, and wood near Mr. Mitford's house.
+The men were all being enrolled. Officers had been appointed, and the
+natives were likely to meet with a stout resistance if they ventured on
+hostilities.
+
+Mrs. Mitford had sent an earnest invitation to Mrs. Renshaw and Marion
+to take up their abode with her. Mr. Mitford had approved of their
+intention of holding the house. He knew its capabilities of defence and
+thought that, unless taken by surprise, they would be able to hold it.
+
+"It will be a sort of outpost for the colony," he said, "and will add to
+our safety; for if any strong body of natives were approaching they
+would probably attack you before coming on here. The instant we hear
+that you are attacked we will come up to aid you. We shall be able to
+muster in all something like fifty mounted men--a strength sufficient to
+meet any number of natives likely to assemble in these parts."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII.
+
+THE ATTACK ON THE GLADE.
+
+
+For three days things went on quietly at The Glade. The first thing in
+the morning Jack went out with two of the dogs and scouted in the bush.
+As soon as he returned with the news that he could find no signs of
+natives the household broke up. The Allens went through the bush to
+their clearing and continued their work of felling trees. Mr. Atherton
+sauntered off with his two dogs into the forest in search of plants.
+Wilfrid and the Grimstones pursued their work of digging and planting in
+the upper part of the glade. Jack and the two dogs were on watch round
+the house. Mr. Renshaw worked at his Maori vocabulary, and his wife and
+daughter carried on the business of the house.
+
+At night two of the dogs were chained up outside; the other two slept in
+the kitchen, while Jack was allowed to sleep up in the loft. At daybreak
+on the fourth day the party were awoke by a growl from one of the dogs
+outside. Each of the occupants of the house had been allotted his post,
+and in a minute all were standing, rifle in hand, at the windows they
+were to guard. Mr. Atherton opened the front door and went out,
+followed by Jack. It was just getting light enough to make out objects
+in the clearing. Everything seemed quiet.
+
+"What is it, Ponto?" he said to his dog, who was standing with his eyes
+fixed upon the bush to the right, his ears pricked and his hair
+bristling. "What do you hear, old fellow?"
+
+The dog uttered another deep growl. A moment later there was a loud
+yell. A number of dark figures leapt from the edge of the bush and ran
+towards the house. They had made out Mr. Atherton's figure, and knew
+that their hope of surprising the place was at an end. Mr. Atherton
+levelled his rifle and fired, and one of the natives fell dead. Then
+stooping he quietly unfastened the dog's chain from his collar, telling
+Jack to do the same to the other dog, "Come into the house, sir," he
+ordered; "it's no use your being here to be shot."
+
+His shot had been answered by a dozen rifles, but fired in haste as the
+men were running none of the bullets struck him. Four shots were fired
+almost simultaneously from the windows looking towards the bush, and
+three more natives fell. This proof of the accuracy of the defenders'
+shooting staggered the Maoris and they paused for a moment, then, moved
+by the exhortations of their chief, they again rushed forward. The whole
+of the defenders were now gathered at the windows facing them, and seven
+shots were fired in quick succession. Three natives fell dead. Four
+others were wounded, two so seriously that they had to be carried off by
+their comrades, who at once ran back to the bush, and from its edge
+opened a straggling fire against the house. The shutters that had been
+thrown open at the two windows were at once closed.
+
+"This is what I call beating them off handsomely," Mr. Atherton said.
+"Now you see the advantage, Wilfrid, of the pains you have taken to
+learn to shoot straight. There have been only eleven shots fired, and I
+fancy there are at least ten casualties among them. I call that a very
+pretty average for young hands."
+
+"What will they do next, do you think?" Mr. Renshaw asked.
+
+"They will not try another open attack, I fancy. We may expect them to
+try to work round us. Jack, do you go to the other side of the house and
+keep a sharp look-out on the bush there. Wilfrid, you take post at the
+windows we fired from, and peep out from time to time through the
+loopholes in the shutters. Between times keep yourself out of the line
+of fire. The betting is a thousand to one against a bullet coming
+through, still there is no use in running any risk if it can be avoided.
+Jim Allen, you and I will take up our place at the back of the house;
+they may try to work up among the crops. In fact, I expect that is the
+course they will take unless they have had enough of it already. Bob
+Grimstone, you keep watch at one of the front windows. I don't think
+there is much chance of attack from that side, but it is as well to keep
+a look-out. Some of them may attempt to cross to the opposite bush,
+keeping down by the river. The other three guns will be in reserve."
+
+"Don't you think they are likely to go away now that they have suffered
+so much loss?" Mrs. Renshaw asked.
+
+"No, I cannot say I think so, Mrs. Renshaw. The Maoris, from what I have
+heard, always try to get revenge for the death of a kinsman or
+fellow-tribesman. Of course it depends how many of them there are. I
+should judge that there were about thirty showed themselves. If that is
+all there are of them I should say they would not attack again at
+present. They must know by our firing that there are seven or eight of
+us here. But I should not rely altogether even upon that, for the
+natives regard themselves as fully a match, man for man, with the
+whites, and in their fights with our troops we were often greatly
+superior in numbers. Still, it is one thing to defend a strong pah and
+another to attack resolute men snugly sheltered behind bullet-proof
+logs. They may try again, but if there are any more of their people
+within reasonable distance I fancy they will be more likely to send for
+them and keep a sharp watch round us until they come up. Now I will go
+to my post."
+
+For a quarter of an hour the two watchers at the back of the house saw
+no signs of life. Then Mr. Atherton said: "There is a movement among
+that corn, Jim. Do you see, there--just in a line with that big tree at
+the other end of the clearing? It is moving in several places. Call your
+brother and young Grimstone to this side of the house, and do you all
+take steady aim at these moving patches. I will fire first. I think I
+can pretty well mark the spot where one of the fellows is making his way
+down. If I hit him the others are likely enough to start up. Then will
+be your time for taking a shot at them."
+
+As soon as the others were in position and ready Mr. Atherton fired.
+There was a yell. A dark figure sprang up, stood for an instant, and
+then fell back. Almost at the same instant half a dozen others leapt to
+their feet and dashed away. Three rifles were fired. Two of the natives
+fell, but one almost immediately rose again and followed the others.
+
+"You ought to have done better than that at a hundred yards," Mr.
+Atherton said. "You two lads ought to have practised a little more
+steadily than you have. It was Grimstone brought down that man. His
+rifle went off a second before yours, and the man was falling when you
+fired. The great thing in firing at natives is that every shot should
+tell. It is the certainty of the thing that scares them. If they hear
+bullets singing about with only occasionally a man dropping they gain
+confidence, but a slow, steady fire with every shot telling shakes their
+nerves, and makes them very careful of showing themselves."
+
+Half an hour later Jack reported he could see figures moving in the bush
+on his side, and soon afterwards a fire was opened on the hut from that
+direction.
+
+"They have worked round the end of the clearing," Mr. Atherton said.
+"Now it is our turn to begin to fire. We have let them have their own
+way long enough, and there is plenty of light now, and I think we shall
+soon be able to put a stop to this game. Now, Wilfrid, do you with one
+of the Grimstones take up your place at the loopholes at that end of the
+house, and I with the other will take up mine on the right. Keep a sharp
+look-out, and do not throw away a shot if you can help it. As we have
+not answered their fire they have probably got careless, and are sure
+to expose themselves as they stand up to fire. Now, Bob," he went on, as
+he took his place at the loophole, "I will take the first who shows
+himself. I do not think you would miss, but I am sure that I shall not,
+and it is important not to make a mistake the first time."
+
+Half a minute later a native showed his head and shoulders over a bush
+as he rose to fire. Before he could raise his gun to his shoulder he
+fell with a bullet through his head from Mr. Atherton's unerring rifle.
+That gentleman quietly reloaded.
+
+"You had better take the next again, sir," Bob Grimstone said quietly.
+"I do not suppose I should miss, but I might do. I do not reckon on
+hitting a small mark more than eight out of twelve times."
+
+It was nearly four minutes before another native showed himself.
+
+"I think, sir, there is one standing behind that big tree twenty yards
+in the bush. I thought I saw something move behind it just now."
+
+"I will watch it, Bob," Mr. Atherton said, raising his rifle to his
+shoulder and looking along it through the loophole.
+
+Two minutes passed, and then a head and shoulder appeared from behind
+the tree. Instantaneously Mr. Atherton's rifle cracked, and the native
+fell forward, his gun going off as he did so.
+
+"We need not stand here any longer," Mr. Atherton said quietly, "there
+will be no more shooting from that side for some time."
+
+Mr. Atherton went to the other end of the house.
+
+"How are you getting on, Wilfrid?"
+
+"We have had three shots. I fired twice and Bill once. I think I missed
+once altogether, the other time the native went down. Bill wounded his
+man--hit him in the shoulder, I think. They haven't fired since."
+
+"Then you can put down your guns for the present. Mrs. Renshaw has just
+told me that breakfast is ready." Mrs. Renshaw and Marion had indeed
+gone quietly about the work of preparing breakfast for their defenders.
+
+"So you are a non-combatant this morning, Miss Marion?" Mr. Atherton
+said as he took his place with the rest of the party, with the exception
+of the Grimstones, who were placed on the watch, at the table.
+
+"Yes," the girl replied; "if I thought there were any danger of the
+natives fighting their way into the house, of course I should do my best
+to help defend it; but I do not think that there is the least fear of
+such a thing, so I am quite content to leave it to you. It does not seem
+to me that a woman has any business to fight unless absolutely driven to
+do so in defence of her life. If the natives really do come on and get
+up close to the house, I think that I ought to help to keep them out;
+but it is a dreadful thing to have to shoot anyone--at least it seems so
+to me."
+
+"It is not a pleasant thing when considered in cold blood; but when men
+go out of their way to take one's life, I do not feel the slightest
+compunction myself in taking theirs. These natives have no cause of
+complaint whatever against us. They have assembled and attacked the
+settlement in a treacherous manner, and without the slightest warning of
+their intentions. Their intention is to slay man, woman, and child
+without mercy, and I therefore regard them as human tigers, and no more
+deserving of pity. At the same time I can quite enter into your
+feelings, and think you are perfectly right not to take any active part
+in the affair unless we are pressed by the savages. Then, of course, you
+would be not only justified, but it would, I think, be your absolute
+duty to do your best to defend the place."
+
+"Do you think that it is all over now, Mr. Atherton?" Mrs. Renshaw
+asked. "We regard you as our commanding officer, for you are the only
+one here who ever saw a shot fired in anger before our voyage out, and
+your experience is invaluable to us now. Indeed, both my husband and
+myself feel that it is to your suggestion that we should put up the
+strong shutters and doors that we owe the lives of our children; for had
+it not been for that, those men who came first might have taken the
+house when they found them alone in it."
+
+"I cannot accept your thanks for that, Mrs. Renshaw. It may be if this
+goes on that the shutters will be found of the greatest use, and indeed
+they have probably stopped a good many balls from coming in and so saved
+some of our lives, but on the first occasion Wilfrid and your daughter
+owed their lives to their being prepared and armed, while the natives
+relying upon surprising them had left their guns in the wood. The
+shutters were not closed until after they made off, and had they not
+been there those four natives could never have passed across the
+clearing and reached the house under the fire of two cool and steady
+marksmen.
+
+"As to your first question, whether it is all over, it depends entirely
+upon whether the party who attacked us are the main force of the
+natives. If so, I do not think they will renew the attack at present.
+They have suffered terribly, and know now that it is almost certain
+death for any of them to show themselves within range of our guns. They
+have lost fourteen or fifteen men, and I do not think they numbered
+above forty at first. But if they are only a detached party, and a main
+body of the tribe is making an attack elsewhere, perhaps upon the
+settlers at Mitford's, a messenger will by this time have been
+despatched to them, and we may all have a much more serious attack to
+encounter to-night or to-morrow morning.
+
+"I have no idea what tribe these fellows belong to; but there are few of
+the tribes that cannot put five hundred men on the field, while some can
+put five times that number. So, you see, we are entirely in the dark. Of
+course things will depend a good deal as to how the main body, if there
+is a main body, has fared. If they have been, as I feel sure they will
+be if they venture to attack Mitford's place, roughly handled, the whole
+body may return home. The natives have proved themselves through the war
+admirable in defence; but they have by no means distinguished themselves
+in the attack, and have not, so far as I remember, succeeded in a single
+instance in capturing a position stoutly held.
+
+"It is one thing to fight behind strong palisades, defended by interior
+works skilfully laid out, and quite another to advance across the open
+to assault a defended position; and my belief is that, if they are
+beaten at Mitford's as well as here, we shall hear no more of them at
+present. Mind, I do not say that after this I think that it would be
+safe to continue to live in an outlying station like this until matters
+have again settled down in this part of the island. No doubt, as soon as
+the news is known at Napier and Wellington a force will be sent here, or
+perhaps to Poverty Bay, which is only some twenty miles higher up the
+coast, and is, I think, from what I hear, better suited as the base of
+operations than this river would be.
+
+"This force will no doubt make an expedition inland to punish the tribes
+connected with this affair, for it is of course most important to let
+the natives on this side of the island see that they cannot attack our
+settlements with impunity. After that is done it will no doubt be safe
+to recommence operations here; but at present I fear you will find it
+necessary for a time to abandon the place, and either take up your abode
+at the Mitfords', or go down to Napier or Wellington. This will, of
+course, involve the loss of the crops you have planted, and possibly of
+your house; but as you have saved all your animals, the loss will be
+comparatively small and easily repaired."
+
+"Whether large or small," Mr. Renshaw said, "we cannot hesitate over it.
+It will, as you say, be out of the question to live here exposed at any
+instant to attack, and never knowing what the day or night may bring
+forth. The house has not cost above a hundred pounds, and we must put up
+with that loss. We are fortunately in a very much better position than
+most settlers in having a reserve to fall back upon, so there will be
+no hesitation on my part in taking this step. The furniture is worth
+more than the hut, but I suppose that must go too."
+
+"Not necessarily, Mr. Renshaw. We cannot get away now; for although we
+can defend ourselves well enough here, we could not make our way down
+through the woods to Mitford's without great risks. They are accustomed
+to bush fighting, and as they are still five to one against us, it would
+be a very serious matter to try to fight our way down. I think that we
+have no choice but to remain where we are until we are either relieved
+or are perfectly certain that they have made off. In either case we
+should then have ample time to make our preparations for retiring, and
+could strip the house and send everything down in boats or
+bullock-carts, and might even get up the potatoes, and cut such of the
+crops as are ripe, or nearly ripe, and send them down also.
+
+"The corps that has been got up among the settlers will be sure to join
+in the expedition for the punishment of these scoundrels, and indeed it
+is most probable that all able-bodied settlers will be called out. In
+any case I think I shall chip in, as the Americans say. I shall have an
+opportunity of going into little explored tracts in the interior and
+adding to my collections; and to tell you the truth, I feel anxious to
+take a part in revenging the massacres that these treacherous natives
+have committed. Unless they get a sharp lesson the lives of the settlers
+in all the outlying districts in the colony will be unsafe."
+
+Wilfrid glanced at Mr. Atherton and nodded, to intimate that he should
+be willing and ready to join in such an expedition; but he thought it
+better to say nothing at present. The two Allens, however, said at once
+that if obliged to quit their clearing they would join one of the
+irregular corps for the defence of the colony.
+
+"We shall get pay and rations," James Allen said, "and that will keep us
+going until things get settled; and I should certainly like to lend a
+hand in punishing these treacherous natives. It is horrible to think of
+their stealing upon defenceless people at night and murdering men,
+women, and children. It is as bad as the Sepoy mutiny. And now the
+troops have been almost all withdrawn, and the colony has been left to
+shift for itself, I think it is no more than the duty of all who have no
+special ties to aid in the defence against these fanatical Hau-Haus."
+
+"Very well, then, James; we will march side by side, and when you see me
+give out you shall carry me."
+
+"That would be worse than fighting the natives," James Allen replied
+with a laugh. "If I were you, Mr. Atherton, I should engage ten natives
+to accompany me with poles and a hammock."
+
+"That is not a bad idea," Mr. Atherton said calmly, "and possibly I may
+adopt it; but in that case I shall have to go as a free lance, for I
+fear it would scarcely be conducive to military discipline to see one of
+an armed band carried along in the ranks."
+
+None would have thought from the cheerful tone of the conversation that
+the party were beleaguered by a bloodthirsty enemy. But Mr. Atherton
+purposely gave a lively tone to the conversation to keep up their
+spirits. He felt, as he expressed himself, perfectly confident that
+they could beat off any attack in the daytime; but he knew that if their
+assailants were largely reinforced, and the place attacked by night, the
+position would be a very serious one. Even then he was convinced that
+the assailants would not be able to force their way in, but they would
+assuredly try to fire the house; and although the solid logs would be
+difficult to ignite, the match-board covering and the roof would both
+readily catch fire. However, his hope lay in preventing the natives from
+firing it, as it would be difficult in the extreme to bring up burning
+branches under the fire of the defenders.
+
+"It is a pity now, Wilfrid," he said to the lad after breakfast was
+over, and they had taken up their place together at one of the windows,
+"that we did not dissuade your father from putting that boarding to the
+logs. You did not intend to have it at first, and now it adds a good
+deal to our danger. The only thing I am afraid of is fire, though I own
+I do not think that there is much chance of any of them getting up with
+a lighted brand under the fire of our rifles. If the natives were not in
+the bush at the present moment, I should say that the best thing by far
+to do would be for all hands to set to work to tear off the
+match-boarding, and to get down the whole of the covering of the roof;
+they could not well hurt us then."
+
+"Shall we do it at once, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"They would shoot us down at their leisure, Wilfrid. No, that is not to
+be thought of. We must run the risk of fire now; and I feel, as I said,
+pretty confident that we are too good shots to let men with fire get up
+to the walls. I wish we could send down word to Mitford's that we are
+besieged here. Of course, if he is attacked himself he could not help
+us, but if he is not I know he would come out at once with a strong
+party to our relief. I wonder whether that native boy of yours would try
+to carry a message. None of us would have a chance of getting through,
+but these fellows can crawl like snakes; and by working up through the
+crops to the upper end of the glade he might gain the bush unobserved."
+
+"I will ask him anyhow," Wilfrid said.
+
+Jack on being promised a new suit of clothes and a present in money if
+he would carry a note through to Mr. Mitford, at once undertook the
+mission. Mr. Renshaw, on being told what was arranged, wrote a note
+stating their position, and Jack, divesting himself of the greater
+portion of his clothes, crept out through the door at the back of the
+house, and lying down at once began to crawl through the potato patch
+towards the upper end of the clearing. From the loopholes of the windows
+the defenders watched his progress. Although aware of his approximate
+position they were soon unable to trace his progress.
+
+"He will do," Mr. Atherton said; "if we, knowing the line he is taking,
+can see nothing move you may be sure that those fellows in the bush will
+not be able to make him out. Well, we shall have assistance in four or
+five hours if Mitford's hands are free."
+
+A quarter of an hour passed and all was still quiet.
+
+"He is in the bush by this time," Mr. Atherton said; "now we can take
+matters easy."
+
+An occasional shot was fired from the bush, and shouts raised which Mr.
+Renshaw interpreted to be threats of death and extermination.
+
+"They say that all the white men are to be driven into the sea; not one
+left alive on the island."
+
+"Well, we shall see about that," Mr. Atherton said; "they are not
+getting on very fast at present."
+
+As time went on it was only the occasional crack of a gun, accompanied
+by the thud of a bullet against the logs, that told that the natives
+were still present. They now never raised themselves to fire, but kept
+well back in the bush, shifting their position after each shot. Time
+passed somewhat slowly inside, until about four o'clock in the afternoon
+the sharp crack of a rifle was heard.
+
+"There is Mitford!" Mr. Atherton exclaimed, "that is not a Maori gun.
+Man the loopholes again! we must prevent any of the fellows on the other
+side crossing to the assistance of their friends, and give it to the
+others hot if they are driven out of the shelter of the bush."
+
+The rifle shot was speedily followed by others, and then came the deeper
+report of the Maori muskets. English shouts were heard, mingled with the
+yells of the natives. The fight was evidently sharp, for Jack had led
+the relieving party down upon the rear of the natives engaged in
+attacking the house from the left. The latter began to fall back, and
+the defenders of the house presently caught sight of their figures as
+they flitted from tree to tree.
+
+"We must be careful," Mr. Atherton said, "for every bullet that misses
+might strike our friends. I think that you had all better reserve your
+fire till they make a break across the open. You can see by the
+direction they are firing, and the sound of the rifles, Mitford is
+closing in on both their flanks so as to drive them out of the bush. I
+can trust myself not to miss, and will pick them off when I see any of
+them sheltering on this side of the trees. There is a fellow there just
+going to fire." His rifle cracked, and the native fell among the bushes.
+
+This completed the scare of the natives, who had already been much
+disconcerted at the unexpected attack made upon them. The leader of the
+party shouted an order, and the whole of them made a sudden rush through
+the bush down towards the river. Three or four fell beneath the rifles
+of the whites on that side of them, but the rest burst through and
+continued their course down to the river, and, plunging in, swam to the
+other side without once giving the defenders of the house the chance of
+a shot at them.
+
+"Now we can sally out," Mr. Renshaw said.
+
+The door was opened, and they hurried out just as a party of whites
+issued from the wood and ran towards the house.
+
+"Thanks for your speedy aid, Mitford!" Mr. Renshaw exclaimed as he wrung
+the hand of the settler.
+
+"You are heartily welcome, my dear sir. A party was just setting off to
+see how you had fared when your native boy arrived with your note, and
+it was a great relief to us to know that you had repulsed their attack
+with such heavy loss to them; I am afraid that several others have not
+fared so well. Two or three native servants have come in this morning
+with news of massacres of whole families, they themselves having
+managed to make their escape in the confusion; and I am afraid that we
+shall hear of other similar cases. Your gallant defence of your station
+has been of most important service to us all. There is no doubt that it
+saved us from an attack at our place. There were a good many natives in
+the bush round us this morning yelling and shouting, but they did not
+venture on an attack; and I have no doubt they were waiting for the
+arrival of the party told off to attack your place on their way. Do you
+think that there are any of them still in the bush on the other side?"
+
+"I should hardly think so," Mr. Atherton replied. "There must have been
+fully half of them in the party you attacked, and the others are hardly
+likely to have waited after they saw you had defeated their friends; but
+I think that it would be as well for a party of us to ascertain, for if
+they are still lurking there some of us may be shot down as we move
+about outside the house. We are quite strong enough now to venture upon
+such a step."
+
+"I think so too," Mr. Mitford agreed. "There are ten men beside myself
+and your party. We had better leave four here, the rest of us will make
+a dash down to the edge of the bush and then skirmish through it."
+
+Mr. Renshaw, the two Grimstones, and one of the settlers were appointed
+to remain behind to guard the house, and the rest of the party then
+dashed at full speed across the glade to the edge of the bush. Not a
+shot was fired as they did so, and having once gained the shelter they
+advanced through the trees. After pushing forward for half a mile they
+came to the conclusion that the Maoris had retreated. Many signs were
+seen of their presence. There were marks of blood here and there, and
+the bushes were broken down where they had carried off those who had
+fallen killed or wounded in the bush; the bodies of those who had fallen
+in the open still remained there.
+
+Upon the return of the party Mr. Mitford was informed of the
+determination that had been arrived at. This met with his cordial
+approval.
+
+"I think, Mrs. Renshaw," he said, "that the best plan will be for you
+and your husband and daughter to return at once with me. I will leave a
+couple of my men here with your garrison, and in the morning will come
+out with a strong party and three or four bullock drays to fetch in all
+your portable property. They can make another trip for your potatoes and
+such of your crops as can be got in. After the sharp lesson the natives
+have had here they are not likely to venture in this neighbourhood again
+for some time; and, indeed, now that they find that the whole settlement
+is aroused and on its guard I doubt whether we shall hear anything more
+of them at present, and possibly you may, when matters settle down
+again, find your house just as it is left."
+
+Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw agreed to the plan proposed, and in a quarter of an
+hour the party started, leaving The Glade under the protection of the
+garrison of eight men. The night passed off quietly, and at daybreak all
+set to work to get up the potatoes and to cut down the crops that were
+sufficiently ripe. At nine o'clock the waggons arrived, and the
+furniture and stores were loaded up. By twelve o'clock next day the work
+in the fields was completed and the waggons again loaded. The house was
+then locked up and the whole party proceeded to the settlement. They
+found on their arrival that a strong stockade had been erected near Mr.
+Mitford's house, and that rough tents and huts had been got up there for
+the use of the settlers; the whole of the animals belonging to the
+various farmers on the river had been driven into the stockaded
+inclosure behind the house.
+
+Here it was decided that all the settlers should remain until help
+arrived from Wellington or Napier, but in the meantime five and twenty
+of the younger men were enrolled as a volunteer corps; a Mr. Purcell,
+who had served for some years as an officer in the army, being
+unanimously elected in command. There still remained enough men capable
+of bearing arms to defend the stockade in case of attack during the
+absence of the corps. Wilfrid and the two Allens were among those who
+enrolled themselves. Mr. Atherton said that he fully intended to
+accompany them if possible upon any expedition they might make, but that
+he should not become a member of the corps.
+
+"You may have long marches," he said, "through the bush, or may, when
+the reinforcements arrive, be called upon to make an expedition into the
+hill country to punish the natives. I could not possibly keep up with
+you during a heavy day's marching, so I shall, like Hal of the Wynd,
+fight for my own sword. I daresay I shall be there or there about when
+there is any work to be done, but I must get there in my own way and in
+my own time. I shall have my own commissariat train. I have had my share
+of living on next to nothing, and have become somewhat of an epicure,
+and I know that the sort of rations you are likely to get on a march
+through a rough country would not suit my constitution. But, as I said
+before, I hope if there is any fighting done to be somewhere in the
+neighbourhood."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV.
+
+FRESH TROUBLES.
+
+
+Three days later a small steamer arrived from Napier, bringing a reply
+to the urgent request that had been sent for the despatch of a body of
+constabulary for the protection of the settlers. Sir Donald M'Lean, the
+superintendent of the province, sent word that this was impossible at
+present, as the alarming news had just been received that the notorious
+chief Te Kooti, who had been captured and imprisoned at Chatham Island,
+had effected his escape with the whole of the natives confined in the
+island, had captured a schooner, and had, it was reported, landed near
+Poverty Bay.
+
+"It is probable," Sir Donald wrote, "that it is the news of his landing
+which has excited one of the tribes of the neighbourhood to make an
+attack upon you. A strong expedition will be fitted out, and we shall
+doubtless have to supply a contingent. I can only advise you to organize
+yourselves into a militia, and to stand for the present on the
+defensive. As soon as operations begin from Poverty Bay you will be
+relieved from all further danger, as the attention of the hostile
+tribes will be fully occupied in that direction."
+
+Hitherto the province of Hawke Bay had been comparatively free from the
+troubles that had so long disturbed Auckland, Taranaki, and the northern
+portion of Wellington. Only one rising had taken place, and this had
+been so promptly crushed that the tribes had since remained perfectly
+quiet. In October 1866 a party of a hundred fighting men had suddenly
+appeared near the Meanee village. Their principal chief had hitherto
+borne a very high character, and had been employed by the government to
+improve the mail road between Napier and Taupo. Colonel Whitmore, who
+was in command of the colonial forces--for the regular troops had now
+been almost entirely withdrawn from the island--had just returned from
+punishing some natives who had committed massacres higher up on the
+coast, and was, fortunately, at Napier; he at once despatched a company
+of colonists under Major Fraser, with thirty or forty friendly natives,
+to hold the natives in check.
+
+Just as they had been sent off the news came that another and more
+numerous body of Hau-Haus were advancing by way of Petane to attack
+Napier. Major Fraser and his company were sent off to check these, while
+Colonel Whitmore, with one hundred and eighty of the colonial militia,
+marched against the smaller force, and M'Lean, with two hundred friendly
+natives, established himself in the rear of the village they occupied.
+An officer was sent in to summon them to surrender, and as no answer
+could be obtained from them the colonists advanced. The enemy fought
+with resolution, but the colonists opened a cross-fire upon them, and
+after fighting for some time the natives were driven out of their cover.
+Finding no mode of retreat open to them they laid down their arms, some
+who endeavoured to escape being cut off and also captured. The native
+loss was twenty-three killed and twenty-eight wounded--many of them
+mortally; forty-four taken prisoners. Only two or three of the whole
+party escaped. Upon the same day Major Fraser's little force attacked
+the other party of Hau-Haus, killed their chief with twelve of his
+followers, and put the rest to flight.
+
+From that time peace had been unbroken in Hawke Bay; but there had been
+several outbreaks at Poverty Bay, which lay just north of the province,
+and massacres at Opotaki and other places further to the north, and
+almost continuous fighting in the northern districts of Wellington. The
+news of Te Kooti's escape and of his landing at Poverty Bay naturally
+caused considerable alarm among the settlers, but hopes were entertained
+that the whites at Poverty Bay, aided by the friendly natives, would be
+able to recapture Te Kooti and his followers before they could do any
+harm.
+
+The next day a small vessel came down from Poverty Bay with a message
+from Major Biggs, who commanded at that settlement, to ask for
+assistance if it could be spared him. A consultation was held and it was
+agreed that the best plan of defending their own settlement was to aid
+in the recapture of Te Kooti, and that the little force of twenty men
+should at once go up to aid the settlers under Major Biggs. Accordingly
+they embarked without delay, Mr. Atherton making a separate bargain
+with the captain of the craft for his passage, and the next morning they
+arrived in Poverty Bay.
+
+Major Biggs had, as soon as the news reached him, raised a force of a
+hundred Europeans and natives. He found Te Kooti's party, a hundred and
+ninety strong, holding a very strong position near the sea, and sent a
+chief to them to say that if they would lay down their arms he would try
+and smooth matters over with government. A defiant answer was returned,
+and Major Biggs gave orders to commence the attack. But the natives, who
+formed the bulk of his force, refused to move, saying that the Hau-Haus
+were too numerous and too strongly posted. Under these circumstances an
+attack was impossible, for had the little body of whites been defeated
+the whole settlement would have been open to ravage and destruction.
+
+During the night Te Kooti and his men started for the interior, carrying
+with them all the stores and provisions they had taken from the
+schooner. When it was found they had escaped Major Biggs ordered Mr.
+Skipwith to follow with some friendly natives, pressing on their rear
+until he ascertained their line of retreat, when he was to cut across
+country and join the main body who were to march to Paparatu, a point
+which Te Kooti would in all probability pass in his retreat. The arrival
+of the coaster with the little band from the Mohaka River was hailed
+with joy by the Poverty Bay settlers. They arrived just in time to join
+Major Biggs, and raised his force to fifty white men, who, with thirty
+Maoris, started for Paparatu and arrived there on the following
+morning. The Europeans were commanded by Captains Westrupp and Wilson.
+In the afternoon Mr. Atherton arrived with a party of four natives whom
+he had hired to carry his store of provisions, ammunition, and baggage.
+
+"So I am in plenty of time," he said when he came up. "I could not bring
+myself to undertake a night march, but as those fellows have got to lug
+all the stores they have captured over the mountains I felt pretty sure
+that I should be in time."
+
+"I am glad you are in time, Mr. Atherton," Wilfrid said. "The assistance
+of your rifle is not to be despised. The sooner the natives come now the
+better, for we have only brought four days' provisions in our
+haversacks. I hear that a reserve force is to come up in two days with
+rations and ammunition; but one can never calculate upon these natives."
+
+The camp was pitched in a hollow to avoid the observation of the enemy,
+but it was proposed to fight at a point a mile distant, in a position
+commanding the spur of the hill, up which the natives must advance after
+crossing a ford on the Arai River. Four days passed and there was no
+news of the convoy with the provisions, and the supply in camp was
+almost exhausted. That evening Major Biggs started to bring up the
+supplies with all speed, as otherwise starvation would compel the force
+to retreat. The same day Mr. Skipwith had arrived with news that Te
+Kooti was undoubtedly marching on Paparatu, but was making slow progress
+owing to the heavy loads his men were carrying.
+
+The fifth day passed slowly. The men being altogether without food Mr.
+Atherton divided his small stock of provisions and wine among them, and
+then taking his rifle went out among the hills, accompanied by two of
+his natives. Late in the evening he returned, the natives bearing an old
+boar which he had shot. This was a great piece of luck, for the island
+contained no wild animals fit for eating, and the boar had probably
+escaped from some settler's farm or native clearing when young and taken
+to the woods. It was at once cut up and divided among the hungry men.
+The next day Mr. Skipwith, with two natives, went out to reconnoitre,
+and soon returned at full speed, saying that the natives were crossing
+the river. Captain Wilson, with twenty men, took possession of a hill on
+the right flank--an almost impregnable position, while Captain Westrupp,
+with the main body, marched to support the picket which had been placed
+on the position which it had been arranged they should occupy; but
+before they could arrive there Te Kooti, with overwhelming numbers, had
+driven the picket from the ground and occupied the hill.
+
+"This is going to be an awkward business, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said.
+"We have only thirty rounds of ammunition a man, and we have had nothing
+to eat for the last forty-eight hours but a mouthful of meat. We have
+suffered the natives to take the position we fixed on. We are
+outnumbered three to one, and there are not ten men in the force who
+have had any experience in fighting. If the worst comes to the worst,
+Wilfrid, do you and the Allens take to the bush. Mind, it is no use
+trying to run from the natives. If the men were all like our party the
+other day we could keep these fellows at bay for any time; but they are
+most of them young hands. They will blaze away their ammunition, and may
+be seized with a panic. I shall keep close to you, and if things do go
+badly we will keep together and sell our lives dearly."
+
+"We must retake that place if possible, lads," Captain Westrupp said at
+that moment. "Spread out in skirmishing order and take advantage of any
+cover you can find, but let there be no stopping or lagging behind. We
+must all get up there together and carry it with a rush."
+
+There was no time lost. The men spread out, and with a cheer started up
+the hill. They were received with a storm of bullets; but the natives
+from their eminence fired high, and without suffering loss they reached
+a small ridge near the summit, about twelve yards from the enemy, and
+separated from them by a narrow gully. Here they threw themselves down,
+and their fire at once caused the Hau-Haus to throw themselves down
+among the bushes on their side of the gully. The position of the
+colonists was a fairly strong one. On their right flank the ground was
+open, with a few scattered bushes here and there, but the left was
+covered by a steep ravine, which fell away sharply. The Hau-Haus kept up
+a heavy fire, to which the colonists replied but seldom, their officer
+continually impressing upon them the necessity for husbanding their
+ammunition. Mr. Atherton had arrived breathless in the rear of the
+party, and had thrown himself down by Wilfrid's side, the two Allens
+lying next in order. For some minutes Mr. Atherton did not speak, but
+lay panting heavily.
+
+"This is a nice preparation for shooting," he said presently. "However,
+I suppose my hand will steady itself after a bit. I have seen a fellow's
+head show under that bush there twice, and each time his bullet came
+just over our heads. I will have a talk with him as soon as I get my
+wind back again. This is not a bad position after all, providing they
+don't work round to our right."
+
+Ten minutes later Wilfrid, who had his eyes fixed on a bush from which
+four or five shots had been fired, waiting for another puff of smoke to
+indicate the exact position in which the man was lying, heard the sharp
+report of Mr. Atherton's rifle.
+
+"You have got him, I suppose?"
+
+"Of course, lad; there is one less of the yelling rascals to deal with.
+I wish we could see Biggs and his people coming along the road behind.
+If we could get a square meal all round and a good supply of ammunition
+I think we should be able to turn the tables on these fellows. The men
+are all fighting very steadily, and are husbanding their ammunition
+better than I expected to see them do."
+
+The fight went on for four hours. Then a number of the Hau-Haus leapt to
+their feet and made a rush towards the settlers, but the volley they
+received proved too much for them. Several fell, and the rest bolted
+back into shelter. Again and again this was tried, but each time without
+success. At three in the afternoon some men were seen coming along the
+road behind towards the deserted camp. Captain Westrupp at once wrote a
+note and sent it down by one of the men, but to the disappointment of
+the settlers he soon returned with the news that the new arrivals
+consisted of only nine Maoris carrying rations. They had opened the rum
+bottles on their way, and most of them were excessively drunk. Two of
+them who were sufficiently sober came up to help in the defence, but one
+was shot dead almost immediately, one of the settlers being killed and
+many wounded more or less severely.
+
+Just as evening was coming on the force was startled by hearing a
+Hau-Hau bugle in their rear, and presently made out a party of the enemy
+moving towards the camp through the broken ground on the left rear. It
+was now evident that either the enemy must be driven off the hill in
+front or the party must retire to a position on the hill behind the
+camp. Captain Westrupp determined to try the former alternative first.
+Calling upon the men to follow him, he dashed across the gully and up on
+to the crest held by the Maoris. The men followed him gallantly; but the
+fire from the Maoris hidden among the bushes was so heavy that they were
+forced to fall back again, seven more of their number being wounded.
+They now retired in good order down to the camp and up the hill behind
+it, and were here joined by Captain Wilson with his twenty men.
+
+It was now determined to throw up a sort of intrenchment and hold this
+position until help came; but the settlers, who had hitherto fought
+well, were dispirited by their want of success, and by the non-arrival
+of the reinforcement, and were weak with their long fast. As soon as it
+became dark they began to steal off and to make their way back towards
+their homes, and in an hour half the force had retreated. The officers
+held a council. It was evident the position could not long be held, and
+that want of food and ammunition would compel a retreat in the morning.
+It was therefore decided to fall back under cover of the darkness.
+
+The chief of the friendly natives, who had behaved admirably through the
+fight, offered to guide the party across the country. The officers were
+obliged to leave their horses, and the party of forty half-starved men,
+of whom a fourth were wounded--two so severely that it was necessary to
+carry them--set out. It was a terrible march for the exhausted men, up
+the bed of a mountain creek, often waist-deep in water, and over steep
+fern-covered hills, until, just as day was breaking, they reached an
+out-station. Here they managed to get two sheep, and just as they had
+cooked and eaten these Colonel Whitmore, the commander of the colonial
+forces, arrived with thirty volunteers from Napier, who had reached the
+bay on the previous day.
+
+He at once paraded the men, thanked them for their behaviour on the
+previous day, and warned them to be ready to start in pursuit of the
+enemy at once. One of the settlers, acting as spokesman for the rest,
+stepped forward, pointed out that they had been fighting without
+intermission for twenty-four hours, that they had been for the last
+forty-eight hours almost without food, and that it was impossible for
+them to set out on a fresh march until they had taken some rest. Colonel
+Whitmore was a hot-tempered man, and expressed himself so strongly that
+he caused deep offence among the settlers.
+
+They remained firm in their determination not to move until the
+following day, and the forward movement was therefore necessarily
+abandoned. On the day previous to the fight Lieutenant Gascoigne had
+been despatched by Major Biggs to Te Wairoa with despatches for Mr.
+Deighton, who commanded at that station, warning him to muster all the
+force at his disposal, and prepare to intercept Te Kooti at the Waihau
+Lakes in case he should fight his way through Captain Westrupp's force.
+Orders were sent to the friendly Mahia tribe to muster, and a hundred
+men at once assembled; but as they had only four rounds of ammunition
+apiece, nothing could be done until three casks of ammunition were
+obtained from some of the Wairoa chiefs.
+
+Two days were lost in consequence, and this gave time to Te Kooti; they
+then started--eighteen European volunteers and eighty natives; a larger
+body of natives preparing to follow as soon as possible. After being met
+by messengers with several contradictory orders, they arrived at Waihau,
+and just before dark Te Kooti was seen crossing the hills towards them
+with his whole force. Captain Richardson determined to fight them in the
+position he occupied, but the native chief, with sixty of his followers,
+at once bolted. Captain Richardson was therefore obliged with the
+remainder to fall back, and, unfortunately, in the retreat one of the
+natives fell; his gun went off and, bursting, injured his hand. This was
+considered by the natives a most unfortunate omen, and dissipated what
+little courage remained in the Wairoa tribe.
+
+At eleven o'clock next morning the enemy advanced and the action began;
+but the Wairoa chief, with fifty of his men, again bolted at the first
+shot. Captain Richardson with the remainder held the position until four
+in the afternoon, when the ammunition being almost exhausted, he retired
+quietly. The force fell back to Wairoa, where it was reorganized and
+increased to two hundred men. In the meantime Colonel Whitmore had been
+toiling on over a terrible country in Te Kooti's rear, having with him
+in all about two hundred men, as he had been joined by Major Fraser with
+fifty of the No. 1 Division Armed Constabulary.
+
+But when they arrived at the boundary of the Poverty Bay district the
+settlers belonging to it, who had not recovered from their indignation
+at Colonel Whitmore's unfortunate remarks, refused to go further, saying
+that the militia regulations only obliged them to defend their own
+district. Colonel Whitmore, therefore, with a hundred and thirty men, of
+whom but a handful were whites, marched on to attack two hundred and
+twenty Hau-Haus posted in a very strong position in the gorge of a
+river. Twelve of the little party from the Mohaka River still remained
+with the column, one had been killed, four wounded, while five had
+remained behind completely knocked up by the fatigues they had
+encountered.
+
+Mr. Atherton had not gone on with them after the arrival of Colonel
+Whitmore. "It is of no use, my dear lad," he said to Wilfrid. "I know
+Colonel Whitmore well by reputation, and the way in which he blew us up
+this morning because, exhausted as we were, we were physically unable to
+set out for a fresh march, confirms what I have heard of him. He is a
+most gallant officer, and is capable of undergoing the greatest fatigue
+and hardships, and is of opinion that everyone else is as tireless and
+energetic as he is. He will drive you along over mountain, through
+rivers, with food or without food, until you come up to Te Kooti, and
+then he will fight, regardless of odds or position, or anything else. It
+isn't the fighting I object to; but I never could keep up with the
+column on such a march. It would be a physical impossibility, and I am
+not going to attempt it. I shall take a week to recover from my fatigues
+of last night, and shall go down and stay quietly at the settlement. If
+Te Kooti takes it into his head to come down there, I shall have great
+pleasure in doing my best towards putting a stop to his rampaging over
+the country. If he does not come down I shall, as they say, await
+developments, and shall find plenty to do in the way of botanizing."
+
+Mr. Atherton had not exaggerated the fatigues and hardships that the
+force would be called upon to undergo, and they were worn out and
+exhausted when at last they came upon the track of the Hau-Haus. When
+they were resting for a short halt Captain Carr, late R.A., who was with
+the force as a volunteer, reconnoitred a short distance ahead and found
+the enemy's fire still burning. The news infused fresh life into the
+tired and hungry men, and they again went forward. The track led up the
+bed of a river which ran between low, steep cliffs impossible to climb,
+and the men had to advance in single file. After marching for some
+distance they reached a bend in the river, where a narrow track ran
+through a break in the cliff and up the spur of a hill. The advanced
+guard, consisting of six men, led by Captain Carr, were within fifty
+yards of this point, when a heavy fire was opened upon them. Just where
+they were the river bank was sufficiently low to enable them to climb it
+and take cover in the thick scrub above, whence they replied vigorously
+to the Hau-Haus, who were within a few yards of them. In the meantime
+the enemy had opened fire from the base of the hill at the river bend
+upon the main body, who, standing in single file in the river, were
+unable to reply or to scale the steep bank and take covering in the
+scrub. Colonel Whitmore and Captain Tuke tried to lead the men up to
+charge, but this could only be done in single file, and the fire of the
+enemy was so hot that those who attempted this were killed or wounded,
+Captain Tuke being severely hurt. The rest found what shelter they could
+among the boulders in the river bed, and remained here until the
+advanced guard fell back, hard pressed by the enemy, and reported the
+death of Captain Carr and Mr. Canning, another volunteer.
+
+The natives now pressed through the scrub above the cliffs to cut off
+the retreat. The friendly natives, who were well behind, were ordered to
+scale the cliff then, and hold the enemy in check. One of them was
+wounded, and the rest hastily retreated down the river; the constabulary
+and settlers, altogether about fifty strong, fell back to an island
+about half a mile to the rear, and here calmly awaited the attack of the
+enemy. These, however, drew off without disturbing them, disheartened by
+the fact that Te Kooti had received a wound in the foot, and the troops
+then retired. Only a few of the strongest men reached the camp that
+night; the rest, knocked up by want of food and fatigue, lay down in
+the pouring rain and did not get in until the following morning.
+
+The result of this fight was most unfortunate. Even Colonel Whitmore saw
+that, with the force at his disposal, nothing could be done against Te
+Kooti, who was daily becoming more powerful, and was being joined by the
+tribes in the vicinity. He believed that Te Kooti would carry out his
+expressed intention of marching north to Waikato, and after collecting
+there all the tribes of the island, march against Auckland. Thinking,
+therefore, that Poverty Bay was not likely to be disturbed, he left the
+settlement and went round by sea to Auckland to confer with government
+as to the steps to be taken to raise a force capable of coping with what
+appeared to be the greatest danger that had as yet threatened the
+island. Te Kooti did not, however, move north, but remained in his camp
+near the scene of the fight from the 8th of August to the 28th of
+October, sending messages all over the island with the news of the
+defeat he had inflicted upon the whites, and proclaiming himself the
+saviour of the Maori people.
+
+From the position he occupied, about equidistant from the settlements at
+Wairoa and Poverty Bay, he was able to attack either by a sudden march
+of two or three days, and yet there was no great uneasiness among the
+settlers. The force that had operated against Te Kooti had been
+disbanded, the Napier volunteers had returned, the constabulary
+withdrawn, and the party of settlers from the Mohaka river had returned
+home. Wilfrid Renshaw had not gone with them. He had been shot through
+the leg in the fight in the river, and had been carried down to the
+settlement. Here Mr. Atherton, who was lodging in one of the settler's
+houses, had taken charge of him and nursed him assiduously.
+
+Unfortunately the effect of the wound was aggravated by the exhaustion
+caused by fatigue and insufficient food, and for weeks the lad lay in a
+state of prostration, wasted by a low fever which at one time seemed as
+if it would carry him off. It was not until the middle of October that
+matters took a turn, and he began slowly to mend. For the last three
+weeks his mother had been by his bedside. For some time Mr. Atherton in
+his letters had made light of the wound, but when the lad's condition
+became very serious he had written to Mrs. Renshaw saying that he
+thought she had better come herself to help in the nursing, as Wilfrid
+was now suffering from a sharp attack of fever brought on by his
+hardships.
+
+Mrs. Renshaw, on her arrival, was dismayed at the state in which she
+found her son. She agreed, however, that it was best not to alarm them
+in her letters home. The events on the attack of the settlement had much
+shaken Mr. Renshaw, and he was, when she left him, in a nervous and
+excited state. She saw that Wilfrid would need every moment of her time,
+and that were her husband to come it would probably do him harm and
+seriously interfere with her own usefulness. He was, when she left, on
+the point of returning to the farm with Marion, as there had been no
+further renewal of troubles in the settlement.
+
+It had been arranged that the two Allens should take up their residence
+at The Glade, and that four men belonging to a small force that had
+been raised among the friendly natives should also be stationed there.
+This would, it was thought, render it quite safe against sudden attack.
+Mr. Renshaw was looking eagerly forward to being at home again, and his
+wife thought that the necessity of superintending the operations at the
+farm would soothe his nerves and restore him to health. She, therefore,
+in her letters made the best of things, although admitting that Wilfrid
+was prostrated by a sort of low fever, and needed care and nursing.
+
+At the end of another fortnight Wilfrid was enabled to sit up and take
+an interest in what was going on around him. The house was the property
+of a settler named Sampson, and had been erected by a predecessor of the
+farmer; it was a good deal larger than he required, though its capacity
+was now taxed to the utmost by the addition of three lodgers to his
+family.
+
+"How are things going on, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid asked one day when his
+mother was not present.
+
+"People here seem to think that they are going on very well, Wilfrid."
+
+"But you do not think so, Mr. Atherton?" the lad asked, struck by the
+dry tone in which the answer was given.
+
+"No, Wilfrid, I cannot say I do. It seems to me that the people here are
+living in a fool's paradise; and as for Major Biggs I regard him as an
+obstinate fool."
+
+"How is that?" Wilfrid asked, amused at his friend's vehemence.
+
+"Well, Wilfrid, as far as I can see there is nothing in the world to
+prevent Te Kooti coming down and cutting all our throats whenever he
+pleases."
+
+"You don't say so, Mr. Atherton!"
+
+"I do, indeed; it is known that he has sent messages down to the natives
+here to remain apparently loyal, get what arms they can from the whites,
+and prepare to join him. I will say for Biggs that he has repeatedly
+represented the unprotected position of the bay to government, and has
+obtained permission to place an officer and nine men on pay as scouts to
+watch the roads leading to the settlements. Gascoigne is in charge of
+them. There are two roads by which the natives can come; the one a short
+one, and this is being watched, the other a much longer and more
+difficult one, and this is entirely open to them if they choose to use
+it.
+
+"The fact is, Biggs relies on the fact that Colonel Lambert is at
+Wairoa, and is collecting a force of 600 men there to attack Te Kooti,
+and he believes that he shall get information from him and from some
+spies he has in the neighbourhood of Te Kooti's camp long before any
+movement is actually made. Of course he may do so, but I consider it is
+a very risky thing to trust the safety of the whole settlement to
+chance. He ought to station four mounted men on both tracks as near as
+he dare to Te Kooti's camp. In that case we should be sure to get news
+in plenty of time to put all the able-bodied men under arms before the
+enemy could reach the settlement."
+
+"Have they got a stockade built?"
+
+"No, it was proposed at a meeting of some of the settlers that this
+should be done, but Biggs assured them it was altogether unnecessary. I
+do not know how it is, Wilfrid, but take us all together we Englishmen
+have fully a fair share of common sense. I have observed over and over
+again that in the majority of cases when an Englishman reaches a certain
+rank in official life, he seems to become an obstinate blockhead. I have
+often wondered over it, but cannot account for it. Anyhow the state of
+affairs here is an excellent example of this. I suppose in the whole
+settlement there is not, with the exception of the man in authority, a
+single person who does not perceive that the situation is a dangerous
+one, and that no possible precaution should be omitted; and yet the man
+who is responsible for the safety of all throws cold water on every
+proposal, and snubs those who are willing to give up time and labour in
+order to ensure the safety of the place.
+
+"I suppose he considers that the tone he adopts shows him to be a man
+superior to those around him, possessing alike far greater knowledge of
+the situation, and a total freedom from the cowardly fears of his
+neighbours. Well, well, I hope that events will justify his course, but
+I own that I sleep with my rifle and revolvers loaded and ready to hand.
+Mind, I do not say that the chances may not be ten to one against Te
+Kooti's making a raid down here; but I say if they were a hundred to one
+it would be the height of folly not to take every possible precaution to
+ensure the safety of all here."
+
+"Don't you think, Mr. Atherton, that it would be better for mother to go
+home? I am getting all right now, and can get on very well without
+her."
+
+"I am sure your mother would not leave you at present, Wilfrid, and I
+don't think you will be fit to be moved for another fortnight yet. Te
+Kooti has done nothing for two months, and may not move for as much
+more. Your mother knows nothing of what I have told you, and I should
+not make her anxious or uncomfortable by giving her even a hint that I
+considered there is danger in the air."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV.
+
+THE MASSACRE AT POVERTY BAY.
+
+
+Another week passed and Wilfrid was able to walk about the house and
+garden. A ship was going down in three days, and Mr. Atherton had
+arranged with the captain to put into the Mohaka river and land them
+there. No change had taken place in the situation. There had been a
+meeting of the settlers and friendly natives. The latter had offered to
+erect the stockades for a small fort if the settlers would do the
+earthworks. This they had agreed to, but the project was abandoned, as
+Major Biggs again declared it to be wholly unnecessary. Some of the
+settlers, dissatisfied with the result, formed themselves into a
+vigilance committee to watch the ford of the Waipaoa River.
+
+This was done for several nights, but Major Biggs again interfered, and
+told them he considered the act to be absurd. The vigilance committee,
+therefore, ceased to act. A few nights later Te Kooti's people crossed
+at this very ford. Late in the evening of the 4th of November Mr.
+Atherton was about to go up to bed when he heard a growl from a dog
+chained up outside. He listened, and made out the voices of men talking
+in low tones. The lower windows had shutters, and these Mr. Atherton had
+with some difficulty persuaded Mr. Sampson, who was himself incredulous
+as to the possibility of attack, to have fastened up of a night. Mr.
+Atherton ran upstairs, knocked at the doors of Wilfrid's and the
+settler's rooms, and told them to get up instantly, as something was
+wrong. Then he threw up his window.
+
+"Who is there?" he asked.
+
+"Open the door," a native replied, "we have a message for you."
+
+"You can give me the message here. I shall not come down until I know
+who you are."
+
+"The message is that you are to open the door and come out. Te Kooti
+wants you."
+
+Mr. Atherton could just make out the figure of the speaker in the
+darkness.
+
+"That is my answer," he said as he fired.
+
+A fierce yell from twenty throats rose in the air, and there was a rush
+towards the door, while two or three shots were fired at the window. Mr.
+Atherton had, however, stepped back the instant he had discharged his
+rifle, and now, leaning out, discharged the chambers of his revolver in
+quick succession among the natives gathered round the door. Shrieks and
+yells arose from them, and they bounded away into the darkness, and
+again several musket-shots were fired at the window. By this time the
+settler and Wilfrid had both joined Mr. Atherton, having leapt from
+their beds, seized their arms, and ran out when the first shot was
+fired.
+
+"It is Te Kooti's men," Mr. Atherton said. "They have come at last. I
+expect there will be a few minutes before they attack again. You had
+better throw on some clothes at once and tell the ladies to dress
+instantly. We may have to leave the house and try to escape across
+country."
+
+Wilfrid and the settler gave the messages, and then returned.
+
+"How many of them do you think there are?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"About twenty of them, I should say, and we could rely upon beating them
+off; but no doubt there are parties told off to the attack of all the
+outlying settlers, and when the others have done their work they may
+gather here."
+
+"Where are they now?" Wilfrid asked as he gazed into the darkness.
+
+"I fancy they are behind that shed over there. They are no doubt
+arranging their plan of attack. I expect they will try fire. There! do
+you see? That is the flash of a match."
+
+A minute later a light was seen to rise behind the shed, and there was
+the sound of breaking wood. The light grew brighter and brighter.
+
+"They will be coming soon," Mr. Atherton said. "Do not throw away a
+shot. The shingles on this roof are as dry as tinder, and if a burning
+brand falls on them the place will be in a blaze in five minutes. Now!"
+As he spoke a number of natives, each carrying a flaming brand, appeared
+from behind the wood shed. The three rifles cracked out, and as many
+natives fell. The farmer began to reload his rifle, while Mr. Atherton
+and Wilfrid handed theirs to Mrs. Renshaw, who at that moment joined
+them, and opened fire with their revolvers. Only two of Wilfrid's shots
+told, but Mr. Atherton's aim was as steady as when firing at a mark. Two
+of the natives fell, and four others, throwing down their brands, ran
+back wounded to the shelter of the wood shed. Their companions, after a
+moment's hesitation, followed their example. There were now but six
+unwounded men out of the twenty who attacked the house.
+
+"There is one of them off for assistance!" Wilfrid exclaimed as he
+caught sight of a figure running at full speed from the shed. In another
+moment he was lost in the darkness.
+
+"Now is the time for us to make our escape," Mr. Atherton said, turning
+from the window. "We have succeeded so far, but there may be three times
+as many next time, and we must be off. We will get out by a window at
+the back of the house and try and make our way across country to the
+Mahia tribe. We shall be safe there."
+
+"But Wilfrid cannot walk a hundred yards," Mrs. Renshaw said.
+
+"Then we must carry him," Mr. Atherton replied cheerfully. "He is no
+great weight, and we can make a litter when we get far enough away. Take
+a loaf of bread, Mrs. Sampson, a bottle or two of water, and a flask of
+spirits. You will find one full on my table. Please hurry up, for there
+is not a moment to lose. I will stay here to the last moment and fire an
+occasional shot at the shed to let them know that we are still here."
+
+As the course Mr. Atherton advised was evidently the best, the others
+followed his instructions without discussion, and three minutes later
+stepped out from the back window into the garden. Mr. Atherton had been
+told that they were ready, and after firing a last shot from the window
+and reloading his rifle joined them. Mrs. Sampson had a small basket on
+one arm, and her child, who was ten years old, grasping her hand. Mrs.
+Renshaw had taken charge of Wilfrid's rifle, and had offered him her
+arm, but the excitement had given him his strength for the moment, and
+he declared himself perfectly capable of walking without assistance.
+
+"Go on as quietly as you can," Mr. Atherton said. "I will keep a bit
+behind first. They may possibly have put somebody on the watch on this
+side of the house, although I do not expect they have. They have been
+taken too much by surprise themselves."
+
+The little party went on quietly and noiselessly about three hundred
+yards, and then Mr. Atherton joined them. Wilfrid was breathing heavily
+and leaning against a tree.
+
+"Now jump up upon my back, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said; "your weight
+will not make much difference to me one way or the other. That is right;
+lend him a hand, Sampson, and get him on to my shoulders. It will be
+easier for both of us, for I have got no hips for his knees to catch
+hold of. That is right. Now if you will take my gun we shall get along
+merrily."
+
+They walked fast for about two miles. Wilfrid several times offered to
+get down, saying that he could walk again for a bit, but Mr. Atherton
+would not hear of it. At the end of two miles they reached the spot
+where the country was covered with low scrub.
+
+"We are pretty safe now," Mr. Atherton said, "we can turn off from the
+track and take to the scrub for shelter, and there will be little chance
+of their finding us. Now, Wilfrid, I will set you down for a bit. This
+is fine exercise for me, and if I were to carry you a few miles every
+day I should fine down wonderfully. Ah! the others have come up;" he
+broke off as the sound of a native yell sounded on the still night air,
+and looking round they saw a bright light rising in the direction from
+which they had come.
+
+"They have set fire to the house," the settler said; "there goes the
+result of six years' work. However, I need not grumble over that, now
+that we have saved our lives."
+
+"We had best be moving on," Mr. Atherton said. "No doubt they opened a
+heavy fire before they set fire to the shingles with their brands, but
+the fact that we did not return their fire must have roused their
+suspicions, and by this time they must have woke up to the fact that we
+have escaped. They will hunt about for a bit, no doubt, round the house,
+and may send a few men some distance along the tracks, but they will
+know there is very little chance of catching us until daylight. Now,
+Sampson, let us join arms, your right and my left. Wilfrid can sit on
+them and put his arms round our necks. We carry our rifles on our other
+shoulders, and that will balance matters. That is right. Now on we go
+again." With occasional halts they went on for another four hours. By
+this time the ladies and the little girl were completely exhausted from
+stumbling over roots and low shrubs in the darkness and the two men also
+were thoroughly fatigued; for the night was extremely hot, and the work
+of carrying Wilfrid in addition to the weight of their ammunition, told
+upon them. They had long since lost the path, but knew by the stars that
+they were keeping in the right direction.
+
+"Now we will have a few hours' halt," Mr. Atherton said. "We may
+consider ourselves as perfectly safe from pursuit, though we shall have
+to be cautious, for there may be parties of these scoundrels wandering
+about the country. We may hope that a good many of the settlers heard
+the firing and made off in time, but I fear we shall hear some sad
+stories of this night's work."
+
+Lying down the whole party were in a few minutes fast asleep. Wilfrid
+had offered to keep watch, saying that he had done no walking and could
+very well keep awake, but Mr. Atherton said that nothing would be gained
+by it. "You could see nothing, and you would hear nothing until a party
+of natives were quite close, and unless they happened by sheer accident
+to stumble upon us they could not find us; besides, though you have done
+no absolute walking, the exertion of sitting up and holding on has been
+quite as much for you in your weak state as carrying you has been for
+us. No, we had best all take a rest so as to start fresh in the
+morning."
+
+Mr. Atherton woke as soon as daylight broke, and rousing himself,
+cautiously looked round. There was nothing in sight, and he decided to
+let the party sleep for a few hours longer. It was eight o'clock and the
+sun was high before the others opened their eyes.
+
+Mr. Atherton was standing up. "There is a horseman coming across the
+plain," he said; "no doubt he is following the track; by the line he is
+taking he will pass a little to our right. I will go out to hear the
+news. I think you had better remain where you are, he may be followed."
+
+Mr. Atherton walked through the bush until he reached the track just as
+the rider came along.
+
+"Ah! you have escaped, Mr. Atherton; I am glad of that. Have all your
+party got away?"
+
+"Yes, thank God!" Mr. Atherton said; "and now what is the news?"
+
+"I cannot tell all," the settler said, "but there has been a terrible
+massacre. I was pressing wool for Dodd and Peppard, whose station, you
+know, lies some distance from any other. I rode up there just as day was
+breaking and went to the wool shed. Nobody came, and I heard the dog
+barking angrily; so I went up to the house to see what was the matter. I
+found the back-door open and the two men lying dead inside, evidently
+killed by natives. I then galloped off to the Mission Station and warned
+them there, and then to the stations of Hawthorne and Strong. I found
+they had already been warned, and were just about to start; then I rode
+to Matawhero to warn the settlers there. Most of them had already made
+off. I passed Bigg's house on the way; there were a number of natives
+round it evidently in possession, and as I passed Mann's house I saw
+him and his wife and child lying outside dead. How many more have been
+murdered I do not know. It is an awful business. Where are your
+friends?"
+
+"They are in the scrub there. We are making our way to the Mahia."
+
+"Most of the settlers who have escaped have made for the old redoubt at
+Taranganui, and I fancy they will be able to beat off any attack made on
+them. I am riding for Wairoa. I cannot think what they can have been
+about there to let Te Kooti slip away without sending us a warning. He
+must have come by the long road and been six or seven days on the
+march."
+
+"Have you seen any natives since you started?" Mr. Atherton asked.
+
+"I saw a party of about twenty of them moving across the country about
+two miles back. They were scattered about in the bush, and were, I
+expect, in search of fugitives. They were moving across the line I was
+going, and were half a mile away; but when they come on this path they
+may follow it, knowing that those who made their escape and did not go
+to the redoubt would be likely to try to reach the Mahia country."
+
+"Thank you! then we will be moving on without delay," Mr. Atherton said;
+and the settler at once rode on with his message to the force at Wairoa.
+As soon as Mr. Atherton joined the party and told them what he had heard
+they again set out. After walking for four miles they reached the edge
+of the plain, and the path here ascended a sharp rise and entered a
+narrow defile.
+
+Wilfrid, who was sitting on Mr. Atherton's shoulders, looked back for
+the twentieth time as they ascended the rise. "They are following us!"
+he exclaimed. "There are a party of fifteen or twenty coming along the
+path at a run. They are not more than a mile behind at the outside."
+
+"Then I will put you down, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said quietly; "that
+will give me time to cool down a bit before they arrive. They could not
+have come up at a better place for us. It is no use our trying to hide,
+they would track us directly. We must make a stand at the mouth of this
+defile. It is a good place for defence, and if it were not for this
+rascally bush we should have no difficulty in keeping them off. Even as
+it is I think we can make a good fight of it. Now, Mrs. Renshaw, will
+you and Mrs. Sampson and the child go a little way in and sit down. I
+have no doubt we shall be able to beat these fellows back, and if we do
+that we can hope to make the rest of our journey without further
+molestation."
+
+"Could I be of any use in loading the rifles, Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"I think not, Mrs. Renshaw; it may be a long skirmish, and we shall have
+plenty of time to load; and your being here with us and running the risk
+of being hit would make us nervous. I think, if you do not mind, we
+would much rather know that you are in safety behind us."
+
+"Very well," Mrs. Renshaw said quietly; "I will do what you think best.
+We shall be praying for your success until it is over."
+
+Mr. Atherton looked round after the two ladies had gone on. "There is a
+bush with a wide ledge of flat ground behind it," he said, pointing to a
+little clump of underwood some ten feet above them on the side of the
+ravine. "I think, with my help, you can manage to clamber up there,
+Wilfrid. Lying down you will be able to fire under the bush and be in
+fair shelter. Mr. Sampson and I will hold the path here. If they make a
+rush you will be able to help us with your revolver. Up there you will
+have the advantage of being able to see movements among the bushes
+better than we shall, and can fire down at them; and if it comes to a
+hand-to-hand fight will be of more use there than down here."
+
+Wilfrid at once assented. "Stand on my hand and I will hoist you up."
+Mr. Atherton raised Wilfrid until he was able to get on to the ledge of
+rock behind the bushes. Wilfrid laid himself down there, and with his
+knife cut off a few of the lower twigs so that he was able to get a good
+view ahead. "Keep yourself well back, lad, and do not raise your head
+except to fire. Do you see anything of them?"
+
+"Yes, they are not more than a quarter of a mile away and are scattering
+among the bushes. No doubt they caught sight of us as we came up here,
+and think it possible we may intend to defend the defile."
+
+"I will let them know we are here;" and Mr. Atherton made two steps
+forward to the mouth of the defile. Almost at the same instant he
+levelled his rifle and fired, and one of the Maoris threw up his arms
+and fell back, the rest throwing themselves down instantaneously among
+the bushes, whence a moment later two or three shots were fired. But Mr.
+Atherton had stepped back, and he and the settler, lying down on the
+ground, worked themselves forward until by raising their heads they
+could command a view of the slope up to the mouth of the ravine.
+
+For a time all was silent. Presently Wilfrid's rifle spoke out, and a
+yell testified to the fact that the quick aim he had taken at a dark
+figure stealing among the bushes had been true. It was followed quickly
+by a general discharge of their pieces by the natives. The bullets
+rattled thickly against the rock, and cut leaves from the bushes behind
+which Wilfrid was lying, but he had drawn himself back a foot or two the
+moment he fired, and the balls passed harmlessly over him. Not so the
+missive despatched by Mr. Atherton in the direction of a puff of smoke
+from a bush some forty yards away, for the figure behind it remained
+still and immovable while the fray went on. For upwards of an hour the
+exchange of shots continued, and then the assailants were joined by
+fifteen other natives, who had been attracted to the spot by the sound
+of firing.
+
+"I expect they will pluck up their courage to make a rush now, Wilfrid,"
+Mr. Atherton said. "If it had not been for these new arrivals I think
+they would have soon drawn off, for we must have diminished their
+numbers very considerably. Don't fire again for a bit; we had best keep
+our rifles loaded so as to be ready for them when they pluck up courage
+to charge. When they do, be sure you keep your revolver as a reserve for
+the critical moment."
+
+Five minutes later a tremendous yell rose in the air. The natives leaped
+to their feet from behind the bushes, fired their guns at their hidden
+foes, and then, tomahawk in hand, rushed forward.
+
+Three shots rang out almost simultaneously from the mouth of the defile
+and three of the natives dropped dead in their tracks. The rest rushed
+forward in a body. Mr. Atherton and the settler leapt to their feet, and
+the former opened fire with his Colt's revolver when the leading natives
+were within ten yards of him. His aim was as accurate as when directed
+against a mark stuck against a tree, and a man fell at each shot. But
+the natives' blood was thoroughly up now, and in spite of the slaughter
+they rushed forward. There was no room in the narrow defile for two men
+to swing their rifles, and Mr. Atherton and the settler stepped forward
+to meet the foe with their clubbed rifles in their hands. Two crashing
+blows were delivered with effect, but before the settler could again
+raise his weapon three Maoris were upon him. One tomahawk struck him in
+the shoulder and the rifle fell from his hands. Another raised his
+tomahawk to brain him, but fell with a bullet from Wilfrid's revolver
+through his chest; but the third native brought his weapon down with
+terrible force upon the settler's head, and he fell in a heap upon the
+ground. The tremendous strength of Mr. Atherton stood him in good stead
+now. The first blow he had dealt had smashed the stock of his rifle, but
+he whirled the iron barrel like a light twig round his head, dealing
+blows that broke down the defence of the natives as if their tomahawks
+had been straw, and beating them down as a flail would level a wheat
+stalk. Those in front of him recoiled from a strength which seemed to
+them superhuman, while whenever one tried to attack him in the rear
+Wilfrid's revolver came into play with fatal accuracy. At last, with a
+cry of terror, the surviving natives turned and retreated at the top of
+their speed.
+
+"Hot work, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said as he lowered his terrible weapon
+and wiped the streaming perspiration from his face; "but we have given
+the rascals such a lesson that we can journey on at our leisure. This is
+a bad business of poor Sampson's. I will help you down first and then we
+will see to him. Recharge your revolver, lad," he went on as Wilfrid
+stood beside him; "some of these fellows may not be dead, and may play
+us an ugly trick if we are not on the look-out."
+
+Wilfrid reloaded his pistol, and Mr. Atherton then stooped over the
+fallen man.
+
+"He is desperately hurt," he said, "but he breathes. Hand me that
+revolver, Wilfrid, and run back and tell Mrs. Sampson her husband is
+hurt."
+
+Wilfrid had gone but a yard or two when he met his mother and the
+settler's wife, who, hearing the cessation of the firing, were no longer
+able to restrain their anxiety as to what was going forward. Mrs.
+Renshaw gave a cry of joy at seeing Wilfrid walking towards her.
+
+"Is it all over, my boy, and are you unhurt?"
+
+"It is all over, mother, and they have bolted. I have not had a scratch,
+for I have been lying down all the time in shelter; but I am sorry to
+say, Mrs. Sampson, that your husband is badly hurt.
+
+"No; he is not dead," he continued in answer to the agonized expression
+of inquiry in her eyes. "He has been stunned by the blow of a tomahawk,
+and is, as I said, badly hurt; but he will, I trust, get over it."
+
+Mrs. Sampson ran forward and threw herself on her knees by her husband's
+side, uttering a suppressed cry as she saw the terrible wound on his
+head.
+
+"Wilfrid, there is a bottle of water untouched in the basket," Mr.
+Atherton said.
+
+"I will fetch it," Mrs. Renshaw broke in, hurrying away. "No, Milly,"
+she said, as the child who had been ordered to stay with the basket came
+running to meet her. "You must stay here for a little while. The natives
+have all run away, but your father is hurt and for a time must be kept
+quite quiet. I will send Wilfrid to sit with you."
+
+Taking a bottle of water and a cloth which covered the basket, Mrs.
+Renshaw hurried back. "Wilfrid," she said, "do you go and sit with the
+little one. You can do no good here, and look completely worn out. You
+will be making yourself useful if you amuse Milly and keep her away from
+here for the present."
+
+Mr. Atherton poured a little of the water into the cover of his flask,
+added some brandy, and poured a little of it between the wounded man's
+lips. Then he saturated the cloth with water and handed it to Mrs.
+Sampson, who wiped the blood from her husband's head and face, then
+poured a little water from the bottle on to his forehead. Some more
+brandy and water was poured between his lips and he uttered a faint
+groan.
+
+"I will examine his wound now, Mrs. Sampson. I have had some experience
+that way in my journeyings about the world." Kneeling down he
+carefully examined the wound.
+
+[Illustration: MR. ATHERTON KEEPS THE MOUTH OF THE DEFILE
+
+_Page 294_]
+
+"It is better than I hoped, Mrs. Sampson," he said cheerfully. "I expect
+the thick hat turned the tomahawk a little and it fell obliquely on the
+side of the head. It has carried away a goodish slice of the hair and
+scalp, and has starred the bone, but it has not crushed it in, and I
+think that with care and nursing your husband will not be long before he
+gets over it. You had better fold up that cloth again, pour some fresh
+water over it, and then bandage it over the wound with a slip of stuff
+torn off from the bottom of your petticoat. You had better tear off two
+slips, for his arm will require bandaging too. I will look to that as
+soon as you have done his head. No," he went on, when he saw that Mrs.
+Sampson's trembling fingers were quite incapable of fixing the bandage
+properly, "I do not think that will do. If you will allow me I will do
+it for you."
+
+He took Mrs. Sampson's place, and while Mrs. Renshaw supported the
+settler's head he wound the bandage tightly and skilfully round it. "Now
+for his arm," he said, and drawing out his knife cut the sleeve up the
+shoulder. "It has narrowly missed the artery," he went on; "but though
+it is an ugly-looking gash it is not serious. I wish we had some more
+water, but as we haven't we must do without it, and I daresay we shall
+come across a stream soon." When the operation of bandaging was complete
+Mr. Atherton stood up.
+
+"What are we to do next?" Mrs. Renshaw asked him.
+
+"We must cut a couple of saplings and make a litter," he said. "If one
+of you ladies can spare a petticoat, please take it off while I cut the
+poles." He went away and returned in a few minutes with two poles ten or
+eleven feet long.
+
+"Here is the petticoat," Mrs. Renshaw said. The settler's wife was too
+absorbed by her grief and anxiety to hear Mr. Atherton's request. "What
+is to be done with it?"
+
+"In the first place it must be taken out of that band, or whatever you
+call it," Mr. Atherton replied, "and then split right down. Here is my
+knife."
+
+When the garment had been operated upon there remained a length of
+strong calico nearly three feet wide and three yards long. "That will do
+well," he said. "Now we have to fasten this to the poles. How would you
+do that? It is more in your way than mine."
+
+"I should roll it twice round the pole and then sew it, if I had a
+needle and thread. If I had not that I should make holes in every six
+inches and tie it with string; but unfortunately we have no string
+either."
+
+"I think we can manage that," Mr. Atherton said; and he walked rapidly
+away and returned in a few minutes with some long stalks that looked
+like coarse grass.
+
+"This is the very thing, Mrs. Renshaw," he said; "this is what is called
+New Zealand flax, and I have no doubt it will be strong enough for our
+purpose." In a quarter of an hour the litter was completed. Just as it
+was finished Mrs. Sampson uttered an exclamation of joy, and turning
+round, they saw that her husband had opened his eyes and was looking
+round in a dazed, bewildered way.
+
+"It is all right, Sampson," Mr. Atherton said cheerfully; "we have
+thrashed the natives handsomely; they have bolted, and there is no fear
+of their coming back again. You have had a clip on the head with a
+tomahawk, but I do not think that you will be much the worse for it at
+the end of a week or two. We have just been manufacturing a litter for
+you, and now we will lift you on to it. Now, ladies, I will take him by
+the shoulders; will you take him by the feet, Mrs. Renshaw; and do you,
+Mrs. Sampson, support his head? That is the way. Now, I will just roll
+up my coat and put it under his head, and then I think he will do; lay
+our rifles beside him. Now, I will take the two handles at his head; do
+you each take one at his feet. The weight will not be great, and you can
+change about when your arms get tired. Yes, I see what you are thinking
+about, Mrs. Renshaw. We must go along bit by bit. We will carry our
+patient here for half a mile, then I will come back and fetch Wilfrid up
+to that point, then we will go on again, and so on."
+
+"All the hard work falls on you, Mr. Atherton; it is too bad," Mrs.
+Renshaw said with grateful tears in her eyes.
+
+"It will do me a world of good, Mrs. Renshaw. I must have lost over a
+stone weight since yesterday. If this sort of thing were to go on for a
+few weeks I should get into fighting condition. Now, are you both ready?
+Lift."
+
+In a short time they came to the point where Wilfrid and the child were
+sitting down together. Wilfrid had been impressing upon her that her
+father was hurt, and that she must be very good and quiet, and walk
+along quietly by her mother's side. So when they came along she got up
+and approached them with a subdued and awe-struck air. She took the hand
+her mother held out to her.
+
+"Is father very bad, mother?" she asked in a low tone.
+
+"He is better than he was, dear, and we must hope and pray that he will
+soon be well again; but at present you must not speak to him. He must be
+kept very quiet and not allowed to talk."
+
+"You sit where you are, Wilfrid, I will come back for you in half an
+hour," Mr. Atherton said.
+
+"That you won't Mr. Atherton," Wilfrid said, getting up. "I have had a
+long rest, for, except for pulling my trigger and loading, I have done
+nothing since the first short walk when we started this morning. All
+this excitement has done me a lot of good, and I feel as if I could walk
+ever so far."
+
+"Well, put your rifle in the litter, then," Mr. Atherton said; "its
+weight will make no difference to us, and it will make a lot of
+difference to you; when you are tired say so."
+
+Wilfrid struggled on resolutely, refusing to stop until they reached a
+stream two miles from the starting-place. Here they rested for an hour.
+The settler's wounds were washed and rebandaged, the others partook of a
+meal of bread and water, and they then continued the journey. At the end
+of another half-mile Wilfrid was obliged to own that his strength could
+hold out no longer, but he refused positively to accept Mr. Atherton's
+proposal to come back for him.
+
+"I will not hear of it, Mr. Atherton," he said. "From what Mrs. Sampson
+says it is another eight or ten miles to the Mahia country. There is not
+the least fear of any of the Hau-Haus following on our track. The best
+way by far is this: I will go a hundred yards into the bush and lie
+down. You push on. It will be dark before you finish your journey as it
+is, you would not get there till to-morrow morning if you had to keep on
+coming back for me; besides, you would never get on with the litter
+after it is dark. Leave me a piece of bread, a bottle of water, my rifle
+and revolver, and I shall be as comfortable among the bushes there as if
+I were in bed. In the morning you can send out a party of Mahias to
+fetch me in. If you break down a small bough here by the side of the
+way, that will be quite sufficient to tell the natives where they are to
+turn off from the path to look for me."
+
+"Well, I really think that is the best plan, Wilfrid. There is, as you
+say, no real danger in your stopping here alone. It would be a long job
+coming back for you every time we halt, and it is of importance to get
+Mr. Sampson laid down and quiet as soon as possible."
+
+Mrs. Renshaw did not like leaving Wilfrid alone; but she saw that she
+could be of no real assistance to him, and her aid was absolutely
+required to carry the wounded man. She therefore offered no objections
+to the proposal.
+
+"Don't look downcast, mother," Wilfrid said as he kissed her. "The
+weather is fine, and there is no hardship whatever in a night in the
+bush, especially after what we went through when we were following Te
+Kooti."
+
+Wilfrid made his way a hundred yards back into the bush and then threw
+himself down under a tree-fern, and in a very few minutes he was sound
+asleep. The next time he awoke all was dark around him.
+
+"I must have slept a good many hours," he said. "I feel precious
+hungry." He ate a hunch of bread, took a drink of water from the bottle,
+and soon fell asleep again. The morning was breaking when he again woke.
+A quarter of an hour later he heard voices, and cocking his rifle and
+lying down full length on the grass, waited. In another minute to his
+joy he heard Mr. Atherton's voice shouting, "Where are you, Wilfrid?
+Where have you hidden yourself?"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI.
+
+THE PURSUIT OF TE KOOTI.
+
+
+He leapt to his feet and ran forward. Mr. Atherton was approaching,
+accompanied by a party of six natives.
+
+"Why, Mr. Atherton, I was not expecting you for another three hours."
+
+"Well, you see, Wilfrid, your mother was anxious about you. She did not
+say anything, for she is a plucky woman, and not given to complaining or
+grumbling, still I could see she was anxious, so I arranged with these
+natives to be ready to start three hours before daybreak, so as to get
+here just as the sun was rising."
+
+"It is awfully kind of you, Atherton; but surely the natives would have
+been able to find me without your troubling yourself to come all this
+way again. I am sure you must have been dreadfully tired after all your
+work yesterday."
+
+"Well, Wilfrid, perhaps I was just a little bit anxious myself about
+you, and should have fussed and fidgeted until you got back, so you see
+the quickest way to satisfy myself was to come with the natives."
+
+"What time did you get in last night?"
+
+"About eight o'clock in the evening, I think. We were all pretty well
+knocked up, but the two ladies bore it bravely, so you see I had no
+excuse for grumbling."
+
+"I am sure you would not have grumbled anyhow," Wilfrid laughed; "but I
+know that when one is carrying anyone the weight at the head is more
+than double the weight at the feet, and that was divided between them,
+while you had the heavy end all to yourself. And how is Sampson?"
+
+"I think he will do, Wilfrid. The natives took him in hand as soon as he
+got there, and put leaf poultices to his wounds. They are very good at
+that sort of thing; and so they ought to be, considering they have been
+breaking each other's heads almost from the days of Adam. Well, let us
+be off. We have brought the stretcher with us, and shall get you back in
+no time."
+
+Wilfrid lay down upon the stretcher. Four of the natives lifted it and
+went off at a light swinging pace. From time to time changes were made,
+the other two natives taking their share. Had they been alone the
+natives could have made the ten miles' journey under the two hours, but
+Mr. Atherton reduced their speed directly after they had started.
+
+"I have not been killed by the Hau-Haus, Wilfrid, and I do not mean to
+let myself be killed by friendly natives. Three miles an hour is my
+pace, and except in a case of extreme emergency I never exceed it. I
+have no wish, when I get back to England, to be exhibited as a walking
+skeleton.
+
+"It is good to hear you laugh again, lad," he went on as Wilfrid burst
+into a shout of laughter, to the astonishment of his four bearers. "I
+was afraid six weeks back that we should never hear you laugh again."
+
+"Oh, Mr. Atherton!" Wilfrid exclaimed a few minutes later, "were there
+any other of the Poverty Bay people there last night; and have you heard
+what took place and whether many besides those we know of have lost
+their lives?"
+
+"Yes; I am sorry to say it has been a very bad business. As we heard
+from Butters, Dodd and Reppart were killed, and there is no doubt that
+their shepherd was also slaughtered. Major Biggs, poor fellow, has paid
+for his obstinacy and over-confidence with his life. His wife, baby, and
+servant were also killed. The news of this was brought by a boy employed
+in the house, who escaped by the back-door and hid in a flax bush.
+Captain Wilson, his wife, and children have all been murdered. M'Culloch
+was killed with his wife and baby; the little boy managed to escape, and
+got to the redoubt at Taranganui. Cadel was also killed. Fortunately
+Firmin heard the sound of musketry in the night. He started at dawn to
+see what was the matter. He met a native, who told him that the
+Hau-Haus were massacring the whites, and at once rode off and warned
+Wylie, Stevenson, Benson, Hawthorne, and Strong; and these all escaped
+with their families, and with Major Westrupp got safely to the Mahia
+people.
+
+"The boy who escaped from Major Biggs's house reached Bloomfields, and
+all the women and children there managed to escape. How they did it
+heaven only knows, for the Hau-Haus were all round. That is all we know
+at present, and we hope that the rest of the settlers of the outlying
+stations round Matawhero succeeded in getting into Taranganui. Whether
+the Hau-Haus will be satisfied with the slaughter they have effected, or
+will try to penetrate further into the settlement or attack Taranganui,
+remains to be seen. Of course the people who have escaped are, like
+ourselves, ignorant of everything that has taken place except what
+happened in their immediate neighbourhood. I should fancy, myself, that
+however widespread the massacre may have been, the Hau-Haus started last
+night on their way back. They would know that as soon as the news
+reached Wairoa the force there will be on the move to cut them off."
+
+"Do you think they will succeed?" Wilfrid asked eagerly.
+
+"I do not think so, Wilfrid. If Colonel Whitmore were there they would
+have routed out Te Kooti long ago, but Colonel Lambert seems a man of a
+different stamp altogether. Why, I heard last night that he marched six
+days ago to Whataroa, quite close to Te Kooti's place, and that a
+prisoner they took gave them positive information that the Hau-Haus
+there had all left to assist Te Kooti in a raid upon Poverty Bay. It
+seems they did not believe the news; at anyrate, although a mail left
+for Poverty Bay on the day after they returned to Wairoa, they sent no
+news whatever of the report they had heard. If they had done so there
+would have been plenty of time for the settlers to prepare for the
+attack.
+
+"It is one of the most scandalous cases of neglect that I ever heard of,
+and Lambert ought to be tried by court-martial, though that would not
+bring all these people to life again. However there is one thing
+certain, the news of this affair will create such a sensation throughout
+the island that even the incapable government at Auckland, who have
+disregarded all the urgent requests for aid against Te Kooti, will be
+forced to do something, and I sincerely hope they will despatch Whitmore
+with a strong force of constabulary to wipe out Te Kooti and his band.
+It is curious how things come about. Almost all these poor fellows who
+have been killed belonged to the Poverty Bay militia, who refused to
+press on with Whitmore in pursuit of Te Kooti. Had they done so, the
+addition of thirty white men to his force might have made all the
+difference in that fight you had with him, and in that case Te Kooti
+would have been driven far up the country, and this massacre would never
+have taken place."
+
+It was a great relief to Mrs. Renshaw when Wilfrid reached the village.
+She was not given to idle fears, and felt convinced that he was running
+no real danger; for she knew Mr. Atherton would not have left him by
+himself had he not been perfectly convinced there was no danger of
+pursuit. Still she felt a weight lifted off her mind when she saw the
+party entering the village.
+
+"Well, mother, you must have had a terrible journey of it yesterday,"
+Wilfrid said, after he had assured her that he felt none the worse for
+what had passed, and was indeed stronger and better than he had been two
+days before.
+
+"It was a terrible journey, Wilfrid. Fourteen miles does not seem such a
+very long distance to walk, though I do not suppose I ever walked as far
+since I was a girl; but the weight of the stretcher made all the
+difference. It did not feel much when we started, but it soon got
+heavier as we went on; and though we changed sides every few minutes it
+seemed at last as if one's arms were being pulled out of their sockets.
+We could never have done it if it had not been for Mr. Atherton. He kept
+us cheery the whole time. It seems ridiculous to remember that he has
+always been representing himself as unequal to any exertion. He was
+carrying the greater part of the weight, and indeed five miles before we
+got to the end of our journey, seeing how exhausted we were becoming, he
+tied two sticks six feet long to our end of the poles, and in that way
+made the work a great deal lighter for us, and of course a great deal
+heavier for himself. He declared he hardly felt it, for by that time I
+had torn two wide strips from the bottom of my dress, tied them
+together, and put them over his shoulders and fastened them to the two
+poles; so that he got the weight on his shoulders instead of his hands.
+But in addition to Mr. Sampson's weight he carried Milly perched on his
+shoulder the last eight miles. He is a noble fellow."
+
+"He did not say anything about carrying Milly," Wilfrid said, "or of
+taking all the weight of the litter. He is a splendid fellow, mother."
+
+"He was terribly exhausted when he got in," Mrs. Renshaw said; "and was
+looking almost as pale as death when we went into the light in the hut
+where the other fugitives had assembled. As soon as the others relieved
+him of the weight of the litter, and lifted Milly down from his
+shoulder, he went out of the hut. As soon as I had seen Mr. Sampson well
+cared for, I went out to look for him, and found he had thrown himself
+down on the ground outside, and was lying there, I thought at first
+insensible, but he wasn't. I stooped over him and he said, 'I am all
+right, Mrs. Renshaw, but I was not up to answering questions. In half an
+hour I shall be myself again, but I own that I feel washed out at
+present.' I took him out a glass of brandy and water, he drank it and
+said, 'I feel ashamed at being waited on by you, Mrs. Renshaw, when you
+must be as tired as I am. Please do not bother any more about me, but if
+you will ask one of the others to get a native blanket to throw over me
+to keep off the dew I shall be all right in the morning; but I do not
+feel as if I could get on my feet again to-night if a fortune depended
+on it.' Of course I did as he asked me, and I was perfectly stupefied
+this morning when I heard that he had been up at two o'clock and had
+gone off with a party of natives to bring you in."
+
+"It was awfully good of him," Wilfrid said, "and he never said a word to
+me about it. Where is he?" and he looked round. But Mr. Atherton had
+disappeared.
+
+"Have you seen Mr. Atherton?" they asked Mr. Wylie, as he came out of a
+large hut that had been given up for the use of the fugitives.
+
+"He has just had a glass of spirits and water--unfortunately we had no
+tea to offer him--and a piece of bread, and has taken a blanket and has
+gone off to an empty hut; he said he intended to sleep until to-morrow
+morning," and indeed it was not until next day that Mr. Atherton again
+appeared.
+
+Several friendly natives arrived one after another at the village. They
+brought the news that the Hau-Haus had attacked only the colonists round
+Matawairo, and that all the rest of the settlers were gathered at
+Taranganui; but the Hau-Haus were plundering all the deserted houses,
+and were shooting down all the natives who refused to join them. It was
+afterwards found indeed that the natives had suffered even more severely
+than the whites, for while thirty-three of the latter were murdered
+thirty-seven of the natives were killed. Major Westrupp had left by ship
+for Napier to obtain assistance, Lieutenant Gascoyne had made his way
+safely through the Hau-Haus to Taranganui, and had sent a whale-boat out
+to a schooner that was seen passing down the coast. She at once came
+into the port, and the women and children were sent off to Napier. The
+garrison of the fort had been reinforced by the friendly natives under
+their chief Henare Potare, and were awaiting the expected attack by Te
+Kooti.
+
+A week later news came that Major Westrupp and Captain Tuke had arrived
+from Napier with three hundred natives, and that the Hau-Haus had
+retired with their plunder. The party at Te Mahia at once started for
+the coast accompanied by some thirty men of the Mahia tribe. A waggon
+had been procured for the transport of the women and children, and a
+march of twenty-four miles took them to Taranganui. They found that
+parties had been out the day before to bury the dead, and had brought in
+two persons who were supposed to have been murdered. As one of the
+parties were going along they saw a small poodle dog run into a bush,
+and recognized it as having belonged to Captain Wilson. They called and
+whistled to it in vain, and came to the conclusion that someone must be
+in hiding there. After half an hour's search they discovered little
+James Wilson with the dog tightly held in his arms; the boy was too
+frightened to distinguish friend from foe, and was greatly delighted
+when he recognized one of the party. He told them that his mother was
+alive, and was lying wounded in an out-house at their place. He had lost
+his way while trying to reach Taranganui to bring help to her.
+
+Captain Wilson had defended his house with a revolver until the natives
+brought fire to burn him out. As they offered to spare the lives of all
+within if they surrendered, Captain Wilson, thinking that there was a
+possibility of their keeping their word, while those within would
+certainly be burned if they resisted, surrendered. The prisoners were
+being led along by their captors, Captain Wilson carrying the little
+boy, when the natives fell upon them. Captain Wilson was shot through
+the back, his servant, Morau, tomahawked, and Mrs. Wilson and the other
+children bayoneted. Captain Wilson, when shot, fell into a bush, and the
+little boy in the confusion crawled away unnoticed into the scrub. He
+had wandered about sleeping in out-houses for several nights, often
+close to the enemy, and at last found his way back to what had been his
+home, and found the bodies of his father, brothers, and sisters, and on
+going into an out-house for shelter found his mother alive there.
+
+She had been bayoneted in several places and beaten on the head with the
+butt of a rifle until they thought her dead. Later in the day she had
+recovered consciousness and crawled back to the house, where she got
+some water and then took refuge in the out-house, where two or three
+days later she was found by her son. She had since been kept alive by
+eggs and other things the child found by foraging round; but he had at
+last started to try to get assistance for her.
+
+After hearing the child's story the party had galloped on to Captain
+Wilson's, and the poor lady had been found and carried to Taranganui. A
+few days later she was sent down to Napier by ship, but expired shortly
+after from the effects of her wounds.
+
+In the week that elapsed between the date of the massacre and their
+return to the settlement Wilfrid had regained his strength wonderfully,
+and the bracing air of the hills and the excitement of the events
+through which he passed had acted as a complete restorative. Mr.
+Atherton too had completely recovered from his fatigue, and, indeed,
+professed himself to have benefited greatly by them, as he maintained
+that in three days he had lost as many stone of flesh. The morning after
+their return to Taranganui they had a long talk about their plans. It
+was settled that Mrs. Renshaw should at once return home. She was most
+anxious that Wilfrid should accompany her; but this he would not consent
+to.
+
+"No, mother," he said; "it is my duty, and everyone's duty, to aid in
+hunting down these murderous scoundrels. They have massacred a number
+of people who were very kind to me when I first became ill, and I will
+do my best to punish them; besides, until Te Kooti's band is destroyed
+there will be no peace or safety for any of the outlying settlements,
+and they are just as likely to make an attack on our settlement as any
+other; indeed, we are the nearest to them, therefore in fighting here I
+am fighting for the protection of our home."
+
+Mr. Atherton also announced his intention of accompanying the column in
+pursuit of Te Kooti.
+
+"I dislike fatigue amazingly," he said; "but for several reasons I feel
+myself bound to see this affair through to the end. In the first place
+they have attacked me and caused me to undergo great fatigue; in the
+second, they have murdered a number of my acquaintances; in the third
+place I have to look after this boy and see that he gets into no
+mischief; and, lastly, it really seems to me that a month or two of this
+sort of thing will absolutely reduce me to ordinary dimensions, a thing
+which I have for years given up even hoping for."
+
+"Well, Wilfrid," Mrs. Renshaw said at last, "I suppose you must have
+your way. I do think that, as you say, it is the duty of everyone to do
+all that he can to punish the people who have committed these massacres
+upon defenceless people, and it is necessary for the safety of the
+settlement that Te Kooti's band shall be destroyed. It is very hard on
+us to know that our only son is fighting; but other men as well have to
+leave perhaps wives and children behind, and if only those without ties
+were to go the force would be a small one indeed. It is a comfort to me,
+Mr. Atherton, that you have made up your mind to go too. It sounds
+selfish of me to say so; but I suppose all mothers are selfish when
+their sons are concerned."
+
+"I understand your feeling, Mrs. Renshaw, and it is quite natural. I do
+think that everyone who can carry a musket ought to join in this
+expedition, and I flatter myself that Wilfrid's rifle and mine are
+allies not to be despised. Anyhow, Mrs. Renshaw, I promise you that we
+will not do what are called rash things. We won't try to capture Te
+Kooti single-handed, and I think that we can be much more useful
+covering an attack than leading an assault."
+
+Accordingly, two days later Mrs. Renshaw embarked on a coaster for the
+Mohaka River, and Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid announced to Lieutenant
+Gascoyne that they would accompany his force as volunteers.
+
+"I am heartily glad to hear it," that officer replied. "I have heard
+from Wylie of your defence of that pass against the Hau-Haus, and
+yesterday I had a talk with Sampson, who is getting round now, and he
+gave me the history of the affair, and from what he says you and Renshaw
+must have killed at least twenty Hau-Haus, for Sampson admits that he is
+not much of a shot and had a very small share in the total."
+
+"Yes; we can both shoot indifferently well," Mr. Atherton said
+carelessly, "and can both be trusted to hit a Maori if we see him within
+about four hundred yards of us. I fancy that we may be of service to you
+in keeping down the fire of the enemy if you are attacking a pah. There
+is nothing cows fellows so much as finding that it is certain death to
+raise their heads from behind shelter to take aim. Of course we shall be
+ready generally to obey orders, but that is the special work we join
+for. You see, Renshaw is but just recovering from illness, and my build
+unsuits me for violent exertion. So if you want to storm a steep hill
+you must not count on us being with you except so far as shooting goes."
+
+"Well, I will take you on your own terms," Lieutenant Gascoyne said
+smiling. "Mrs. Sampson told me yesterday how disinclined you were for
+violent exertion, and how she had to help you along on that journey to
+Te Mahia."
+
+Mr. Atherton laughed. "There are exceptions to all rules," he said. "I
+am a peaceful botanist, but I had to fight. I hate exertion, but on that
+occasion I was forced to make an effort, and terribly knocked up I was
+over it. If it becomes absolutely necessary I may have to make an effort
+again, but I consider it altogether outside my province."
+
+The expedition started on the following morning, the 20th of November.
+It consisted of nearly six hundred natives belonging to the Napier
+tribes, the Mahia and Marsuwai tribes. The next day they came upon the
+rear-guard of the Hau-Hau tribes of Patutahi and shot two of them. Great
+quantities of booty which the Hau-Haus were unable to carry away were
+found there, together with the bodies of several friendly natives. The
+next day another encampment was come upon, and here the carts taken from
+the plundered farms were found. At dusk on the 23d the column came up
+with the main body of the enemy, who were encamped on the Te Karetua
+Creek.
+
+A heavy fire was opened on both sides, and the natives then charged, but
+were driven back with a loss of five killed and twelve wounded. Mr.
+Atherton and Wilfrid, who were walking leisurely in the rear of the
+column when it came on the enemy, arrived too late to take any part in
+the fight. After the repulse the friendly natives took up a position on
+a ridge overlooking the Hau-Hau positions, and distant twelve hundred
+yards from it. Rifle-pits were dug, and for the next week firing was
+kept up by both sides, with occasional skirmishes as one party or the
+other tried to take the offensive, but neither cared to try a determined
+attack on the other.
+
+The Hau-Haus had lost twenty men during the first day's fighting and
+suffered more in the distant firing, especially whenever they gathered
+as if for an attack, than did the friendlies. This was owing in no small
+degree to the accuracy of Mr. Atherton's fire. He had got some of the
+natives to dig a rifle-pit three or four hundred yards down the hill in
+front of their position, and here he and Wilfrid ensconced themselves
+every morning before daybreak, taking down with them their provisions
+for the day, and from this point they galled the Hau-Haus greatly with
+their fire. Wilfrid knew that his shooting could not be depended upon at
+this distance; but Mr. Atherton had been accustomed to fire at long
+ranges, and although at eight hundred yards his rifle was not accurate
+he did considerable execution, and so alarmed the Hau-Haus that they
+scarcely dared to move by daylight from one part of their intrenchment
+to the other. The friends always left their shelter and retired to camp
+as soon as the sun set.
+
+The Hau-Haus were not, however, idle. A party of sixty men made a long
+circuit and came down in rear of the column, captured the depot at
+Patutahi with eight kegs of ammunition and a great quantity of
+provisions, and also seized a number of pack animals on the way up. On
+the 3d of December the force was strengthened by the arrival of the
+chiefs Rapata and Hotene, with three hundred and seventy men from Te
+Wairoa. These chiefly belonged to the Ngatiporou tribe, who were far
+better fighters than the Napier or Mahia men.
+
+As soon as the reinforcements had arrived it was decided at once to
+dislodge the enemy from a hill of which they had possession, and then to
+make a general attack on the intrenchments. Forty men of the Wairoa
+tribe under Mr. Preece made a dashing attack on the hill, and just as
+they carried it Rapata sent a message to him to say that his tribesmen
+were annoyed by the enemy's shot falling into their camp, and were
+therefore determined to attack at once. That tribe sallying out, carried
+two of the enemy's outworks with a rush, and drove the Hau-Haus back to
+their last line of rifle-pits near the river. Here they were attacked by
+the Wairoa men on the left, Rapata in the centre, and the tribesmen from
+Napier on the right. The assailants carried the intrenchment and drove
+the Hau-Haus across the river, these suffering heavy loss from the
+firing of the left column, who from their position commanded the course
+of the stream.
+
+Unfortunately this fire, though destructive to the enemy, was to a
+certain extent in their favour, for it prevented the close pursuit of
+Rapata's men. Thirty-four Hau-Haus, including three of their fighting
+chiefs, were found dead. Te Kooti himself had a narrow escape. He was
+still suffering from his wound in the ankle, and was carried up the bed
+of the creek on a woman's back. A great quantity of the loot taken from
+the settlers was recaptured, and many of the friendly natives held
+prisoners by the Hau-Haus escaped during the fight. Mr. Atherton and
+Wilfrid had joined Rapata's men in their charge, and after the fight
+was over the former said: "Well, Wilfrid, it is a satisfaction to have
+got some natives with us at last who will fight. It seemed at first as
+if all the plucky natives had joined the enemy; but Rapata's men are
+first-rate fellows, though I wish that they had rather an easier name,
+for Ngatiporou is a crack-jaw word to pronounce."
+
+Unfortunately a quarrel arose after the battle between Rapata's men and
+the Napier tribesmen, and three hundred of the latter went off. The next
+morning Rapata and his tribe, with the remaining Wairoa men, marched out
+to attack the position the enemy occupied on the top of a hill two miles
+away. Mr. Preece led the advanced party, and found the defences
+consisted of two lines of strong earthworks extending across a flat
+shoulder, either end resting on a cliff. Mr. Preece halted his men until
+Rapata came up with the main body. Wilfrid and Mr. Atherton had attached
+themselves to the Ngatiporou. Just as they joined Mr. Preece one of the
+men fired off a gun, and the enemy answered with a heavy volley.
+Instantly a panic set in, and the whole force, with the exception of
+some sixteen or eighteen men, bolted. One of the chiefs under Mr. Preece
+followed and managed to stop them, and persuaded them to wait until
+Rapata could return to them. This they agreed to do, but refused
+positively to return to the attack.
+
+Mr. Preece returned to Rapata, who was in a state of fury at the
+defection of his tribe. "We will go on and attack the place by
+ourselves," he said. "Perhaps the cowards will come up when they hear we
+are fighting." Mr. Preece at once agreed, and the party, consisting of
+the two leaders, Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid, and fourteen of Rapata's
+men, worked back through the low scrub until between twenty-five yards
+of the first line of earthworks, when they opened fire upon the enemy.
+
+"This is rather close work, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said. "We have the
+best of it in some respects, because they cannot make out our position
+among the bushes, and they are obliged to stand up and show their heads
+above the parapet when they fire. We ought never to miss them at this
+distance, and we will soon teach them that it is fatal to pause a moment
+to take aim, so at the worst they will only blaze away at random."
+
+For some time the fight continued, and then Rapata requested Mr. Preece
+to go down the hill and bring up some more men. Only nine men would
+follow Mr. Preece, and Rapata was so disgusted that he himself went down
+for some distance and managed to get thirty more. One of the men had
+brought a bill up with him, and with this shallow rifle-pits were dug
+among the bushes, affording a shelter to the men as they lay flat while
+loading. At three o'clock in the afternoon the chief called on his
+tribesmen to follow him, and, leaping up, they dashed at one of the
+outposts and carried it. A man took the news down the hill, and a chief
+and thirty more men came up and joined in the fight.
+
+At dusk Rapata requested Mr. Preece to return to camp and try to get the
+main body back with ammunition, as their own was almost exhausted. Mr.
+Preece could not induce the natives to start, but they said they would
+go in the morning. All night the fight went on, but before dawn Rapata,
+having expended his last round of ammunition, retired, having lost six
+men killed and four wounded. As he and his men came down they strode
+through the camp in single file, not deigning to take the slightest
+notice of the fugitives, and passing on, camped apart half a mile
+further on. The main body, ashamed of their cowardly conduct, were
+afraid to go near the chief. As it was necessary to ascertain what he
+meant to do, one of the white officers went to see him.
+
+For some time the chief would make no reply. At last he said, "My men
+have betrayed me, and I will have nothing further to do with them. I
+intend to return home and get other men, and when I get back I will
+attack the Napier tribe who deserted me." The same day he marched for
+the coast, followed at a distance by the abashed fugitives. On the way
+down they met Colonel Whitmore, who with three hundred constabulary had
+just arrived by ship from the scene of operations on the other side of
+the island.
+
+The colonel begged Rapata to return with him, but the chief said, "I
+never break my word. I have said I will go home, and I will; but I will
+return with other men and attack the Napier tribes." After much
+persuasion Colonel Whitmore got him to promise that he would not
+interfere with the Napier men; but nothing could persuade him to fight
+again with those men of his own tribe who had deserted him. Such being
+the case, a steamer was placed at his disposal in order that he might
+make the voyage and return as soon as possible.
+
+After Rapata had left Colonel Whitmore sent out a skirmishing party to
+ascertain whether the enemy retained their position. The scouts returned
+with the news that there were great fires on the crest of the hill, and
+they believed that the Hau-Haus were burning their huts preparatory to
+returning into the interior. Colonel Whitmore believed the report, and
+considering that the Hau-Haus would leave the neighbourhood of the
+settlement altogether, he ordered the constabulary to march down to the
+coast again as soon as possible and re-embark there, as their presence
+was urgently required in the north of the province of Wellington, which
+had been left open to the attack of the enemy there by their withdrawal.
+
+Fortunately before they re-embarked Te Kooti showed his hand. He had no
+idea of retreating from his position, and the fires were caused by the
+clearing off of the scrub which had afforded shelter to Rapata's force.
+No sooner did he hear that Colonel Whitmore had marched away than he
+sent a party down against one of the outlying settlements, where they
+murdered Mr. Ferguson, Mr. Wylie's son, and a friendly native. Colonel
+Whitmore, on receiving news of the raid, marched rapidly to cut off the
+retreat of the Hau-Haus; but they managed to evade him and to retire to
+their main body.
+
+On the 27th of December Colonel Whitmore's force occupied a high ridge a
+mile distant from Te Kooti's position. Here the colonel received news
+that Rapata had just landed with three hundred and seventy men, and
+messenger after messenger was sent down urging him to hurry up. The
+chief, who was seriously ill, was much annoyed by these messages,
+especially by the last, that if he did not come soon Whitmore would take
+the place without him. Rapata replied: "Very well, I have tried and
+failed; it is his turn now;" and immediately ordered his men to camp for
+the day.
+
+The next morning Colonel Whitmore came down himself, having been advised
+that the only way to succeed with Rapata was to treat him in a
+conciliatory way. The chief's first words were, "Have you taken the
+place?"
+
+"No," Colonel Whitmore replied. "I am waiting for you, Rapata."
+
+"Very good," Rapata said; "I will be with you to-morrow morning." The
+Ngatiporou performed a great war-dance, and as no one stumbled or fell,
+they considered the omen to be a good one, and marched on and joined
+Colonel Whitmore's force that night.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII.
+
+BACK AT THE FARM.
+
+
+The position of the Hau-Haus was naturally a very strong one, being at
+the top of a high conical peak rising abruptly from low bush-covered
+hills to a height of two thousand feet. On the face, which had been
+before attacked, the ground sloped gradually up to the summit, but on
+the right and left the slope was very steep, and at one point there had
+been a landslip leaving a perpendicular face twenty feet high, and below
+that, for fifty feet, it was so steep that it was difficult to get a
+footing. The ground in rear of the position narrowed into a razor-backed
+ridge down which a track led, with rope-ladders to aid the descent of
+the rock terraces.
+
+The position in front, where alone it could be attacked, was defended by
+three lines of earthworks with high parapets, and with ditches in front
+abutting at either end on the steep slopes. The two lower works were
+seven feet high, the upper work was nearly fourteen feet high, with
+sandbag loopholes to enable the defenders to fire through. Each line was
+connected with the one above it by covered ways. Operations commenced by
+the advance of the Arawa division of the constabulary, and a portion of
+the Ngatiporou under Rapata. Advancing quietly and cautiously they came
+upon a party of the enemy engaged in carrying up water. They drove them
+up to the pah and took possession of the only water available.
+
+Rifle-pits were now dug and pushed forward gradually until within a
+hundred yards of the enemy's first lines of defence. Number seven
+division of the constabulary were now sent up, and these threw up a long
+line of trenches parallel to the enemy's works; and the artillerymen
+having with great exertion brought up a mortar, a vertical shell-fire
+was opened upon the enemy's position with great effect; although to get
+them to the spot these shells had to be carried on the men's backs for
+three miles over some terrific ravines. A hundred constabulary under
+Colonel Fraser and a hundred Ngatiporou were sent round to cut off the
+enemy's retreat in rear. Another division of constabulary under Major
+Roberts connected the two parties, and thus all escape of the enemy was
+cut off, with the exception of the small piece of cliff, seventy yards
+in length, which was believed impossible to descend, and was moreover
+exposed to a flanking fire from Rapata's force in front and that of
+Colonel Fraser in the rear.
+
+For some days heavy firing went on, and the hardships suffered by the
+force were great, for the rain fell without intermission. There were
+many casualties on both sides. Captain Brown of the constabulary was
+killed, and Captain Cabel of the same corps severely wounded. Colonel
+Fraser's men pushed up the ridge in the enemy's rear, and formed
+rifle-pits near the summit from which the Hau-Haus made desperate but
+vain attempts to repel them. On the 4th of January Rapata, after
+consultation with Colonel Whitmore, determined to storm the lower line
+of earthworks.
+
+He told off fifty picked men, and sent them round with instructions to
+scale the cliff at the point where the parapet ended. The work was a
+dangerous and difficult one, for the cliff was very steep and gravelly,
+and the Hau-Haus crowded to the end of the trench and fired down,
+wounding five of the stormers. But to do this they had to expose
+themselves, and suffered severely from the fire of the men told off to
+cover the attack. Finally the Ngatiporou succeeded in climbing up under
+the outer face of the parapet, which they cut through with their spades,
+and opening a raking fire upon the Hau-Haus drove them out and took
+possession of the first line of defence.
+
+All night a sap was carried upwards towards the second line, with the
+intention of blowing up the earthworks and storming the main works next
+morning, and two hundred picked men were assembled in the trenches ready
+to attack at daybreak. But at two o'clock in the morning a woman cried
+out from within the pah that the Hau-Haus had all left leaving only some
+wounded men and women and children. Her words were not at first
+believed, and they were considered to be only a ruse to induce the
+assailants to advance up the hill under the enemy's fire. But at
+daybreak it was found that the news was true, that the whole of the
+Hau-Haus had escaped, by means of ropes, down the face of the
+perpendicular cliff.
+
+Rapata with his men started in pursuit. He followed the Hau-Hau trail
+for some distance, and then scattered his men in small parties as he
+guessed that the enemy would scatter in search of food. A hundred and
+twenty of the Hau-Haus were overtaken and killed, and Rapata returned
+after an absence of two days. By this time the whites and constabulary
+had left, as the work had now been done and the constabulary were
+urgently needed elsewhere. Rapata marched back by a circuitous way,
+captured eighty more prisoners, men, women, and children, whom he
+brought alive down into the settlement. Te Kooti had lost altogether
+during the siege and pursuit a hundred and fifty of his men, but he was
+still believed in by the natives, three tribes joining him at once, more
+than making up for the loss he had suffered.
+
+Mr. Atherton and the other volunteers with Colonel Whitmore's force had
+taken but small share in the second attack upon Te Kooti's position, not
+being attached to any regular force. Rapata had been greatly struck with
+the coolness of Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid in his first attack, and
+astonished at the accuracy of their shooting, and had greeted them very
+heartily on his return, and invited them to act with his force. They
+had, therefore, during the siege taken up their position in some
+rifle-pits in the rear of his party, and from here had done great
+service to the Ngatiporou by covering them from the enemy's fire, for
+the Hau-Haus soon learned that it was almost certain death to stand up
+to take a steady aim above the parapet.
+
+After the defeat of the Hau-Haus many of the natives of Poverty Bay who
+had joined Te Kooti, and taken a prominent part in the massacres,
+deserted him, and calmly returned to the settlement as if nothing had
+taken place, and the authorities allowed them to remain unmolested. The
+settlers, justly indignant that men who had so lately murdered women and
+children should be allowed to come down among them with impunity, formed
+themselves into a vigilance committee, and some of them who had lost
+relatives in the massacre bound themselves by oath to shoot the next
+party of ruffians who made their appearance.
+
+An opportunity soon offered. A native who had assisted in murdering Mr.
+Wylie's son came in, and was shot by Mr. Benson. The following morning,
+to his astonishment, Benson was warned to attend as juryman at the
+inquest of his victim. In vain he assured the native constable that he
+was the man who had done the deed, and that he ought not therefore to
+sit. The constable refused to entertain the excuse, and so Benson not
+only sat on his own trial but gave evidence against himself, and the
+jury, among whom was Mr. Atherton, having heard his statement, brought
+in the following verdict: "We find that the deceased was shot by some
+person unknown, and served him right."
+
+The day after this verdict was returned Mr. Atherton and Wilfrid, who
+had been waiting ten days for a coasting craft, sailed for the Mohaka
+river, and, landing at Mr. Mitford's, borrowed two horses from him, and
+were soon at The Glade.
+
+"I am afraid I am heavy on a horse still, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said as
+they started, "but this animal may be thankful that I did not ride him
+the last time I was here. I calculate I must be at least four stone
+lighter than I was."
+
+"You certainly have lost a good deal of flesh, Mr. Atherton. I almost
+wonder that you did not continue with our friend Rapata. He declares
+that he will follow up Te Kooti till he catches him if it takes him a
+couple of years."
+
+"No, no, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton laughed, "it is possible to have too
+much of a good thing. I might jog along with a colonial force well
+enough and benefit by it, but Rapata and his men would kill me in a
+week. I do not think those fellows know what it is to be tired. No, I am
+very well contented, and I intend to do no end of work in the woods and
+keep myself down to my present weight. There is an immense deal to be
+done in the way of botanizing. I have already found twelve new sorts of
+ferns, and I have only just begun, and have not even looked at the
+orchids yet or the mosses."
+
+"I should have thought, Mr. Atherton, that it would have been well worth
+your while to go in for collecting and sending home rare and new plants,
+instead of merely drying specimens for your herbarium. I know new
+orchids fetch a tremendous price, because a gentleman near us at home
+had a large house full of them, and I know he used to pay what seemed to
+me prodigious prices for little scraps of plants not a bit more
+beautiful than the others, simply because they were rare."
+
+"The idea is a very good one, Wilfrid, and I will think it over. I have
+never gone in for collecting in that way, for my income has been amply
+sufficient for my wants, but there can be no doubt that in these days,
+when people are ready to give such large sums for rare plants, a
+botanist like myself might make a really good thing of it out here. The
+woods are literally crowded with rare plants, and it would add to the
+interest of my excursions. As it is now I simply look for new species,
+and even here these are hard to discover; but if I took to getting rare
+specimens for sending home, there would be an unlimited field of work
+for me. Of course the difficulty is getting them home alive, for in a
+country like this, where there is practically no winter, they are never
+in an entirely quiescent state, and would require the most careful
+packing in cases specially constructed for them, and would need
+attention on the voyage. Still all this might be managed, and a steward
+might be paid well to take them under his charge.
+
+"Well, I will think it over, Wilfrid. Your idea certainly seems a good
+one, and if it pays the great horticulturalists to send out skilled men
+to collect plants for them from all parts of the world, it should
+certainly pay me, who am living in the centre of one of the most varied
+groups of vegetation in the world, to send home consignments."
+
+Ten minutes later they rode into the clearing. A loud whoop of welcome
+was heard as they appeared, and Jack came tearing down from the house to
+meet them. A moment later Marion appeared at the door, and she too came
+flying towards them. Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw also appeared on the verandah.
+
+"I need not ask you how you are, my boy," Mr. Renshaw said as Wilfrid,
+who had leapt from his horse as Marion ran up, hastened forward with her
+to the house. "Your mother has told us so much about your illness that I
+hardly anticipated seeing you looking a picture of health. Mr. Atherton,
+I am delighted to see you. My wife has told me how much we all owe to
+you both for your care of Wilfrid and for having brought him and my wife
+safely out of the hands of the natives."
+
+"I am very glad that I was able to be of some little service, Mr.
+Renshaw. It is quite as pleasant, you know, to be able to aid as it is
+to be aided, so we will look upon the obligation as mutual. Wilfrid has
+invited me to take up my quarters here for a day or two until my shanty
+is put in order again."
+
+"It would be a pleasure to us if you would take up your abode here
+permanently," Mr. Renshaw said as Mr. Atherton dismounted from his horse
+and the two men rung each other's hands warmly. "Jack, take the two
+horses round to the shed. And now come in. Fortunately dinner is just
+ready, and I have no doubt you are ready too."
+
+Wilfrid was struck with the change that had come over his father since
+he had been away. He looked better and stronger than he had ever seen
+him before, and spoke with a firmness and decision quite new to him. Mr.
+Renshaw, finding the whole responsibility of the farm upon his
+shoulders, had been obliged to put aside his books and to throw himself
+into the business with vigour. At first the unusual exertion involved by
+being out all day looking after things had tried him a good deal, but he
+had gained strength as he went on, and had even come to like the work.
+The thought that his wife and Wilfrid would be pleased to find
+everything going on well had strengthened him in his determination to
+stick to it, and Marion had, as far as the house work allowed her, been
+his companion when about the farm, and had done her best to make the
+evenings cheerful and pleasant. They had had a terribly anxious time of
+it during the week between the arrival of the news of the massacre at
+Poverty Bay and Mrs. Renshaw's return; but after that their life had
+gone on quietly, although, until the news of the capture of Te
+Kooti's fortress had arrived, they had naturally been anxious about
+Wilfrid's safety.
+
+[Illustration: "I AM AFRAID I AM HEAVY ON A HORSE STILL, WILFRID"
+
+_Page 325_]
+
+"You are looking wonderfully well and sunburnt, father," the lad said as
+they sat at dinner.
+
+"Your father has been out from morning until night, Wilfrid, managing
+the farm," Mrs. Renshaw said with a glad smile, "and I do think the
+exercise has done him a great deal of good."
+
+"I am sure it has, mother," Wilfrid agreed. "I am afraid the book has
+not made much progress, father, since I have been away."
+
+"It has made no progress at all, Wilfrid, and I do not suppose it ever
+will. Science is all very well when a man can afford to make it his
+hobby, but I have come to the conclusion that a man has no right to ride
+a hobby while his family have to work to make a living."
+
+"But we were all glad to work, father," Wilfrid said. "And now I am back
+again there is no reason why you should not return to your work."
+
+"No, Wilfrid. I have been selfish a great deal too long, and indeed, now
+that I have broken myself into an active life out of doors, I have at
+present, at anyrate, no inclination to take to the pen again. I feel
+better than I have done for years, and am astonished myself at the work
+I can get through. As to my appetite, I eat twice as much as I used to,
+and really enjoy my food. Since the day we heard of the failure of the
+bank the burden has all been on your shoulders, Wilfrid, and your
+mother's. I am going to take my share of it in the future. As to the
+book, someone else must write it. I do not suppose it would ever have
+really paid. I almost wonder now how I could have thought that I out
+here could have derived any satisfaction from knowing that my work was
+praised by scientific men at home; besides, to do it properly a man must
+live among the natives, must travel all over the island and gather the
+traditions current in every tribe. That I could not do, and if I could
+have no inclination for it. I have been thinking that I shall ask Mr.
+Atherton to teach me a little botany, so that I can enjoy a little more
+intelligently than I can now do the wonders of our forest."
+
+"That I will gladly do, Mr. Renshaw. I am sure it would add greatly to
+the enjoyment of your life here to become acquainted with the secrets of
+the marvellous vegetation around. It is extraordinary to me that men
+should be content to remain in ignorance of the names of even the
+principal trees and shrubs that meet their eye at every turn. There is
+not one settler in a hundred can tell you the names of a score of trees
+in the island. While I have been away I have tried to get the native
+names of many of the trees that are mostly to be met with, and only in
+one or two cases could I get any information, although some of the
+settlers have been living for years among them."
+
+"And now, Mr. Atherton, about what I was saying just now, do not you
+think it would be more pleasant for you to erect a fresh hut close to
+ours instead of living by yourself away in the woods? It would be a
+great pleasure to all of us to have you with us. Your society would
+brighten our life here. We should have the assistance of your rifle in
+case the natives broke out again. You would, of course, live with us,
+but you would have your own hut to retire to when you liked to be alone.
+What do you say?"
+
+"I say that it is a very kind offer, Mr. Renshaw, and it would certainly
+be very much more pleasant for me than living out there by myself at
+the mercy of a native cook. On the condition that you will allow me to
+pay my share of the expenses of housekeeping I will gladly accept your
+offer."
+
+"The expenses of housekeeping are next to nothing, Mr. Atherton," Mrs.
+Renshaw laughed; "but if you make it a condition we must of course agree
+to your terms, and you shall be permitted to pay your quota to the
+expenses of the establishment; but I warn you that the amount will not
+be a heavy one."
+
+"Heavy or light, I shall be glad to pay it, Mrs. Renshaw. The
+arrangement would be a delightful one for me, for although as a
+traveller I have necessarily been much alone, I am a gregarious animal,
+and fond of the company of mankind."
+
+And so two days later a party of natives were set to work, and a hut was
+erected for Mr. Atherton twenty yards away from the house, and was soon
+fitted up as his other had been. Wilfrid had at once taken up his own
+work at the farm, but was now his father's right hand, instead of
+having, as before, everything on his shoulders.
+
+The natives in the neighbourhood had now settled down again. From time
+to time news came that showed that the Hau-Hau rebellion was almost
+crushed. Colonel Whitmore, having finally completely subdued the Hau-Hau
+tribes in the north of Wellington and Taranaki, had marched with a
+strong force divided into four columns and severely punished all the
+tribes that had joined Te Kooti in the north-eastern part of the island.
+Te Kooti himself, after perpetrating several other massacres of
+settlers, was a fugitive, hotly hunted by Rapata, who gave him no rest,
+surprising him several times, and exterminating the last remnants of
+the band who had escaped with him from the Chatham Islands. Te Kooti
+himself was now believed to be hiding somewhere in the Waikato country;
+but he was no longer dangerous, his schemes had utterly failed, his
+pretensions had even in the native eyes been altogether discredited, and
+all who had adhered to him had either been killed or punished by the
+destruction of their villages and clearings. There was not the slightest
+chance that he would ever again trouble the community.
+
+The settlement on the Mohaka river had grown, and in six months after
+Wilfrid's return the whole of the land lying between the Allens' farm
+and Mr. Mitford's was taken up, and two or three families had settled
+beyond Mr. Atherton's holding. At The Glade everything went on
+prosperously--the animals multiplied, the crops were excellent, and,
+owing to the many settlers arriving and requiring food until they could
+raise it for themselves, much better prices were obtained for the
+produce, and it was no longer necessary to ship it to Napier or
+Wellington.
+
+Although Mr. Atherton had not gone through any such fatigues as those
+that he had endured at Poverty Bay, he had continued steadily to
+decrease in weight. Feeling himself so much lighter and more active on
+the return from the expedition, he had continued to stick to long and
+regular exercise, and was out every day, with a native to carry his tin
+collecting-boxes, his presses, axe, and trowel, from breakfast-time
+until dark. As he steadily refused to take any food with him, and fasted
+from breakfast-time till supper, the prolonged exercise in the close
+heat of the woods did its work rapidly, and at the end of a year from
+the date of his taking up his abode at The Glade he could no longer be
+called a stout man, and new-comers looked with admiration at his broad
+shoulders and powerful figure.
+
+"When I first came to New Zealand," he said, "I thought it probable that
+I should only stay here a few weeks, or at most a few months, and I had
+a strong doubt whether it would repay my trouble in coming out here. Now
+I am sure that it was the very best step I ever took. I weighed the
+other day at Mitford's, and I did not turn eighteen stone, which is
+nothing out of the way for a man of my height and size. Last time I
+weighed I pulled down six-and-twenty. When I go back to England I shall
+stick to my two meals a day, and go in regularly for racquets and horse
+exercise."
+
+"And when is that going to be, Mr. Atherton?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"I have not settled yet, Wilfrid. I have been longer stationary here
+than I have been in any place since I left college. Occasionally I get a
+fit of longing to be back in London again, but it seldom lasts long.
+However, I suppose I shall yield to it one of these days."
+
+"You are doing very well here, Mr. Atherton. You said only the other day
+that your consignment of plants had sold wonderfully, and that you
+expected to make nearly a thousand pounds this year."
+
+"That is true enough, Wilfrid; but you see, unfortunately or
+fortunately, whichever way you like to put it, the thousand pounds are
+of no importance to me one way or the other. I am really what is
+generally considered to be a rich man, and from the day I left England,
+now just two years ago, my income has been simply accumulating, for
+beyond the two or three pounds a month your mother lets me pay her I
+spend absolutely nothing."
+
+"It must be very dull for you here, Mr. Atherton, accustomed as you have
+been to be always either travelling or in London, to be cut off from the
+world with only just our society, and that of the Allens and Mitfords,
+and two or three neighbours."
+
+"I do not look dull, do I, Mrs. Renshaw?" Mr. Atherton laughed.
+
+"No; I have never seen you dull since I knew you, Mr. Atherton, not even
+when you were toiling along exhausted and worn out with that child on
+your shoulders and the weight of the helpless man on your arms. We shall
+miss you awfully when you do go; shall we not, Marion?" Marion was now
+nineteen, and had developed, as Wilfrid told her in some surprise--for
+brothers seldom think their sisters good-looking--into a very pretty
+girl.
+
+"It is not coming just yet," Mr. Atherton said; "but I have, I think,
+pretty well exhausted the forest for a distance of fifty miles round,
+and now that things are settling down I shall take more extensive trips
+to the mountains in the north-east and the Waikato country, and the
+strip of land lying north of Auckland. I have never been absent above
+two or three days at a time; but in future I may be away for weeks. But
+this will always be my head-quarters, Mrs. Renshaw. You see, your
+husband is becoming a formidable rival of mine here, so I must be off to
+pastures new."
+
+"You know he did not want to send things home, Mr. Atherton. It was only
+because you insisted that he did so."
+
+"I am very glad that I did insist, Mrs. Renshaw. As you know, I only
+went into the trade of plants to give me something to do on my rambles
+besides looking for new species; but I am sure it has been a capital
+thing for him. He has always been accustomed to use his brain, and
+although he now takes a lively interest in farm work, he would in time
+have found a certain void if he had not taken up this new hobby. As it
+is, it gives him plenty of out-door work, and is not only interesting,
+but pays well; and now that he is thoroughly acquainted with the botany
+of this part of the island, and knows which things are worth sending
+home, and the price he can depend upon getting for them, he will make a
+far larger income out of it than he could do from farming. Wilfrid will
+be quite capable of looking after the interests of the farm."
+
+Another year passed. The clearings at The Glade had been greatly
+enlarged; but clumps of bush had been judiciously left so as to preserve
+its sylvan appearance, the long operation of fencing in the whole
+property had been accomplished, and the number of horses, cattle, and
+sheep had so increased that the greater part were now sent to graze on
+Maori land, a small rate per head being paid to the natives. Mr.
+Atherton had come and gone many times, and had now almost completed his
+study of the botany of the island. Mr. Renshaw had altogether abandoned
+the management of the farm to Wilfrid, and devoted himself entirely to
+the collection of ferns, orchids, and other plants, receiving handsome
+cheques in return for the consignment sent to England by each vessel
+that sailed from Wellington or Napier. He had agents at each of these
+towns, who made arrangements with the stewards of the ships for taking
+care of the plants on their way home, their remuneration being dependent
+upon the state in which the consignment arrived in England.
+
+Settlers were now established on both sides of the river for miles above
+The Glade, and as among these were several who had been officers in the
+army, or professional men who had come out for the benefit of their
+families, there was now much cheerful society, and The Glade occupied
+the same leading position in that part of the settlement that Mr.
+Mitford's had done on the lower river when they first arrived.
+
+James Allen had now been a year married to the eldest of the Miss
+Mitfords. His brother had been decidedly refused by Marion when he
+proposed to her, much to the surprise of her father and mother, who had
+seen from the frequent visits of their neighbour during the past year
+how things were going with him, while Wilfrid had been quite indignant
+at her rejection of his friend.
+
+"Girls are extraordinary creatures," he said to his sister. "I had quite
+made up my mind for the last six months that you and Bob were going to
+make a match of it, and thought what a jolly thing it would be to have
+you settled next to us. I am sure I do not know what you want more. You
+have known him for three years. He is as steady as possible, and safe to
+get on well, and as nice a fellow as I know."
+
+"He is all that, Wilfrid, but you see I don't want to marry him. I like
+him very much in the same way you like him, but I don't like him well
+enough for that."
+
+"Oh, I suppose you want a wandering prince in disguise," Wilfrid
+grumbled. "That is the way with girls; they always want something that
+they cannot get."
+
+"My dear Wilfrid," Marion said with spirit, "when I take to lecturing
+you as to whom you are to marry it will be quite time for you to take to
+lecturing me; but until I do I cannot allow that you have any right in
+the matter."
+
+It was seldom indeed that brother and sister differed in opinion about
+anything, and seeing a tear in Marion's eye Wilfrid at once gave in and
+admitted himself to be wrong.
+
+"Of course it is no business of mine, Marion, and I beg your pardon. I
+am sure I should not wish for a moment that you should marry anyone but
+the man that you choose for yourself. I should certainly have liked you
+to have married Bob Allen, but, if you do not fancy him, of course there
+is an end of it."
+
+This was not the only offer that Marion had received during the year,
+for there were several young settlers who would have been glad to have
+installed her as the mistress of their homesteads; but they had each met
+with the same fate that had now befallen Bob Allen.
+
+The next time Mr. Atherton came back he said, "I have taken my last
+ramble and gathered my last plant."
+
+"What! are you going home?" Mrs. Renshaw exclaimed.
+
+"Yes, I am going home," he said more seriously than he usually spoke. "I
+have been away three years now, and have pretty thoroughly ransacked the
+island. I have discovered nearly eighty new species of plants and two or
+three entirely new families, so I have done enough for honour; besides,
+I am wanted at home. An old aunt has died and has left me a considerable
+sum of money, just because I had plenty of my own before, I suppose. It
+is another instance of female perversity. So I have had a letter from my
+solicitor saying that I am really wanted; but in any case I should have
+gone now or in another month or two. I begin to feel that I have had
+enough of wandering, and at thirty-eight it is time to settle down if
+you are ever going to do so."
+
+There was a silence round the table as he ceased speaking, for all felt
+that the loss would be a serious one, and although Mr. Atherton had
+tried to speak lightly they could see that he too felt the approaching
+end of their close friendship.
+
+"Are you going to start at once?" Mr. Renshaw asked.
+
+"No, I shall give myself a fortnight or three weeks before I sail. I
+have all the plants I gathered this time to dry and prepare properly;
+besides, I should like a quiet stay with you before I say good-bye. You
+see, I have not seen much of you during the last year."
+
+Nothing further was said on the subject, which none of them liked to
+touch on. For the next two days the house seemed strangely quiet.
+
+"By the way, what has become of young Allen?" Mr. Atherton said at
+dinner on the third day. "You told me every one was well, so I suppose
+he is away from home, as I have not seen him since I came, and he used
+to be a very regular visitor." There was a momentary silence and then
+Mrs. Renshaw said:
+
+"I do not think he is away from home, though he may be, for he was
+talking the other day of looking out for a fresh piece of land for
+himself. Now that his brother is married I suppose it is only natural
+that he should think of setting up for himself. The farm is of course
+their joint property, but I suppose they will make some arrangement for
+his brother to take over his share."
+
+"Naturally," Mr. Atherton agreed, "young Allen would not care about
+remaining now that his brother is married. When one of two partners
+marries it generally breaks up the partnership, and besides, he will of
+course be wanting to have a place of his own, and the holding is not
+large enough to divide."
+
+After dinner Wilfrid strolled out with Mr. Atherton.
+
+"I daresay you saw, Mr. Atherton, that your question about Bob Allen
+fell rather as a bomb-shell among us. There is no reason why you, who
+are a great friend, should not know the truth. The fact is, to my
+astonishment, Marion has thought proper to refuse Bob Allen. I was never
+more surprised in my life. I had always looked upon it as certain that
+she would accept him, especially as she has refused three or four good
+offers this year. One never can understand girls."
+
+Mr. Atherton was silent for a minute or two. Then he said:
+
+"I thought too, Wilfrid, that it would have come off. I have always
+thought so. Well, well." Then after a pause he went on: "I had intended
+to go over in the morning to see him. I like the lad, and had an idea of
+offering to advance him a sum of money to set up in a place of his own
+without loss of time. Then the young couple would have had a fair start
+in life without having to wait two or three years or to go through the
+rough work at the first start in a settler's life. The money would of
+course have been nothing to me, and it would have been satisfactory to
+have lent a helping hand towards seeing your sister married and happy.
+And so she has refused him. Well, I will take a turn by myself,
+Wilfrid."
+
+And to the young fellow's surprise Mr. Atherton turned off and started
+at a brisk pace up the glade.
+
+"He is evidently as vexed at Marion's throwing over Bob Allen as I am,"
+Wilfrid said to himself as he looked after him. "I wish he would give
+her a good talking to, she would think more of his opinion than she does
+of mine."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII.
+
+IN ENGLAND.
+
+
+"I suppose you have not settled yet as to what ship you will return by,
+Atherton?" Mr. Renshaw asked as the party were gathered in the verandah
+in the evening.
+
+"No," Mr. Atherton replied, absently watching the smoke of his cigar as
+it curled up, "nothing is at all settled; my plans seem to be quite
+vague now."
+
+"What do you mean, Mr. Atherton?" Mrs. Renshaw asked in surprise, for
+Mr. Atherton's plans were generally mapped out very decidedly. "How is
+it that your plans are vague? I thought you said two days ago that you
+should go down to Wellington about the 20th."
+
+"I did not mean to say that they were vague, Mrs. Renshaw; did I really
+say so?"
+
+"Why, of course you did," Mrs. Renshaw said; "and it is not often that
+you are vague about anything."
+
+"That shows that you do not understand my character, Mrs. Renshaw," Mr.
+Atherton said in his usual careless manner. "I am the vaguest of men--a
+child of chance, a leaf blown before the wind."
+
+Wilfrid laughed. "It would have taken a very strong wind when we first
+knew you."
+
+"I am speaking metaphorically, Wilfrid. I am at London, and the idea
+occurs to me to start for the Amazon and botanize there for a few
+months. I pack up and start the next morning. I get there and do not
+like the place, and say to myself it is too hot here, let me study the
+Arctic flora at Spitzbergen. If I act upon an idea promptly, well and
+good, but if I allow any time to elapse between the idea striking me and
+my carrying the thing into execution, there is never any saying whether
+I may not go off in an entirely different groove during the interval."
+
+"And is there any chance of your going off in any other groove now,
+Atherton?" Mr. Renshaw asked.
+
+"No, I think not; just a remote possibility perhaps, but not more than
+that. It is so indefinitely small, indeed, that you may--yes, I think
+you may safely calculate upon my starting on the day I said, or if I
+find a ship at Wellington going on a trading excursion among the
+islands, or up to the Straits, or to Japan, I may likely enough take a
+passage in her."
+
+"But I thought you said that your business required you to be at home,
+Mr. Atherton?"
+
+"Yes, I suppose that is so, Wilfrid; but I daresay my solicitor would
+manage it just as well if I did not turn up. Solicitors are people who,
+as far as I can see, consider it their duty to bother you, but if they
+find that you pay no attention to their letters they manage somehow or
+other to get on very well without you. I believe they go into a court
+and make affidavits, and get an order authorizing them to sign for you.
+I do not know how it generally is done, but that is my experience of
+them so far."
+
+Marion had said little that evening, and had indeed been very quiet for
+the last few days. She was somewhat indignant at Wilfrid's interference
+in what she considered her affairs, and felt that although her father
+and mother had said nothing, they too were somewhat disappointed, and
+would have been glad had she accepted Bob Allen. Besides she had reasons
+of her own for being out of spirits. After breakfast the next morning
+Mr. Atherton said: "Marion, when you have finished your domestic duties
+and can be spared, suppose you put on your hat and come for a ramble
+with me."
+
+There was nothing unusual in the request, for the girl often accompanied
+him in his rambles when he was not going far into the forest.
+
+"I shall be ready in half an hour, if your highness can wait so long."
+
+"I am in no hurry, child, and will smoke a pipe on the verandah until
+you are ready."
+
+Marion always enjoyed these walks with Mr. Atherton. He was at all times
+a pleasant companion, and when alone with her always exerted himself to
+amuse her, though he sometimes vexed her by talking to her as if she
+were a child. To-day he was much more silent than usual, and more than
+once she looked up in wonder at his face as he walked along puffing at
+his pipe, with his hands deep in his jacket pockets and his eyes bent on
+the ground.
+
+"A penny for your thoughts, Mr. Atherton," she said at last with a
+laugh. "It seems to me that you would have got on just as well without
+me."
+
+"Well, I was just thinking that I was a fool to ask you to come with me,
+child." Marion opened her eyes in surprise. "You see, my dear," he went
+on, "we all make fools of ourselves sometimes. I started in life by
+making a fool of myself. I fell in love with a woman whom I thought
+perfection. She was an arrant flirt, and was only amusing herself with
+me till she hooked a young lord for whom she was angling. That was what
+sent me roaming for the first time; and, as you know, having once
+started I have kept it up ever since, that is till I came out here. I
+had intended to stay six months; I have been here three years. Why have
+I stopped so long? Simply, child, because I have again made a fool of
+myself. I do not think I was conscious of it for the first two years,
+and it was only when I saw, as I thought, that young Allen would win
+you, that I recognized that I, a man of thirty-seven, was fool enough to
+love a child just eighteen years younger than myself. At the same time I
+was not fool enough to think that I had the smallest chance. I could not
+stop here and watch another winning you, and at the same time I was so
+weak that I could not go away altogether; and so you see I compromised
+matters by going away for weeks and sometimes months at a time,
+returning with the expectation each time of hearing that it was settled.
+Now I hear that you have refused him, and, just as a drowning man grasps
+at a straw, I resolved to have my fate absolutely settled before I sail.
+Don't be afraid of saying 'no,' dear. I have never for a moment looked
+for any other answer, but I think that I would rather have the 'no' than
+go away without it, for in after years I might be fool enough to come to
+think that possibly, just possibly, the answer, had I asked the
+question, might have been 'yes.'"
+
+He had stopped in his walk when he began to speak, and stood facing
+Marion, who had not raised her eyes while he was speaking. Then she
+looked frankly up in his face.
+
+"Do you think I did not know," she said softly, "and didn't you really
+know too? You are not so wise a man as I thought you. Why, ever since I
+have known you it seems to me that--that--"
+
+"That you have loved me, Marion; is it possible?" he said taking her
+hand.
+
+"Of course it is possible," she said almost pettishly "how could I help
+it, I should like to know?"
+
+Dinner had been waiting for some time before Mr. Atherton and his
+companion returned from their ramble.
+
+"Twenty minutes late!" Wilfrid shouted as they approached the house;
+"have you been losing yourselves in the bush?"
+
+"I think that it has been just the other way, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton
+said as he came up to the group gathered in the verandah.
+
+"How do you mean?" Wilfrid asked.
+
+"I mean we have been finding each other."
+
+"Finding each other," Wilfrid repeated vaguely. "Why, were you both
+lost?"
+
+"I was, Wilfrid. Mrs. Renshaw, I have found your daughter, and am going,
+with your permission and that of her father, to keep her. I am a good
+bit older than she is, but as she says she does not mind that, I hope
+that you will not, and at least I can promise to do all in my power to
+make her happy."
+
+"I am surprised, Mr. Atherton; surprised and glad too," Mrs. Renshaw
+said, while Mr. Renshaw grasped Mr. Atherton's hand and shook it
+heartily.
+
+"My dear sir, there is no one in the world to whom I could intrust
+Marion's happiness so gladly and heartily. I own that it is a surprise
+to me, as well as to her mother, but we are both delighted at the choice
+she has made."
+
+By this time Marion and her mother had gone indoors together. Wilfrid
+had not yet spoken, his surprise was still too great for words.
+
+"Well, Wilfrid," Mr. Atherton said, turning to him, "I hope your
+disapproval of Marion's conduct on this occasion is not so great as it
+was when you were talking to me yesterday."
+
+"I hardly know what to say yet, you have taken me so by surprise; but I
+am awfully glad--you know that, don't you? There is no one in the world
+I should like Marion to marry so much, only somehow it never occurred to
+me."
+
+"That is natural enough, Wilfrid. However, now that it has occurred to
+you, and you approve of it, we must hope that Marion will be restored to
+your good graces again."
+
+"I have been making an ass of myself," Wilfrid said penitently; "but you
+believe that I am awfully glad, don't you? I was disappointed about Bob,
+but then, you see, I never thought about you. Why, you must know, Mr.
+Atherton, what I think of you and how I care for you, and how I look up
+to you. Somehow it never seemed possible to me that a man like you could
+fall in love."
+
+"And much more improbable still, Wilfrid, that your sister would fall in
+love with me. I understand you, lad. We have been very close friends for
+the last three years, haven't we? I have been something like a very big
+and very old brother to you, and now we are going to be brothers in
+earnest;" and their hands closed in a grip that spoke volumes for the
+sincerity and depth of their feelings. Then Wilfrid ran into the house
+and threw his arms round his sister.
+
+"I have been an awful fool, Marion," he said; "but you see, I never
+dreamt of this."
+
+"And you are really pleased, Wilfrid?"
+
+"Pleased! I am delighted. Why, you know, I think he is the finest fellow
+in the world; and has he not done everything for us, and stood by me
+and nursed me, and carried me for miles, and saved mother's life and
+mine? But it never entered my mind that you had fallen in love with each
+other."
+
+"I do not know why it shouldn't, Wilfrid. Why shouldn't I think as much
+of him as you do?"
+
+"I do not know, I am sure, Marion; but I confess I never did think of
+it. Did you, mother?"
+
+"Once or twice, Wilfrid. About a year ago it did cross my mind once or
+twice, but that was all. They say mothers are keen-sighted as far as
+their daughters are concerned; but either I am less keen-sighted than
+mothers in general, or Marion is deeper than other girls."
+
+"Well, mother, we shall have lots of time to talk this over," Wilfrid
+said. "Dinner has been waiting nearly an hour, and even this wonderful
+business cannot have taken away all our appetites. Everything is ready;
+shall I call them in?" Wilfrid had, however, still a few minutes to
+wait, for the two men were engaged in earnest conversation outside.
+
+When they came in at last Mr. Renshaw kissed his daughter fondly. "God
+bless you, my child!" he said. "You have made a wise choice indeed, and
+I am sure that you will be a very happy woman."
+
+It was a quiet meal, for all were too happy to talk much. After it was
+over the two men strolled out together and renewed their conversation,
+and Mr. Renshaw presently called to his wife to join them. Marion had
+gone to her room, and Wilfrid was about to start to the other end of the
+farm when Mr. Atherton called him.
+
+"Come and join our consultation, Wilfrid. You are as much concerned in
+it as any of us, and I rely upon your assistance to bring round these
+two very obstinate people to my side of the question. I should say our
+side, for of course Marion is one with me in the matter. You see, I am a
+rich man, Wilfrid--really a rich man, and I naturally wish that Marion
+should be made as happy as possible. I do not think she would be as
+happy as possible if she were in England with me, with a nice place in
+the country, and a town-house, and most things that money could bring
+her, if she knew that her father and mother were out here living a life
+which, although they have admirably adapted themselves to it, is yet
+very different to that to which they have been all their lives
+accustomed.
+
+"Now, owing to this absurd freak of my aunt in making me her heir when
+my income was already five times as much as I could spend, I have the
+nuisance of a large landed estate on my hands. There is a large house
+upon it which I suppose Marion and I will have to occupy occasionally;
+and there is another house, which is known as the dower house, and which
+is a very snug and comfortable abode. Now, it is quite clear that I am
+the last sort of man to look after an estate. It would worry me most out
+of my mind, and would be a perpetual annoyance.
+
+"What I propose is that your father and mother shall come home and take
+possession of the dower house, and that your father should act as my
+agent. Living on the spot, he would be able to keep an eye on the
+tenants, receive rents, and that sort of thing, and still be able to
+devote a considerable portion of his time to his favourite pursuits. I
+should have the advantage of having an agent I could absolutely rely
+upon, and Marion and I would have the comfort of having her father and
+mother close at hand. It would be a little lonely for you for a bit,
+Wilfrid; but you are nearly nineteen now, and will, unless I am
+mistaken, ere many years have passed be bringing a mistress to The
+Glade. I fancy you go over to Mitford's a good deal oftener than there
+is any absolute occasion for, and although Kate is only sixteen yet, I
+have a shrewd suspicion that you have both pretty well made up your
+minds about the future."
+
+Wilfrid coloured and laughed. "I don't know that we are as far advanced
+as that; but I do hope that some day it may be as you say. But about
+this other affair. What do my father and mother say? It seems to me it
+would be a splendid arrangement."
+
+"Of course it would, Wilfrid; a splendid arrangement, for Marion and me
+especially. That is what I am trying to persuade them; but your mother
+has developed quite a new line of obstinacy, and your father is just as
+bad."
+
+"Don't you see, Wilfrid," Mrs. Renshaw said with tears in her eyes, "it
+is only an excuse on Mr. Atherton's--"
+
+"Harry, my dear madam, Harry," Mr. Atherton interrupted. "We have
+arranged it is to be Harry in future."
+
+"On Harry's part," Mrs. Renshaw went on, "to provide an income for us."
+
+"But I have got to provide an income for someone," Mr. Atherton said.
+"There must be an agent to look after the property for me; necessarily
+that agent must have a salary; and why in the name of good sense should
+not your husband be that agent as well as anyone else?"
+
+"But you are offering a great deal too high a salary," Mr. Renshaw
+urged. "You could get an excellent agent for less than half the sum you
+are talking about."
+
+"Not at all," Mr. Atherton replied; "I must have a gentleman, both for
+my own sake and that of the tenants, and to get a gentleman of high
+character and perfectly trustworthy, I must necessarily pay him a good
+salary. I shall be a good deal in town, and my representative must
+therefore be able to occupy a good position in the county; besides, as I
+have told you, my income now, with this absurd addition, amounts to
+something like six thousand a year. Why, in the name of goodness, should
+I not be allowed, if I choose, to pay two or three hundred a year over
+market price to my agent when it will afford my wife the gratification
+of having her parents near her, and me the pleasure of having two dear
+friends as my next neighbours. Besides, The Glade will not be a bit too
+large for you when you marry, Wilfrid, and in that case either you will
+have to start in a fresh place and begin all your work over again, or
+your father would have to turn out to make room for you. I consider it
+preposterous. What do you say, Wilfrid?"
+
+"I do think it would be a splendid arrangement, mother," Wilfrid
+answered. "You know well enough that I shall be very sorry to lose you
+and father; but it would be awfully nice for Marion, and I do think that
+though, as Mr. Atherton says, you and father have fallen in splendidly
+with your life here, the other would be in every way better suited to
+you. I can understand your feelings in the matter; but the same time I
+think that after Mr. Atherton having saved your life and mine, his
+feelings and wishes should influence you very much."
+
+"If you hesitate any longer," Mr. Atherton said, "I shall go in and
+fetch Marion out. I have not told her about my plan yet, for in fact we
+had other things to talk about; but when I tell her, and she adds her
+voice to ours, I am sure you will not be able to refuse any longer."
+
+Mrs. Renshaw exchanged a look with her husband. "It is not necessary,"
+she said in a broken voice. "We accept, Harry."
+
+"That is right," Mr. Atherton said as he wrung Mr. Renshaw's hand
+warmly, and then affectionately kissed Mrs. Renshaw. "Now we are going
+to be a very happy and united family. Now, go in and tell Marion."
+
+"Tell her yourself," Mrs. Renshaw smiled, wiping her eyes; and Mr.
+Atherton took his way to the house.
+
+Marion was indeed delighted with the news. The thought of leaving her
+mother and father behind had been the one drawback to her happiness. She
+had been her mother's right hand and her father's companion. She had
+thought how terribly they would miss her, and how, as years went on,
+they would, far more than now, feel the difference between their present
+life and that they had formerly led. The news that they would be always
+near her and settled in a comfortable home filled her with delight. A
+few minutes after Mr. Atherton entered the house she ran out to her
+father and mother and threw her arms fondly around them. "Is it not
+happiness, mother," she cried, "to think that we shall still be
+together?"
+
+"If you are not a happy woman, child, it will be your own fault," her
+father said. "I consider you a marvellously lucky girl."
+
+"As if I did not know that!" she replied, laughing through her tears.
+
+Mr. Atherton did not sail quite so soon as he had intended. A church had
+recently been erected at the central settlement, and a clergyman
+established there, and a month after matters were settled between him
+and Marion their wedding was celebrated, almost every settler on the
+Mohaka being present. The newly-married couple returned to The Glade for
+a week, Mr. and Mrs. Renshaw and Wilfrid remaining as the guests of Mr.
+Mitford. At the end of that time they returned, and with Mr. and Mrs.
+Renshaw sailed for Napier, where they took ship for England.
+
+"What would you have done if I had sailed away for England without ever
+mustering up courage to speak to you, Marion?" Mr. Atherton said as he
+stood by the bulwark with her that evening taking their last look at New
+Zealand.
+
+"I should not have let you go, sir," his wife said saucily; "didn't I
+know that you cared for me, and had I not refused all sorts of offers
+for your sake? I don't know what I should have done, or what I should
+have said, but I am quite sure I should not have let you go unless I
+found that I had been making a mistake all along. It would have been
+ridiculous indeed to have sacrificed the happiness of two lives merely
+because you had some absurd ideas about your age."
+
+"I never thought you cared for me, Marion, never."
+
+"That is because you never took the trouble to find out," his wife
+retorted. "Men are foolish creatures sometimes, even the wisest of
+them."
+
+Marion Atherton's life was one of almost perfect happiness. Mr. Atherton
+entirely gave up his wanderings abroad, and by dint of devotion to
+racquets and tennis in summer, and of hunting and shooting in winter, he
+kept down his tendency towards corpulence. He was an energetic
+magistrate, and one of the most popular men in the county. Mr. Renshaw
+resumed his former studies in archaeology, but they were now the
+amusement instead of being the object of his life, and he made an
+excellent agent to his son-in-law. Standing in the relation he did to
+Mr. and Mrs. Atherton, he and Mrs. Renshaw shared in their popularity,
+and occupied a good position in the county.
+
+Three years after their return to England they received the news that
+Kate Mitford had changed her name, and was installed as mistress at The
+Glade. Every five years Wilfrid and his wife, and as time went on his
+family, paid a visit to England. He became one of the leading men of the
+colony. A few years after his marriage Mr. and Mrs. Mitford had returned
+to England for good, and James Allen and Wilfrid succeeded to his
+business as a trader, and carried it on with energy and success, Mr.
+Atherton advancing Wilfrid sufficient capital to enable them to extend
+their business largely. In time The Glade became Wilfrid's summer
+residence only, the head-quarters of the firm being established at
+Napier. It is now conducted by his sons, he himself having returned home
+with his wife and daughters with a fortune amply sufficient to enable
+them to live at ease. Marion was pleased when, two years after her
+arrival in England, she heard from Wilfrid that Bob Allen had married
+the daughter of an officer settled on the Mohaka. The Grimstones both
+did well, and became prosperous farmers. Jack remained in Wilfrid's
+service until he left the colony, and is now a trusted agent of his sons
+in their dealings with the natives.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PRINTED AND BOUND IN GREAT BRITAIN
+
+_By Blackie & Son, Limited, Glasgow_
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Maori and Settler, by G. A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MAORI AND SETTLER ***
+
+***** This file should be named 33619.txt or 33619.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/3/6/1/33619/
+
+Produced by David Edwards, Graeme Mackreth and the Online
+Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This
+file was produced from images generously made available
+by The Internet Archive)
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.